Wasim Asghar

PE, P.Eng, JVt. Eng

 www.studyforfe.com

Study Guide for Fundamentals of Engineering (FE)

Electrical & Computer CBT Exam
- Third Edition -

Practice over 700 solved problems with detailed

solutions based on NCEES® FE Reference Handbook
Version 10.0.1

Wasim Asghar
PE, P. Eng, M. Eng
DISCLAIMER

This book is developed to assist reader in FE Electrical and Computer exam preparation. It has gone through multiple
review cycles to produce a high-quality text. However, there are no representations or warranties, express or
implied, about the completeness, accuracy, reliability, suitability, or availability with respect to the information,
products or related graphics contained in this book for any purpose. The author does not accept any legal
responsibility for the content within. By using this book, the reader agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the
author and publisher from any damages claimed because of the content of this book.

NCEES® is a registered trademark of National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveying. NCEES® did not
partake in the development of this publication. NCEES® does not endorse or otherwise sponsor this publication and
makes no warranty, guarantee, or representation, express or implied, as to its accuracy or content.

Copyright © 2020 by Wasim Asghar. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without prior written permission of the author.

Printed by KDP, An Amazon.com Company

Independently published

ISBN:9798670880909
Table of Contents
Preface 1
About the author 2
Chapter # 1 - Mathematics 4
Problem Set # 1.1 - Algebra and Trigonometry 5
Problem Set # 1.2 - Complex Numbers 7
Problem Set # 1.3 - Discrete Mathematics and Progressions 8
Problem Set # 1.4 - Analytic Geometry 10
Problem Set # 1.5 - Calculus 12
Problem Set # 1.6 - Differential Equations 15
Problem Set # 1.7 - Matrix and Vector analysis 16
Chapter # 2 - Probability and Statistics 18
Problem Set # 2.1 - Measures of central tendencies 19
Problem Set # 2.2 - Permutation/Combination & Laws of Probability 20
Problem Set # 2.3 - Probability Distributions 22
Problem Set # 2.4 - Expected values 23
Chapter # 3 - Ethics and Professional Practice 24
Problem Set # 3.1 - Code of Ethics & NCEES® Model Law and Rules 25
Problem Set # 3.2 - Intellectual Property 28
Problem Set # 3.3 - Safety 29
Chapter # 4 - Engineering Economics 30
Problem Set # 4.1 - Time value of money 31
Problem Set # 4.2 - Cost estimation 32
Problem Set # 4.3 - Risk Identification and Analysis 33
Chapter ft 5 - Properties of Electrical Materials 34
Problem Set # 5.1 - Electrical Properties 35
Problem Set # 5.2 - Thermal Properties 38
Chapter # 6 - Circuit Analysis 39
Problem Set # 6.1 - Kirchhoff's Laws - KCL, KVL 40
Problem Set # 6.2 - Series / Parallel Equivalent Circuits 42
Problem Set # 6.3 - Thevenin and Norton Theorems 44
Problem Set # 6.4 - Waveform Analysis 46
Problem Set # 6.5 - Phasors 48
Problem Set # 6.6 - Impedance 49
Chapter # 7 - Linear Systems 52
Problem Set # 7.1 - Frequency / transient response 53
Problem Set # 7.2 - Resonance 55
Problem Set # 7.3 - Laplace Transform 57
Problem Set # 7.4 - Transfer functions 59
Chapter # 8 - Signal Processing 61
Problem Set # 8.1 - Sampling 62
Problem Set # 8.2 - Analog Filters 63
Problem Set # 8.3 - Digital Filters, Z-transforms, Difference Equation 64
Problem Set # 8.4 - Continuous Time Convolution 66
Problem Set # 8.5 - Discrete Time Convolution 69
Chapter # 9 - Electronics 70
Problem Set # 9.1 - Semiconductor materials 71
Problem Set # 9.2 - Diodes and Thyristors 72
Problem Set #9.3-Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs) 75
Problem Set # 9 .4 -Junction Field Effect Transistors (JFETs) 78
Problem Set # 9.5 - Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFETs) 79
Problem Set # 9.6 - Operational Amplifiers 82
Problem Set # 9.7 - Power Electronics 84
Problem Set # 9.8 - Instrumentation 85
Chapter ft 10 - Power Systems 87
Problem Set # 10.1 - Power Theory/Single Phase Power 88
Problem Set # 10.2 - Transmission and Distribution / 3-Phase Power 90
Problem Set # 10.3 - Power Factor 93
Problem Set # 10.4 - Voltage Regulation/ Voltage Drop 94
Problem Set # 10.5 - Transformers 95
Problem Set # 10.6 - Motors & Generators 97
Chapter # 11 - Electromagnetics 99
Problem Set # 11.1 - Electrostatics 100
Problem Set # 11.2 - Magnetostatics 102
Problem Set # 11.3 - Electrodynamics - Maxwell's Equations 103
Problem Set # 11.4 - Electrodynamics - Wave Propagation 105
Problem Set # 11.5 - Transmission Lines 106
Chapter # 12 - Control Systems 107
Problem Set # 12.1 - Block Diagrams/Closed-loop response/Open-loop response 108
Problem Set # 12.2 - Bode Plots 110
Problem Set # 12.3 - System Stability/Frequency response 112
Problem Set # 12.4 - Controller performance 114
Chapter # 13 - Communications 116
Problem Set # 13.1 - Communication Theory 117
Problem Set # 13.2 - Amplitude Modulation 118
Problem Set # 13.3 - Angle Modulation 120
Problem Set # 13.4 - Fourier Transforms 122
Problem Set # 13.5 - Digital Communications 123
Problem Set # 13.6 - Multiplexing 124
Chapter # 14 - Computer Networks 125
Problem Set # 14.1 - Routing and Switching 126
Problem Set # 14.2 - Network Topologies / Types / Models 127
Problem Set # 14.3 - Internet Protocol Addressing: IPv4/IPv6 129
Problem Set # 14.4 - Protocols: TCP/UDP/ICMP 131
Problem Set # 14.5 - Network Security: Intrusion Detection/Prevention and Encryption 132
Chapter # 15 - Digital Systems 134
Problem Set # 15.1 - Number Systems 135
Problem Set # 15.2 - Boolean Logic 136
Problem Set # 15.3 - Logic gates and circuits 137
Problem Set # 15.4 - Logic minimization - K-Maps/SOP/POS 139
Problem Set # 15.5 - Sequential Circuits - Flip-Flops and Counters 141
Problem Set # 15.6 - Combinational circuits 144
Problem Set # 15.7 - Programmable Logic Devices/Gate Array 147
Problem Set # 15.8 - State Machine Design 149
Problem Set # 15.9 - Timing 151
Chapter # 16 - Computer Systems 153
Problem Set # 16.1- Microprocessor 154
Problem Set # 16.2 - Memory Technology and Systems 156
Problem Set # 16.3 - Architecture & Interfacing 158
Chapter # 17 - Software Engineering 159
Problem Set # 17.1 - Algorithms - Complexity, Big-0 160
Problem Set # 17.2 - Algorithms - Sorting, Searching 162
Problem Set # 17.3 Data Structures - Array/Linked List/Stack/Queue 164
Problem Set # 17.4 Data Structures - Tree/Graph 166
Problem Set # 17.5 - Software design methods/implementation/testing 168
Solutions 169
Chapter # 1 - Mathematics 175
Chapter # 2 - Probability and Statistics 199
Chapter # 3 - Ethics and Professional Practice 209
Chapter # 4 - Engineering Economics 213
Chapter # 5 - Properties of Electrical Materials 219
Chapter # 6 - Circuit Analysis 224
Chapter # 7 - Linear Systems 236
Chapter # 8 - Signal Processing 245
Chapter # 9 - Electronics 256
Chapter # 10 - Power Systems 279
Chapter # 11 - Electromagnetics 294
Chapter # 12 - Control Systems 306
Chapter # 13 - Communications 319
Chapter # 14 - Computer Networks 331
Chapter # 15 - Digital Systems 340
Chapter # 16 - Computer Systems 354
Chapter # 17 - Software Engineering 360
 Preface
'Practice makes perfect' is as applicable to passing NCEES® FE exam as it is to anything else.

The biggest challenge involved in FE exam preparation is the breadth of knowledge and the range of
topics involved. However, the silver lining is that exam questions may not be very complex. Therefore,
it is important to gain fundamental understanding of all topics (more on exam taking strategy later).
The intended audience of this book includes final year students, new graduates and seasoned
professionals who have been out of school for a while.

What is new in the 3rd edition?

Study Guide for Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Electrical and Computer CBT Exam has been well
reviewed by students and received a lot of positive feedback. The author has made continued efforts
to add challenging practice problems, introduce new concepts, offer detailed solutions, and update the
content based on the latest exam format. FE Electrical and Computer exam specification was updated
by NCEES® in January 2020 and exams are being conducted based on specification outlined in NCEES®
FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1 since July 1st, 2020. To address these changes, this latest edition
of Study Guide for Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Electrical and Computer exam includes:

• 200+ brand new practice problems.

• Addition of new topics as per latest specification.
• Step-by-step solution of problems with detailed explanations.
• Free access to additional resources - exam planner, webinar and course preview.

Best way to use this book

This book covers all 17 sections of NCEES® FE Electrical and Computer CBT exam. It is centered on the
idea of 'problem-based learning'. It is important to note that NCEES® FE Reference Handbook will be
the only reference material available to examinees during examination. As such, this book is designed
to improve reader's familiarity with the reference manual.

Students are suggested to conduct multiple reviews of applicable NCEES® FE Reference Handbook
sections and understand theory behind relevant concepts and formulas using all available resources. It
is recommended to attempt problems from each chapter right after studying relevant concepts. You
may not be able to solve all problems in the first attempt. Therefore, it is suggested to make note of
concepts requiring further review. Once the underlying theory is understood, you should revisit the
problems and attempt them again. After solving the problems, you are encouraged to review solutions
at the end of this book to reconfirm answers and methodology. In certain cases, there can be more
than one way of solving same question, but an effort has been made to present the most efficient
solving techniques. Whenever students encounter unfamiliar concepts and theories, it is
recommended to research those topics to gain necessary understanding. In fact, as part of exam
preparation effort, students should always think about ways in which questions can be asked.

1
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Organization of this book
Every chapter starts with a reference to applicable sections and page numbers of NCEES® FE Reference
Handbook, comments regarding difficulty level of the section and topic specific tips and formulas for
effective exam preparation. Solutions are grouped at the end for ease of review. As noted earlier, this
book is especially designed to develop reader's familiarity with the reference manual. Hopefully, after
solving all problems and reviewing relevant solutions, students will be able to comfortably navigate
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook and recall applicable formulas quickly during exam. Doing so will allow
them to save precious time on exam and help improve their performance.

Errata and Error Reporting

This book has undergone multiple review cycles and significant effort has been made to produce a
high-quality text. However, it is conceivable that certain errors might have gone unnoticed. Feel free to
report any errors, improvements, or questions at [email protected]. Please visit the website
www.studyforfe.com to view confirmed errata online.

About the author

Wasim Asghar is a licensed Professional Engineer in Texas (PE), Florida (PE) and Ontario (P. Eng) with
consulting experience in power system design, commissioning, and plant engineering for leading
clients in various industries including energy, mining, and manufacturing.

He holds Bachelor of Engineering - Electrical with distinction from McMaster University, Hamilton,
Canada (2010) and Master of Engineering - Power Systems from University of Toronto (2013) which
was completed with full-time work.

In 2014, he undertook a two-year international work assignment for a major project in Florida and
decided to pursue PE licensure in the United States. The road to licensure was challenging primarily
due to a lack of useful study material for FE and PE exams.

Wasim passed both exams in first attempts. The lessons learned during exam preparation process
inspired him to write this book which is designed to help aspiring professional engineers better prepare
for FE Electrical and Computer exam.

Acknowledgements

I am truly thankful to the support offered by my family.

Dedication

This book is dedicated to my loving wife.

2
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Additional resources that you may find helpful
FREE 'FE Electrical and Computer Exam Preparation Planner'
Visit www.studyforfe.com/free-planner-studyguide30/to download exam planner and learn about:

• Benefits of professional licensure for electrical engineers

• Challenges involved in preparing for FE Electrical and Computer exam
• FE-style sample problems
• Warm-up exercises to for exam planning
• 4-month exam preparation schedule
• Exam taking strategies

By going through this 40-page PDF, students will be able to get a better appreciation of FE Electrical &
Computer exam preparation requirements and how they should realistically allocate their time to
successfully pass this exam in first attempt. Although, exam preparation timelines can vary depending
on individual circumstances, schedules, and commitment levels, but one thing is certain that properly
planning and executing an effective exam preparation strategy with focused effort can go a long way in
increasing your chances of passing.

FREE "1-hour Webinar on 3-step framework for exam preparation'

Visit https://resources.studyforfe.com/webinar-studyguide30/ to register and learn about:

• 3-step framework for FE Electrical and Computer exam preparation.

• Discussion on importance of maintaining momentum, developing right mind set and planning.
• Brief comparison between the FE and PE exams.
• Overview of latest exam specification including various exam section changes.
• 4-month study plan for FE Electrical and Computer exam preparation.

3
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 1 - Mathematics
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Algebra and trigonometry
Complex numbers
Discrete mathematics
Analytic geometry
Mathematics 3 4 -6 2
Calculus
Ordinary differential equations
Linear algebra
Vector analysis

Facts about this section

• 1 1-17 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Mathematics is the most heavily weighted exam section.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Mathematics found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Some of the most important concepts and equations of this section include:
■ Algebra - Equations of straight line, quadratic equation/surface, logarithmic identities.
■ Complex Numbers - Rectangular form, polar form, conversions between rectangular
and polar forms, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, Euler's identity.
■ Trigonometry-Trigonometric functions/identities, law of sines and law of cosines.
■ Discrete Math - Set theory, functions, and mapping methods, directed graphs.
■ Analytic geometry - Mensuration of areas and volumes, conic sections.
■ Calculus - Differential calculus, function max/min and derivatives, L' Hospital's rule,
integral calculus, definite and indefinite integrals.
■ Differential equations - 1st order differential equation solutions - separation of variables
and integrating factor methods, 2nd order differential equation solutions.
■ Matrix and vector analysis - Matrix operations - addition, subtraction, multiplication,
determinant, transpose, inverse, Vector operations - dot product, cross product.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

B O N U S: Unlock a free 'Mathematics' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

• Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
4
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 1.1 - Algebra and Trigonometry
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 34 - 38 while solving these questions

Problem 1.1 a) Solve the following logarithmic equation for x:

log3(12x - 12) - log30 ) = 2

(A) 2 (B) 4

(C) 3 (D) 0

Problem 1.1 b )______ logarithm(s) do not exist and cannot be calculated.

(A) log(O.OOl) (B)log(O)

(C )lo g (-lO ) (D )lo g(lO )

Problem 1.1 c) Solve the following logarithmic equation for x:

log3(x + 1) + log3(x - 1) = 1

(A) 0 (B) 2

(C) -2 (D) 12

Problem 1.1 d) Solve the following logarithmic equation for x:

ln (x 2 — 7x + 11) = 0

(A) 4 (B) 2

(C) 5 (D) 3

Problem 1.1 e) Find the domain of logarithmic function lo g (x2 — 7x + 10).

(A) ( —oo, 2) (B) ( —oo, 5)

(C)(5,oo) (D) (-o o ,2 ) U (5,oo)

Problem 1.1 f) log5 7 can be expressed a s__________ in log10.

Problem 1.1 g) Simplify the following trigonometric expression:

sin2 x (cot2 x + 1)

(A)csc2x (B) 1

(C) 0 (D)tan2 x

5
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 1.1 h) Simplify the following trigonometric expression:

cot2 x
cot2 x + 1

(A )sin 2x (B)cos2 x

(C) tan2 x (D) 1

Problem 1.1 i) Simplify the following trigonometric expression:

(s in x + c o s x )2 — 1

(A) 0 (B) 2
(C )sin 2 x (D) s in x co sx

Problem 1.1 j) Simplify the following trigonometric expression:

csc2 x c o t 2 x + C SC 2 x

(A )sin 2x (B)sec2x
(C)csc2x (D)csc4 x

Problem 1.1 k) Calculate the length of side 'a' for the triangle shown below.

Problem 1 .1 1) Calculate the unknown angles A, B and C of a triangle if the lengths of its corresponding
sides are a = 2m, b = 3.46m and c — 4m respectively.

(A) A = 30°, B = 60°, C = 90° (B) A = 60°, B = 30°, C = 90°

(C) A = 30°, B = 90°, C = 60° (D) A = 90°, B = 30°, C = 60°

6
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 1.2 - Complex Numbers
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 36 - 37 while solving these questions

Problem 1.2 a) is a polar representation of (8 + 4;') — (5 + 0/).

(A) 3 + 4; (B) 5/53°

(C) 5/37° (D )8/7°

Problem 1.2 b) is a polar representation of (4 + 4;')/(2 + 3/).

(A) 3 + 4j (B )5/53°

(C) 1.5/—11° (D) 8/7°

Problem 1.2 c )_______ is a rectangular representation of 2/30° x 4 /1 5 °.

(A) 8/45° (B) 8 + V2;

(C) 5.7 + 5.7; (D) 8

Problem 1.2 d )_______is a rectangular representation of 4/30° + 6 /3 0 °.

(A )10/60° (B) 24/90°

(C) 8.6 + 5; (D) 5.4 + 3.8;

Problem 1.2 e) 3 + 4; can be expressed a s .

(A) 5(cos 53° + j sin 53°) (B) 5ej53

(C) 5/53° (D) All of the above

Problem 1.2 f) The complex conjugate of Z = (2 + 6;') x (3 + 3;') is ___________

Problem 1.2 g) 2 cos 6 + ;4 sin 6 canbe expressed a s using Euler's identity.

_

(A) e*6 + e~>9 (B) e;0 — 3e~ie

(C) 3eje — e~>6 (D) 3eje + e~ie

1
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 1.3 - Discrete Mathematics and Progressions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 34 - 35, 50 while solving these questions

Problem 1.3 a )_______ is a proper subset of set {2,4, 6,8,10,12}.

(A) {2, 3, 4, 5} (B) {2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14}

(C) {2, 4, 6} (D) {2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12}

Problem 1.3 b )_______ is a subset of set {a, b, c, d, e}.

(A) {x, y, z} (B) {a, b, c, d, e}

(C){a, f, h, e} (D) None of the above

Problem 1.3 c) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} and {a, b, c, d, e} are examples o f_________ sets.

(A) Disjoint (B) Proper

(C) Sub (D) Overlapping

Problem 1.3 d )_______ is a cartesian product of {1, 2} x {a, b, c, d}.

(A) {(l,a),(l,b),(2,a),(2,b)}

(B) {(^ a U l^ M ^ cM ^ d J^ ^ a M ^ b M ^ cM ^ d )}

(C) U a A U b A U c A U d A U a ^ U b ^ U c ^ A d ,!)}

(D) None of the above

Problem 1.3 e) Which one of the following relation(s) is not an example of a function?

(A) {(l,b ),(l,c),(l,d )} (B) {(l,a),(2,a),(3,a)}

(C) {(l,a),(2,b),(3,c)} (D) None of the above

Problem 1.3 f) {(a,l),(b,l),(c,2),(d,2)} is an example o f_______ function.

(A) Injective (B) Surjective

(C) Bijective (D) It's not a function

Problem 1.3 g) The 35th term of progression given below is ________ .

2, 4, 6, 8,10,12 -

Problem 1.3 h )_______ is the sum of an arithmetic progression with 120 terms for which first term ‘
and last term is 259.

8
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 1.3 i) The 12th term of progression given below is _______.

3, 9, 27, 81 -

Problem 1.3 j ) ______ is the sum of a geometric progression for which first term is 1, last term is 19683
and common ratio is 3.

Problem 1.3 k) Select appropriate region(s) representing^ n B.

R4

Problem 1.3 I)__________ correctly represents the set of vertices for following directed graph?

(A) {A, B, C, D} (B) {A, B, C, D, E}

(C) {A, B, C, D, E, E} (D) None of the above

Problem 1.3 m)
©
correctly represents the set of edges for above given directed graph?

(A) {(A,C),(A,B),(B,C),(D,B),(D,C),(C,E),(E,E)}

(B) {(A,C),(B,A),(C,B),(D,B),(D,C),(C,E),(E,E)}

(C) {(A,C),(A,B),(B,C),(B,D),(C,D),(C,E),(E,E)}

(D) {(A,C),(A,B),(B,C),(D,B),(C,D),(E,C),(E,E)}

Copyrighted Material © 2020

 Problem Set # 1.4 - Analytic Geometry
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 35,39 - 45 while solving these questions

Problem 1.4 a) Calculate the angle between two lines given by following equation.

y1 = xt + 4 y2 = 5x2 + 6

(A) 78.6° (B) 11.3°

(C) 38.6° (D) 33.7°

Problem 1.4 b) Find the equation of a straight line passing through points (2,10) and (3,12).

(A) y = 3x + 12 (B) y = 2x + 10

(C) y = 2x + 6 (D) y = 3x + 10

Problem 1.4 c) Equation of a straight line with slope = 2 and intercept = -5 is ______.

Problem 1.4 d) Equation of a straight line passing through a point (3,6) with slope = 4 is _______.

Problem 1.4 e) Select the option(s) that represent a straight line perpendicular to the line given below.

y = 4x + 4

(A) y = —x/4 (B) y = —x /4 + 4

(C) y = —Ax (D) y = —4x + 4

Problem 1.4 f ) __________ represents a parabola with an opening on the positive y-axis.

(A) (x - 4 )2 = 2(y - 2) (B) (x - 4 )2 = - 2 ( y - 2)

(C) (y - 2 )2 = - 4 ( x - 4) (D) (y - 2 )2 = 4(x - 4)

Problem 1.4 g) _represents an ellipse with a vertical major axis.

(* -£ + (z z i) ! = 1 (x -2 )2 (y -4 )2
' ' 144 100
(B) 100 144

■c . 0 - 2 ) 2 (y -4 )2
= 1 (D) (-y~4-)2 = j
' ' 144 100 100 144

Problem 1.4 h )__ represents a hyperbola with upward/downward openings.

(x -2 ) 2 (y -4 )2 (B )( ^ + (yz l )! = 1
(A) = 1
144 100 100 ' 144

(x -2 )2 (y -4 )2 (y -4 )2 ( x - 2)2
(C) 144 100
= 1 (D) 100 144

10
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 1.4 i) Calculate the eccentricity, directrix and focus of conic section given by following
equation: (x — 4 )2 = 12(y — 3).

Problem 1.4 j) Calculate the eccentricity, directrix and focus of conic section given by following
equation: (y — 8 )2 = 4 (x — 2)

Problem 1.4 k) Calculate the eccentricity, directrix and focus of conic section given by following
equation: 2 (x — 10)2 + 8(y — 6 )2 = 200.

Problem 1 .4 1) Calculate the eccentricity, directrix and focus of conic section given by following
equation: 2 (x — 10)2 — 8 (y — 6 )2 = 200

Problem 1.4 m) The volume of a right circular cylinderwith radius = lm andheight = 2m is _______

(A) 2.1m 3 (B) 4.2 m3

(C) 6.3 m3 (D) 3.7 m3

Problem 1.4 n) The area of a right circular cone with radius = 2m and height = 4m is ______ .

(A) 40 m2 (B) 10 m2

(C) 20 m2 (D) 8 m2

Problem 1.4 o )________ geometric shape will hold largest volume of liquid. Assume that all these
shapes have the same radius and height.

(A) Right circular cone (B) Right circular cylinder

(C) Paraboloid ofRevolution (D) All of them will hold same volume

11
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 1.5 - Calculus
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 45 - 49 while solving these questions

Problem 1.5 a) Calculate the derivative of following function:

f ( x ) = 2 tan2 x + sin2 x

(A) 4 ta n x + 2 sin x (B) 2 sec2 x + cos2 x

(C) 4 tan x sec2 x + 2 sin x cos x (D) 0

Problem 1.5 b) Calculate the derivative of following function:

/ ( x ) = 4 x 2 + 6x 4- 2 y 2

(A) 8x + 6 (B) 8x + 6+ 4y

(C) 4x + 6 + 2y (D) 0

Problem 1.5 c) Calculate the derivative of following function:

/ ( x ) = 2 tan x sec x

(A) 2 sin x / cos2 x (B) 2(tan2x secx + sec3 x)

(C) 2 tan x sec3 x (D) 0

Problem 1.5 d) Calculate the derivative of following function:

f { x ) = 2 sin-1 x + 2 cos-1 x

(A) 2 / V l - x 2 (B) —2 / V l - x 2

(C) 4 sin x co sx (D) 0

Problem 1.5 e) Calculate the derivative of following function:

3 x3 + 2x
/M = -J IT T

(A) (9 x 2 + 2)/2 (B) (1 2 x3+ 36x2 + 8 )/(2 x + 4 )2

(C) (9 x 2 + 2 )/(2 x + 4 )2 (D) 0

12
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 1.5 f) Calculate the local minimum and maximum points of function given below.

/ ( x ) — 4 x 3 + x 2 — 2x + 8 —1 < x < 1
1 1
(A) There is no minimum/maximum (B) x = - (min), x = —- (max)

1 1 1
(C) x = - (max), x = —- (m in) (D) x = - (m in), no max

Problem 1.5 g) Calculate the local minimum and maximum points of function given below.

f i x ) = 3 x 3 + 3 x 2 — 3x + 3 —2 < x < 1

(A) There is no minimum/maximum (B) x = ^ (m in ),x = —l(m a x)

1 1
(C) x = - (m ax),x = —l(m in ) (D) x = - (min), no max

Problem 1.5 h) The point of inflection for function given in problem 1.5 g) exists at x = __

Problem 1 .5 1) Evaluate the following limit:

3 x 2 — 2x — 1
lim-
x -n 4 x 2 + 6x — 10

(A) 0 (B) oo

( C ) 2 /7 (D) 4

Problem 1.5 j) Evaluate the following limit:

4 co sx
lim
x-^n/2 2 — 2 sin x

(A) n (B) 0

(C) oo (D) 3n/2

Problem 1.5 k) Evaluate the following indefinite integral:

4
/x + 3 dx
(A)^=tan 1 l x + C (B) 2 In |2x + 6| + C

(C) 4Vx"+~3 + C (D)41n|x + 3| + C

13
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 1.5 I) Evaluate the following indefinite integral:

J (sin2 x + cos2 x)d x

(A) 1 + C (B) x/2 — sin 2x /4 + C

(C) x + C (D) x/2 + sin 2x /4 + C

Problem 1.5 m) Evaluate the following indefinite integral:

J Ax In x d x

(A) 2 x 2 In x —x 2 + C (B) 4 x 2 In x + x 2 + C

(C) 2 x2 In x + x 2 + C (D) x 2 In x + x 2 + C

Problem 1.5 n) The definite integral of function given below is _________ .

I x e 2xdx
Jo

Problem 1.5 o) Select the point on graph at which derivative of given function is highest.

Problem 1.5 p) Select the point on graph at which derivative of given function is lowest.

14
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 1.6 - Differential Equations
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 51 - 52 while solving these questions

Problem 1.6 a) Solve the following 1st order linear differential equation with given initial values.

2y' + 4y = 0 y (0 ) = 6

(A )y = 3e-4t ( B)y = 6e~4t

(C)y = 3e~2t (D )y = 6e-2t

Problem 1.6 b) Solve the following 1st order linear differential equation.

y' + 2x 2y = x 2

Problem 1.6 c) Solve the following 1st order linear differential equation.

2y' = 8y + 2x

Problem 1.6 d) Solve the following 2nd order linear differential equation.

y " + 6y' + 9y = 0

Problem 1.6 e) Solve the following 2nd order linear differential equation with initial conditions.

y " + 2y' — 8y = 0 y (0 ) = 6, y '(0 ) — 0

Problem 1.6 f) The 2nd order linear differential equation given below is _______ .

2y " + 4 y' + 8y = 0

(A) Underdamped (B) Overdamped

(C) Critically damped (D) None of the above

Problem 1.6 g) Match the given differential equation with correct type.

1st order linear non-homogeneous differential equation

y " + 8 y' + 12y = 0 1st order linear homogeneous differential equation

2nd order linear homogeneous differential equation

15
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 1.7 - Matrix and Vector analysis
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 57 - 60 while solving these questions

Problem 1.7 a) Calculate the sum of matrices A and B given below.

1 0 O' 0 0 2"
A = 0 1 0 B = 0 2 0
.0 0 1. 2 0 0.
1 0 O' 0 0 2'
(A) 0 1 0 (B) 0 2 0
.0 0 1. 2 0 1.
1 0 2'
(C) 0 3 0 (D) A and B cannot be added
2 0 1.
Problem 1.7 b) Calculate the sum of matrices A and B given below.

1 0 O'
0 1 0 B = I1 0
LO 1
.0 0 1.
2 0 O' 2 0 0
(A) 0 1 0 (B) 0 2 0
.0 0 2. .0 0 2
2 0 O'
(C) 0 2 0 (D) A and B cannot be added
.0 0 1.

Problem 1.7 c) Calculate the product A x B of matrices A and B given below.

A = B
g a
'4 1' 2 Z
(A) 8 2 (B) 4 4
.12 3. .6 6.

3 (D) A and B cannot be multiplied

Problem 1.7 d) The determinant of matrix given below is

4 5
2 6

Problem 1.7 e) The inverse of matrix given in problem 1.7 d) is

16
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 1.7 f) Calculate the product A x B of matrices A and B given below.

2 1' 7 lo ­
A - 4 2 B = 8 ll
.6 3. .9 12.
14 20’ "7 20"
(A) 32 22 (B) 16 44
.54 36. .27 72.

(C) ^1 (D) A and B cannot be multiplied

Problem 1.7 g ) _______ option is NOT true for all matrices.

{A)AxB = B x A ( B) A + B = B + A

(C) [ A p ] " 1 = [ A Y ^ A ] (D) A -1 = adj ( A ) /det (A)

Problem 1.7 h) The determinant of matrix given below is ______________ .

'2 4 6"
8 10 12
.1 3 5.

Problem 1.7 i) The dot product of vectors A and B is _________

A = 2i + j + 3k

B = i + 2j + 4fc

Problem 1.7 j) The cross product of vectors A and B is ________ .

A = 3i + 2/ + k

B = i + 4/ + Ok

Problem 1.7 k) Select the correct resultant vector from the options given below.

X = / * Y= -----►

X + Y = _________

Option - A --------► Option - B Option - C <------ Option -

17
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 2 - Probability and Statistics
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Measures of central tendencies and dispersions
Probability distributions Probability and Statistics 6 3 -8 4
Expected value in decision making

Facts about this section

• 4 - 6 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Probability and Statistics is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to this section found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the most important concepts and equations of this section include:
■ Measures of central tendencies and dispersion - Calculation of mean, mode, median,
standard deviation, sample range and sample variance.
* Probability distributions - Normal distribution, binomial distribution, continuous
distribution, discrete distribution.
■ Laws of probability - Probability definition, law of total probability, law of joint
probability, Bayes' Theorem.
■ Expected value- Probability density functions, probability mass functions, cumulative
distribution function.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review the solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Probability and Statistics' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE
Electrical and Computer exam preparation course preview: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

18
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 2.1 - Measures of central tendencies
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 63 while solving these questions

Problem 2.1 a) Arithmetic mean of the observations given below is ________ .

2, 4,10, 8, 4, 8

Problem 2.1 b) The average annual summer temperature of a small town is recorded as follows.

2017(90°F) 2016(84°F) 2015(88°F) 2014(92°F)

What is the weighted average of summer temperature if 50% weight is assigned to 2017, 30% weight
to 2016,10% to 2015 and 10% to 2014?

Problem 2.1 c) Sample standard deviation value of the data set given below is ________ .

2, 4, 6, 8

Problem 2.1 d) Sample geometric mean value of the data set given below is ________ .

1, 2, 3, 4

Problem 2.1 e) Sample root mean square value of the data set given below is __________ .

3, 5, 6,11

Problem 2.1 f) Median value of the data set given below is ________ .

2, 3, 7,1, 4, 9, 0

Problem 2.1 g) Median value of the data set given below is __________ .

90, 60, 70,110, 50, 40, 200, 210

Problem 2.1 h) Mode of the data set given below is __________ .

1, 3, 3, 4, 9, 7, 3, 4

Problem 2.1 i) Sample range of data set given below is ________ .

50, 20,10, 50, 70, 80,100, 120

Problem 2.1 j) Select the option that correctly describes an important feature of 'mean'.

Influenced by outliers

Mean Not a measure of central tendency

Marginally influenced by outlier

19
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Set # 2.2 - Permutation/Combination & Laws of Probability
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 64 - 65 while solving these questions

Following scenario applies to problems 2.2 a) to 2.2 d). Assume that you are the captain of a local
basketball team. Your team roster comprises of 12 players.

Problem 2.2 a) How many ways can you select 5 team members from the given roster of 12 players if
order of selection is important?

(A) 479 x 106 (B) 95040

(C) 792 (D) 1

Problem 2.2 b) How many ways can you select 5 team members from the given roster of 12 players if
order of selection is not important?

(A) 479 X 106 (B) 95040

(C) 792 (D) 1

Problem 2.2 c) How many ways can you select 12 team members from the given roster of 12 players if
order of selection is important?

(A) 479 X 106 (B) 95040

(C) 792 (D) 1

Problem 2.2 d) How many ways can you select 12 team members from the given roster of 12 players if
order of selection is not important?

(A) 479 x 106 (B) 95040

(C) 792 (D) 1

Following scenario applies to problems 2.2 e) to 2.2 i).

Consider a sample space of S = {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}, events A = {1,3,5,710} and B = {1,2,4,6,10}.

Problem 2.2 e) The probability of event A = ________ and the probability of event B = ________ .

Problem 2.2 f) The probability that both A and B will occur simultaneously = __________ .

Problem 2.2 g) The probability that either A or B will occur alone, or both will occur together = ______ .

Problem 2.2 h) The probability that B occurs given that A has already occurred = __________ .

Problem 2.2 i) The probability that A occurs given that B has already occurred = __________ .

20
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 2.2 j) According to latest weather forecast, the probability that weekend will be sunny is 0.25,
cloudy is 0.35 and both sunny and cloudy is 0.15. What is the probability that weekend will be sunny,
cloudy or both?

(A) 0.25 (B) 0.30

(C) 0.45 (D) 0.75

Problem 2.2 k) The total probability of events A and B based on Venn diagram given below is _______ .

U p(A nB) = o.i

21
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 2.3 - Probability Distributions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 65 - 67 while solving these questions

Problem 2.3 a) According to a study, 8% of all adults will experience major depression at same point in
their lives. Assume that 90% of diagnostic tests for major depression detect it correctly (true positive)
whereas 10% of the tests are false positive. Calculate the probability of someone suffering from major
depression given that this person has already tested positive.

(A) 10% (B) 44%

(C) 56% (D) 90%

Problem 2.3 b) According to the data collected by a superstore chain, 20% of customers prefer online
shopping whereas remaining customers prefer in-store shopping. 50% of the customers preferring
online shopping are under 30 years of age and 40% of the customers preferring in-store shopping are
under 30 years of age.

What is the probability of randomly selecting a customer with preference for online shopping given
that person is under 30 years of age?

Problem 2.3 c) The probability of an engineering firm hiring a new graduate after an on-campus
interview is 0.10. The probability of hiring 2 new graduates after 30 on-campus interviews is ______ .

Problem 2.3 d) A top-seed tennis player is confident that she has 40% chance of winning each of the
four grand slam tournaments next year. What is the probability that she will win 2 to 4 grand slams?

Problem 2.3 e) The average GMAT® score of successful applicants at a well-reputed business school is
740 with a standard deviation of 20. Calculate the probability of admission for students with scores less
than 700. Assume that acceptance based on GMAT® score follows normal distribution.

Problem 2.3 f) The average useful life of a typical dishwasher is 10 years with standard deviation of 2
years. Calculate the probability of this dishwasher lasting between 12 to 14 years. Assume that useful
life of dishwasher follows normal distribution.

Following scenario applies to problems 2.3 g) to 2.3 i). Assume that a typical buyer of a new car
replaces the car after every 8 years (on average) with a standard deviation of 2 years. Moreover, it can
be further assumed that replacement timeline of a new car follows the normal distribution.

Problem 2.3 g) The probability that new car will be replaced in less than 2 years = ________ .

Problem 2.3 h) The probability that new car will be replaced after 10 years = ________ .

Problem 2.3 i) The probability that new car will be replaced between 4 - 6 years = ________ .

22
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 2.4 - Expected values
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 65 - 66 while solving these questions

Problem 2.4 a) The expected value of a discrete random variable X with probability mass function
f(.xk) given below is __________ .

1
f i x k) = ~ i 3 x k + 2) x1 = 2, x2 = 3, x3 = 4

Problem 2.4 b) The variance of X in problem 2.4 a) is ___________ .

Problem 2.4 c) According to the guidance provided by a fund manager at an investment bank, the fund
is forecasted to perform in accordance with following probability distribution.

Gain -5% 0% 5% 10% 15%

Probability 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.10

Investors can expect fund performance to be approximately______%.

Problem 2.4 d) A typical college student spends X portion of study time on completing assignments.
Probability density function of X is given as follows:

f { x ) = 4x — 1 0< x < 1

/(x ) = 0 otherwise

The expected value of study time spent by student in doing assignments is _______ .

Problem 2.4 e) According to the data collected by an automobile insurance company, the probability
distribution function of number of traffic violations per driver (denoted by X) can be given as follows:

f i x ) = 2 x~ 3 x > 1

fix ) = 0 otherwise

The expected number of traffic violations per driver is __________ .

Problem 2.4 f) The total area under probability density function and probability mass function is always
equal to ___________ .

23
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 3 - Ethics and Professional Practice
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Code of Ethics
Ethics and Professional Practice 4 -1 2
Intellectual property
Safety Safety 1 3 -3 3

Facts about this section

• 4 - 6 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Ethics and Professional Practice is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to this section found it NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the most important concepts of this section include:
■ Code of ethics - Background and definitions.
■ NCEES Model Law and Model Rules - Rules of professional conduct, licensee's obligation
to the public, licensee's obligation to the employer and client, licensee's obligation to
other licensees, general requirements for licensure, grounds for disciplinary action,
general requirements for certificate of authorization, exemption clause.
■ Intellectual property-Trademark, copyright, patent, industrial design, trade secret.
■ Safety - General understanding of safety with a focus on electrical safety, grounding,
material safety data sheets, personal protective equipment.
• Solve problem sets on next pages and review solutions at the end of this book.

* Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

24
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 3.1 - Code of Ethics & NCEES® Model Law and Rules
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 4 - 1 1 while solving these questions

Problem 3.1 a) A recently licensed professional engineer is working under the supervision of a senior
engineer. The junior engineer brings a potential design deficiency to senior engineer's attention which
can result in a safety hazard. The senior engineer tells her that design is based on standard industry
practice, construction is underway and the probability of safety incident occurring is practically zero.

What should be junior engineer's response after learning these facts?

(A) Junior engineer is not required to do anything further because senior engineer is competent.

(B) Junior engineer is not required to do anything further because he's already expressed concern.

(C) Junior engineer shall escalate his concerns to a higher level because he's still worried about safety.

(D) Junior engineer shall escalate his concerns to a higher level because it will raise his profile.

Problem 3.1 b) John is a well-respected engineer with a specialization in power systems and some
experience in control systems. John has an excellent track record of delivering successful projects on
time and under budget. He is asked by his new supervisor to take an assignment involving control
systems scope. John's new supervisor does not know his past work experience very well, but he has
heard wonderful things about John from other managers.

Is it ethically acceptable for John to accept this assignment?

(A) Yes, accepting the assignment will give him an opportunity to enhance skills in control systems.

(B) Yes, it is his professional obligation to work diligently for the employer.

(C) No, John is a power systems specialist and should only work in that area.

(D) John should review assignment requirements and his expertise with his supervisor and then decide.

Problem 3.1 c) Sarah is a professional engineer and she is brought on a project as a discipline lead. The
project is in its final design stages. Project manager has asked her to quickly review near complete
engineering documents and seal them. These documents were prepared by other engineers who are
not licensed. However, she knows that all of them are competent based on her experience.

Should Sarah sign and seal these documents?

(A) Yes, she is familiar with quality of team.

(B) Yes, she is the new lead and can review documents even though timeline is tight.

(C) No, documents were not developed by licensed engineers.

(D) No, documents were not developed under her supervision and review time may be insufficient.

25
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 3.1 d) A professional engineer is reviewing equipment drawings for compliance on behalf of a
client. The engineer notices that vendor is providing a technically acceptable alternative to one of the
specification requirements listed in the original bid. Upon further research, the engineer finds that
proposed alternative is cheaper than the one required by client's specification.

What should be included in the engineer's recommendation report to the client?

(A) Rejection, because proposed alternative is cheaper than original requirement

(B) Rejection, because proposed alternative is not the same as one required by specification

(C) Acceptance, because proposed alternative is technically acceptable.

(D) Acceptance, because proposed alternative is acceptable but negotiate a price credit from supplier.

Problem 3.1 e) Mark is a licensed professional engineer who independently provides engineering
consultancy services to various clients. He recently came across a proprietary solution while working
for one of his regular clients which can be deployed in similar scenarios faced by many other clients.

Can Mark use this unique solution in similar applications for other clients?

(A) Yes, Mark is obligated to provide solutions to his clients to the best of his knowledge

(B) Yes, Mark's clients hire him because of his wide experience and expect innovative solutions

(C) No, Mark cannot use confidential details without obtaining consent from relevant clients

(D) No, Mark is obligated to produce innovative solutions for each client.

Problem 3.1 f) Drag and drop correct NCEES® Model Rules, Section 240.15, Rule of Professional
Conduct reference in front of given description.

Respect of fellow licensees________ .

A-4 A -l C-3 C-4 B -l B-4

Problem 3.1 g) Which one of the following statements is correct?

(A) Only licensed engineers are expected to conduct themselves professionally.

(B) Ethical problems are always straight forward.

(C) Engineers possess special knowledge which is not common in public domain.

(D) Engineer is not liable for violating an ethical principle if he/she wasn't aware of it.

26
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 3.1 h) is not necessarily duly licensed as a professional engineer by the board.

(A) Engineer (B) Professional Engineer

(C) Professional Engineer, Retired (D) Engineering Intern

Problem 3.1 i) According to Model Law's 'General Requirements for Licensure' if an applicant has a
PhD. in engineering acceptable to the board and has passed the FE exam requires only________ years
of progressive engineering experience to meet experience requirements for PE licensure.

(A) 1 (B) 2

(C) 3 (D) 4

Problem 3.1 j) Boards have the power to take disciplinary actions on valid grounds against_________.

(A) Licensed engineers and interns

(B) Unlicensed individuals

(C) Firms holding certificate of authorization

(D) All of the above

27
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 3.2 - Intellectual Property
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 11 -12 while solving these questions

Problem 3.2 a) An advertising agency interested in protecting creative marketing slogans for its clients
should consider_________ registration.

(A) Trademark (B) Copyright

(C) Patent (D) Industrial design

Problem 3.2 b) A manufacturing plant interested in protecting its innovative processing techniques
should consider_________ registration.

(A) Trademark (B) Copyright

(C) Patent (D) Industrial design

Problem 3.2 c) A publishing company interested in protecting content of its publications should
consider________ registration.

(A) Trademark (B) Copyright

(C) Patent (D) Industrial design

Problem 3.2 d) A toy manufacturer interested in preventing competitors from copying its packaging
styles should consider________ registration.

(A)Trademark (B) Copyright

(C) Patent (D) Industrial design

Problem 3.2 e) Drag and drop correct symbol against given intellectual property registration products.

1 - Trademark_____

2 - Copyright_______

3 - Registered Trademark________

A=© B=® C=a D=T E=<€ F=™

Problem 3.2 f ) ________ qualifies as an example of intellectual property.

(A)Stocks (B) Bonds

(C) Software program (D) Real estate

28
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 3.3 - Safety
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 13 - 33 while solving these questions

Problem 3.3 a) National Electrical Code NEC® is developed and maintained b y______ and it is
adopted across the U.S. as a benchmark for safe electrical design, installation, and inspection.

(A) ANSI® (B) CSA®

(C) NFPA® (D) OSHA®

Problem 3.3 b )________ is the 'Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace'.

(A) NEC® (B) NFPA 70E®

(C) NFPA 77® (D) NFPA 80®

Problem 3.3 c )_______ scenario presents greatest risk to safety.

(A) High hazard and lowprobability (B) High hazard and high probability

(C) Low hazard andlow probability (D) Low hazard and high probability

Problem 3.3 d) Equipment/system grounding improves overall safety by means o f_________.

(A) Reducing magnitude of transient over-voltages

(B) Protecting personnel by offering a low resistance path to current

(C) Allowing faster operation of protective devices and isolation of faulty equipment

(D) All of the above

Problem 3.3 e) Electrical current as low a s _________ can cause death due to extreme pain,
respiratory arrest, severe muscular contractions, and inability of the victim to break electrical contact.

Problem 3.3 f) NFPA 70E® 'Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace' classifies arc flash PPE into a
total o f_______ categories based on arc flash incident energy levels.

Problem 3.3 g) Safety data sheets (SDS) of hazardous chemical products must include following
information about the product in addition to other applicable details.

(A) Name/Address/Phone Number of the manufacturer

(B) Chemical ingredients of the product

(C) Emergency procedures, PPE requirements, containment, and cleanup methods

(D) All of the above

29
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 4 - Engineering Economics
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Time value of money
Cost estimation
Engineering Economics 2 3 0 -2 3 7
Risk identification
Analysis

Facts about this section

• 5 - 8 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Engineering Economics is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to this section found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the most important concepts and equations of this section include:
■ Time value of money - Single payment compound amount, single payment present
worth, uniform series sinking fund, capital recovery, uniform series compound amount,
uniform series present worth, uniform gradient worth, uniform gradient future worth,
uniform gradient uniform series.
■ Cost estimation - Inflation, depreciation, book value, capitalized costs.
■ Risk identification - Definition, rate-of-return, decision tree.
■ Analysis - Break-even analysis, benefit-cost analysis.
• Learn how to use interest rate tables given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Engineering Economics' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE
Electrical and Computer exam preparation course preview: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

*Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
30
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 4.1 - Time value of money
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 230 while solving these questions

Problem 4.1 a) Calculate the future worth of $25,000 investment, 20 years from now. 12% annual
interest rate can be assumed for this calculation.

Problem 4.1 b) Calculate the present worth of a retirement fund if it is expected to be $750,000
approximately 30 years from now. 4% annual interest rate can be assumed for this calculation.

Problem 4.1 c )________converts an annuity into a future amount.

(A) Capital Recovery (B) Uniform Series Compound Amount

(C) Uniform Series Present Worth (D) Uniform Series Sinking Fund

Problem 4.1 d )________ converts a present value into an annuity.

(A) Capital Recovery (B) Uniform Series Compound Amount

(C) Uniform Series Present Worth (D) Uniform Series Sinking Fund

Problem 4.1 e) A retired couple is considering a 20-year term annuity with their $200,000 cash savings
at 6% annual interest rate. The yearly annuity amount they can expect to receive is _______ .

Problem 4.1 f) Amanda needs to have $________ saved today if she plans to get a 20-year term
annuity that will pay her $40,000 annually for the duration of its term? 8% annual interest rate can be
assumed for this calculation.

Problem 4.1 g) Calculate the future worth of an investment plan in which $15,000 are invested each
year for 30 years. Assume that investments earn interest annually at a rate of 8%.

Problem 4.1 h) A nominal interest rate of 10% compounded monthly will result in an annual effective
interest rate o f_____%.

Problem 4.1 i) Sam is considering enrollment into a 6-year degree program at a college that combines
undergraduate and graduate course work. He can expect to pay $40,000 in tuition for 1st year, $42,000
for 2nd year, $44,000 for 3rd year and so on (i.e. tuition will increase by $2,000 each year).

Assuming 2% annual interest rate, Sam's total tuition in today's dollars will b e_______ .

Problem 4.1 j) John just bought a brand-new car which he plans on keeping for 6 years. First year
maintenance cost will only include a routine oil changes that will cost him $600 each year. However,
due to regular wear and tear, maintenance cost will increase by $200 each year as shown below.

M y e a r-l = $600, M year-2 = $800, M year-3 = $1000, M year-4 = $1200, M year-5 = $1400, M year-6 = $1600

Assuming 8% annual interest rate, car's total maintenance cost in today's dollars will b e ________.

31
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 4.2 - Cost estimation
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 231 - 232 while solving these questions

Problem 4.2 a) Calculate the annual inflation adjusted interest rate if annual inflation rate is 4% and
annual interest rate over the same period is 6%.

(A) 6.5% (B) 24%

(C) 12.7% (D) 10.2%

Problem 4.2 b )____________ depreciation method results in same value decline each year.

Problem 4.2 c) The capitalized cost of operating a restaurant with an annual operating expense of
$20,000 at 8% interest rate is __________ .

Problem 4.2 d) What is the accumulated depreciation of a car at the end of year 4 if its useful life is 30
years. The initial cost was $32,000 and the end of life salvage value will be $2,000.

Problem 4.2 e) Calculate the accumulated depreciation of office printer in year 3 using MACRS factors
table if it has a useful life of 10 years. The initial cost was $7,000 and salvage value will be $500.

Consider the following scenario for problems 4.2 f) to 4.2 h). A transport truck is purchased for an
initial cost of $50,000. It has a useful life of 5 years and its salvage value is expected to be $2000.

Problem 4.2 f) As per MACRS factors table, accumulated depreciation of this truck after 2 years is ___.

Problem 4.2 g) As per MACRS factors table, book value of this truck after 2 years is _____.

Problem 4.2 h) Complete the following MACRS depreciation schedule for the given transport truck.

Year Current Depreciation Accumulated Depreciation Book Value

0 $50,000
1 $50,000 x 20% = $10000 $10,000 $50,000 - $10,000 = $40,000
2 $50,000 x 32% = $16000 $26,000 $50,000 - $26000 = $24,000
3 ? ? ?
4 ? ? ?
5 ? ? ?
6 ? ? $0

32
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 4.3 - Risk Identification and Analysis
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 231 - 232 while solving these questions

Problem 4.3 a) Two production lines have very different cost structures for manufacturing same item.
Production line A has a fixed cost = $100,000 and variable cost = $5 per item. Production line B does
not have any fixed costs, but it has a higher variable cost = $10 per item. The break-even point of both
production lines is ________ .

Problem 4.3 b )_______ statement(s) correctly describe the scenario in the previous problem.

(A) Line A performs better below break-even point (B) Line B performs better below break-even point

(C) Both perform equally at break even point (D) None of the above

Problem 4.3 c) It costs a chair manufacturing company $50,000 in fixed cost and $2 per chair in
variable cost to manufacture a chair. How many chairs need to be sold to break-even if selling price of
each chair is $27?

Problem 4.3 d) A logistics company has short-listed two contractors for a multi-year project involving
upgrade of its warehouse. Assuming identical scope of work, service quality and annual interest rate of
8%, which one of the following contractors is offering the most competitive quote?

Contactor A - Down payment of $20,000 and final payment of $40,000 in year 6.

Contractor B - $10,000 payment each year for six years.

Problem 4.3 e) Perform a cost-benefit analysis to determine which one of the following investment
options is more profitable (assume 10% annual interest rate)?

Option A - $100,000 purchase of stocks, expected to sell for $200,000 in year 10.

Option B - $100,000 real estate investment that pays $5000 in rent each year and is expected to sell for
$160,000 in year 10.

Option C - $100,000 deposit in a savings account earning 10% annual interest for 10 years.

Problem 4.3 f) Based on the decision tree given below, project____looks most promising.

33
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 5 - Properties of Electrical Materials
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Semiconductor Materials
Tunneling
Diffusion/Drift current
Electrical and Computer Engineering 382 - 383
Energy bands/Doping bands
P-N Theory
Note: Semiconductor materials are covered in Chapter 9 of this Study Guide.
Electrical Properties
Capacitance
Conductivity
Resistivity Electrical and Computer Engineering 355 - 359
Permittivity
Magnetic Permeability
Note: Electrical Properties are also discussed on page 95 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook
Thermal Properties
Expansion, Specific Heat
Material Science/Structure of Matter 104-105
Conductivity

Facts about this section

• 4-6 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Properties of Electrical Materials is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to this section found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• It is important to handle the units of measurement carefully because of complicated quantities.
• Some of the most important equations of this section relate to resistivity, resistance,
capacitance, magnetic field strength, inductance, and temperature coefficient.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

Note - Semiconductor materials are covered in Chapter 9 of this Study Guide.

* Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

34
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 5.1 - Electrical Properties
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 95,355 - 357 while solving these questions

Problem 5.1 a) Calculate the resistivity of a 100m long wire with a cross-sectional diameter = 2mm and
resistance = 5Q at 30°C.

(A) 3.14 x 10'7 Qm (B) 1.57 x 10‘3 Qm

(C) 3.14 x 10‘3 Qm (D) 1.57 x 10'7 Qm

Problem 5.1 b) The resistivity of cable 'A' is four times that of cable 'B'. Both cables can offer same
resistance under a given temperature if______________ .

(A) Area is same and A is twice as long as B (B) Area of B is four times that of A

(C) Area of B is one-fourth of A andsame length (D) Resistance of A and Bcannot be same

Problem 5.1 c) Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor can be increased by____________

(A) Decreasing the cross-sectional area of plates

(B) Decreasing the distance between plates

(C) Inserting an insulating material with a higher dielectric constant

(D) Options B & C are correct

Problem 5.1 d) Materials with high electrical conductivity typically have_____________ .

(A) High resistivity (B) High heat conductivity

(C) Low elasticity (D) Low ductility

Problem 5.1 e) Calculate the magnetic permeability of a medium in which an infinitely long wire
carrying 100A current produces 0.5T magnetic field at a distance of 50cm perpendicular to the wire.

Problem 5.1 f) Photoelectric effect can take place in ___________ under suitable conditions.

(A) Metals (B) Non-metals

(C) Liquids and gases (D) All of the above

Problem 5.1 g) How many electrons pass through a point on conductor if it carries 1mA current for 5s?

(A) 1.56 x 1015 (B) 3.12 x 1016

(C) 6.24 x 1012 (D) 3.12 x 1012

35
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 5.1 h) Calculate the energy stored in the electric field of a parallel plate capacitor that has
potential difference of 200V if the distance between two plates is 0.1m and area of each plate is lm 2
(assume that £ = 8.85 x 10~12 FrrT1).

(A) 8.85 x 1 0 11 J (B) 1.33 x 10'3 J

(C) 3.54 x 10'6J (D) 1.77 x 10'6 J

Problem 5.1 i) Calculate the voltage applied across a parallel plate capacitor carrying 400nC charge
with a 0.02m2 plate surface area and 0.01m plate spacing (assume that £ = 8.85 x 10 ~12 FmT1).

(A) 22.6 x 106 V (B) 2.2 x 10'14 V

(C )0 V (D) 1.5 x 10 10 V

Problem 5.1 j) The capacitance of parallel plate capacitor is lOO^F. Initial voltage across capacitor was
5V. Calculate constant charging current if voltage across capacitor is recorded as 10V after 3 minutes.

(A) 5.4|jA (B) 2.7|iA

(C) 16.6mA (D) 8mA

Problem 5.1 k) A 200jj.F capacitor has voltage v (t) = 240 sin(377t) V across it. Calculate the energy
stored in this capacitor as a function of time.

(A) 0/ (B) 5.76 sin2(377t) J

(C) 5.76 sin(142129t) J (D) 1.36sin2(377t) ]

Problem 5 .1 1) Calculate the capacitive charging current if voltage across a 100pF capacitor increases
by 10V in 5s.

(A) 1mA (B) 0.2mA

(C) 2A (D) 4A

Problem 5.1 m) The equivalent capacitance of circuit shown below is ________ .

36
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 5.1 n) What is the inductance of a lm long coil with 100 turns and a cross-sectional area of
0.1m2 (assume |i = 47t10-7 H/m)?

(A) 1.25mH (B) 1000H

(C) 0.625mH (D) 2.5mH

Problem 5.1 o) Calculate the voltage induced in a 5mH inductor if current in the inductor is increased
from 0 to 100mA in 2ms.

(A) 5V (B) 0.25V

(C) IV (D) 0V

Problem 5.1 p )____energy is stored in a lOOmH inductor carrying current i(t ) = t 2 at t = 10s.

(A) 100J (B) 10J

(C) 2.5J (D) 500J

Problem 5.1 q) Energy storage capacity of an inductor can be increased b y_________ .

(A) Decreasing voltage across it (B) Increasing number of turns

(C) Increasing its length (D) Options A, B, C are correct

Problem 5.1 r) The equivalent inductance of circuit shown below is ________ .

1H

2H

2H

37
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 5.2 - Thermal Properties
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 104 -105 while solving these questions

Problem 5.2 a) Bi-metallic strip of a thermostat should be made of materials w ith__________

(A) Different lengths (B) Different coefficients of thermal expansion

(C) Same resistivity (D) Same density

Problem 5.2 b) A material of lm length is kept at room temperature (296 K) and constant pressure. It is
observed that a 7K temperature rise results in an engineering strain of 3 x 10‘3. Calculate the
temperature required to cause 6 x 10'3 engineering strain for this material.

(A )319 K (B) 307 K

(C )310 K (D) 303 K

Problem 5.2 c) A design engineer is calculating space allowance required for railway steel track
expansion. Thermal expansion coefficient of steel being used is 1.2 x 10'5oC 1. Temperature is expected
to increase from an average of 20 °C to a peak of 45 °C. Calculate the strain that can be experienced by
rail tracks due to thermal expansion.

(A) 3 x lO'2 (B) 30 x 10'5

(C) 50 x 10'5 (D) 75 x 10‘6

Problem 5.2 d) What is the temperature coefficient of a given metal specimen if its resistance doubles
with a 25K temperature rise?

Problem 5.2 e) Resistivity of a material is completely independent o f______________ .

(A) Resistance (B) Volume

(C) Temperature (D) Depends on resistance, temperature & volume

Problem 5.2 f) Students are measuring heat capacities of three different samples of same liquid.
Sample 1 = 1kg, sample 2 = 2kg and sample 3 = 3kg.

______ option correctly describes the heat capacities of given samples.

(A) Sample 1 > Sample 2 > Sample 3 (B) Sample 1 < Sample 2 < Sample 3

(C) Sample 1 = Sample 2 = Sample 3 (D) It cannot be determined

38
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 6 - Circuit Analysis
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Kirchhoff's Laws - KCL, KVL
Series/parallel equivalent circuits
Thevenin and Norton theorems
Node and loop analysis Electrical and Computer Engineering 3 5 7 -3 6 1
Waveform analysis
Phasors
Impedance

Facts about this section

• 1 1 -1 7 questions can be expected on the exam according to NCEES® FE specification.

• Circuit Analysis is one of the most heavily weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Circuit Analysis found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the important equations relevant to this section include Ohm's Law, KCL, KVL, voltage
divider, current divider, Thevenin, Norton, source transformation, average value, effective
value, and RMS value.
• Revisit basic circuit theory using your university/college electrical textbook.
• Circuits can be solved using different methods such as KCL, KVL, Thevenin, Norton,
superposition but certain techniques may be better suited for a given problem.
• Maximum power transfer occurs when Z* = Z j h.
• Equivalent resistance in series R s = R x + R 2 + R 3 ..... + R n
• Equivalent resistance in parallel Rp = 1/(1 /Ri + I/R2 + 1 /^ 3 ..... + l/ ^ n )
• Equivalent inductance in series Ls = + L2 + L3 ..... + L n
• Equivalent inductance in parallel Lp = 1/(1/Li + 1/L2 + 1 / I3 .......+ 1 / L n)
• Equivalent capacitance in parallel Cp = Ct + C2 + C3 ..... +Cn
• Equivalent capacitance in series Cs = 1/(1 /Cx + 1/C2 + 1/C3 .................................... +1/Cn)
• Sinusoidal signals require conversion to a standard form (cosine) for phasor representation.

B O N U S : Unlock a free 'Circuit Analysis' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

*Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

39
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 6.1 - Kirchhoffs Laws - KCL, KVL
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 357 while solving these questions

Problem 6.1 a) Calculate the voltage across lOkQ resistor in the circuit shown below using KCL.

(A) 70.5V (B) -14.6V

(C) 1.46mV (D) 5V

Problem 6.1 b) Calculate the current passing through 2kO resistor in following circuit using KCL.

173

(A) 4mA (B) 3mA

(C) 2mA (D) 6mA

Problem 6.1 c) Calculate the voltage across 30 resistor in the circuit shown below.

4£2

(A) 2.5V (B) 1.87V

(C) 7.5V (D) 3.75V

40
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 6.1 d) Calculate the current Ix in the circuit shown below.

2on

(A) 4A (B) 3.5A

(C) 7A (D) 1.7A

Problem 6.1 e) Calculate the current passing through the lkQ resistor in the circuit shown below.
5kQ

(A) 3.1mA (B) 5mA

(C) 2.5mA (D) 1.5mA

Problem 6.1 f) Calculate the current passing through the 5kQ resistor in the circuit shown below.

1Qk£2 2 left

41
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 6.2 - Series / Parallel Equivalent Circuits
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 357 while solving these questions

Problem 6.2 a) Find the equivalent resistance between terminals A-B of the circuit shown below.

lo k o

(A) 5kQ (B) 7.5kQ

(C) 2kQ (D) 3.4kQ

Problem 6.2 b) Find the equivalent resistance between terminals A-B of the circuit shown below.
10kft

(A) 2kQ (B)3kO

(C) lkQ (D) 5kQ

Problem 6.2 c) Find the equivalent resistance between terminals A-B of the circuit shown below.

1kQ 5kfl
A “AAAr AAAr

4 kn 2kn 10k£l

(A) 7kQ (B)3.5kQ

(C) 1.5kQ (D)5kQ

42
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 6.2 d) Find the equivalent resistance between terminals A-B of the circuit shown below.

5kO

(A) 3.0k0 (B) 2.75kQ

(C) 0.825kQ (D) 5.50kQ

Problem 6.2 e) The equivalent resistance between terminals A-B of the circuit shown below is

1k£i

43
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 6.3 - Thevenin and Norton Theorems
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 357 - 358 while solving these questions

Problem 6.3 a) Thevenin equivalent voltage Voc between terminals a-b of following circuit is ___

2kfi 2k£2

(A) 10V (B) 5V

(C)37V (D)100V

Problem 6.3 b) Thevenin equivalent resistance Req of the circuit given in problem 6.3 a) is

Problem 6.3 c) Thevenin equivalent resistance Req of the circuit given below is ________ .

(A) 1.25kfl (B) 5kft

(C) 2.5kH (D) 3kft

44
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 6.3 d) Norton source current Isc between load terminals a-b of given circuit is

Problem 6.3 e) Norton equivalent resistance Reqof the circuit given in problem 6.3 d) is _____

Problem 6.3 f) Norton source current Isc between load terminals a-b of the following circuit is

8A

Problem 6.3 g) Norton equivalent resistance R eqof the circuit given in problem 6.3 f) is _______ .

Problem 6.3 h) In the problem 6.3 f), use source transformation to calculate the Thevenin equivalent
voltage Vth = ______ .

45
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 6.4 - Waveform Analysis
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 359 - 360 while solving these questions

Problem 6.4 a )_______is the maximum voltage of a full-wave rectified sinusoid with Vef f = 10K.

(A) 20.5V (B) 5V

(C) 14.1V (D) 10V

Problem 6.4 b) Calculate the sum of following sinusoids:

V1 = 10 cos(500t) V2 = 15 cos(100t + 45°)

(A) 25 cos(600t + 45°) (B) 10 cos(500t) - 10.6 cos(100t) + 10.6 sin(100t)

(C) 150 cos(500t) cos(100t + 45°) (D) 10 cos(500t) + 10.6 cos(100t) — 10.6 sin(100t)

Problem 6.4 c )____is the frequency of sinusoidal signal given by 100 cos(500t + 50°).

(A) 500Hz (B) 250Hz

(C) 79.5Hz (D) 50Hz

Problem 6.4 d )___ is the average value of a half-wave rectified signal given by 15 cos(100t + 50°).

(A) 7.5 (B) 4.77

(C) 9.54 (D) 10.6

Problem 6.4 e) The average value of periodic current waveform shown below is ____.

Amps

3 4 5
Time

46
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 6.4 f) Calculate the time-period of a single-phase voltage waveform given below.

\\ // \\ //
A \ /
* \2 3 / 4 5 6 \ 7 ^/seconds
\ / \ /
-2 '

(A) 3s (B) 5s

(C) 7s (D) 10s

Problem 6.4 g) In problem 6.4 f), calculate the frequency of voltage waveform.

(A) 0.1Hz (B) 0.2Hz

(C) 0.5Hz (D) 1Hz

Consider the following scenario for problems 6.4 h) to 6.4 j). A single-phase alternating current source
is given by following equation: i(t) = 40a/2 cos(377 1 + 30°) A

Problem 6.4 h) The peak waveform value of given single-phase current is _______ .

(A) 40 A (B) 40 V I A

(C) 20 A (D) 40/V2 A

Problem 6 .4 1) System frequency of given single-phase network is ______ Hz.

(A) 30 (B )50

(C )60 (D )377

Problem 6.4 j) Calculate the RMS value of current i(t) if it is full-wave rectified.

(A) 40 A (B) 40V2 A

(C) 20 A (D) 40/V2 A

47
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 6.5 - Phasors
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 360 - 361 while solving these questions

Problem 6.5 a) Calculate the phasor current of circuit shown below where Vmax = 100V\

(A) 100/60° A

(B) 12.5/-3Q0 A

(C) 7Q.7/-3Q0 A

(D) 1.8/-12Q0 A

Problem 6.5 b) Express v ( t ) = 212 cos (out + 50°) V in phasor form.

(A) 15Q/-4Q0 V (B) 212/50° V

(C) 150/50° V (D) 212/-4Q0 V

Problem 6.5 c) Express v (t) = 212 sin(w t + 50°) V in phasor form.

(A) 15Q/-4Q0 V (B) 212/50° V

(C) 150/50° V (D) 212/-4Q0 V

Problem 6.5 d) Calculate the phasor current of circuit shown below where Vmax = 100V.
soon
(A) 0.14/349° A

(B) 0.14/11.3° A

(C) 0.5/0^A

(D) 1.75/50° A

Problem 6.5 e) Calculate the phasor current of circuit shown below where Vmax = 100V.

(A) 70/10° A

(B) 1000/-80° A

(C )2665/100° A

(D) 550/-10° A

48
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 6.6 - Impedance
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 361 while solving these questions

Problem 6.6 a) Determine the equivalent impedance of the circuit shown below.

ion j2Q 20

(A) 12 - ; ft (B) 5 + 2 ft

(C) 2 - 3; f t (D) 0j £ l

Problem 6.6 b) Determine the equivalent impedance of the circuit shown below.

2Q

(A) 5 - 3j a (B) 2 - 3 / ft

(C) 1 + 2j t i (D) 10; ft

49
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 6.6 c) Determine the equivalent impedance of the circuit shown below if frequency is 60Hz.

(A) 50 + ;26525 ft (B) 50 - ;26525 ft

(C) 50 + ;535 ft (D) 50 - y535 ft

Problem 6.6 d) Determine the equivalent impedance of the circuit shown below if frequency is 60Hz.

(A) (10 + j2 ft) 11(-; 100 ft) (B) (10 + ;0.5 ft)||(-;100 ft)

(C) (10 + j0.75 ft)11( —y'26.5 ft) (D) 10 ft

Problem 6.6 e) The equivalent impedance of circuit given below is ______if system frequency is 60Hz.

5£2 -10j£l

50
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 6.6 f) Determine the load impedance 'Z' required for maximum power transfer.

10ft -5jiQ 2a 6ji2

_TYYTV.
AAAr Hh AAAr

5/25° V
2/Q?A
(b

(A) 10/3 (B) 12/3

(C) -jSl (D) 12 - jCl

Problem 6.6 g) Determine the load impedance 'I' required for maximum power transfer.

2a -in 5Q

1/Q?A

(A) 5 - 2j Q (B) 5 + 0.6j Q

(C) 5 Q (D) 1.66j Q

51
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 7 - Linear Systems
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Frequency / transient response
Resonance Electrical and Computer Engineering 3 6 1 -3 6 2
Transfer functions
Laplace transforms Mathematics 56

Facts about this section

• 5 - 8 questions can be expected on the exam according to NCEES® FE specification.

• Linear Systems is an average weighted exam section.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Linear Systems found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the important equations relevant to this section include RC and RL transient circuits,
RLC series and parallel resonance circuits and Laplace transform pairs.
• RLC series and parallel resonance circuits are very similar therefore students need to be careful.
• Carefully use correct quality factor equations after determining whether given circuit is RLC
series or parallel resonance circuit.
• Initial conditions of RC and RL transient circuit shall be established carefully.
• Transfer functions shall be converted to a standard form to calculate gain, poles, and zeros.
• Develop familiarity with Laplace transform pairs.
• Learn how to perform partial fraction expansion while calculating inverse Laplace transforms.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

* Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

52
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 7.1 - Frequency / transient response
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 361 - 362 while solving these questions

Problem 7.1 a) Assume that the switch shown in the circuit below has been in indicated position for a
long time. Calculate voltage across capacitor vc(t) 5 minutes after switch changes position at t = 0 s.

Switch changes position at t = Os

(A) 15V (B) 10V

(C) IV (D) 3V

Problem 7.1 b) Calculate the voltage across the capacitor vc( t ) for t > 0 in the circuit shown below.

10kQ

Switch opens at t = Os

(A) e~^2V (B) W e~ ^2V

(C) 10e~t/4V (D) 5e~t/2V

53
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 7.1 c) Calculate the current i(t) in the following circuit if the switch closes at t = 0 s.

Switch closes at t = Os

(A) 10(1 - e~z)A (B) 1 - e-sooooot^

-500000C -500000t —500000t

(C) e + 0.01(1 - e )A (D) 0.01 ( 1 - e )A

Problem 7.1 d) Assume that the switch has been in the indicated position for a long time. Calculate the
current i ( t ) after 10 time constants of opening the switch.
Switch opens at t = Os

(A) 0.5A (B) 22.6|iA

(C) 1A (D) 0.18A

Problem 7.1 e) Assume that the switch has been in the indicated position for a long time. Calculate the
voltage across capacitor vc( t ) after 5 time constants of changing switch position at t = 0 s.

Switch changes position at t = Os

10V
5mF 10k£2

(A) 9.99V (B) 2V

(C) 67mV (D) 35mV

54
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 7.2 - Resonance
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 362 while solving these questions

Problem 7.2 a) Calculate the resonant frequency of RLC circuit shown below.

10|j F 100Q 20mH

(A) 1414 rad/s (B) 250 rad/s

(C) 500 rad/s (D) 2236 rad/s

Problem 7.2 b) The bandwidth (BW) of the circuit given in problem 7.2 a) is ______ .

Problem 7.2 c) Calculate the maximum current of RLC circuit shown below (voltage source is 120VAC).

lOpF 10Q 10mH

(A) 4 A (B) 12 A

(C) 5 A (D) 7.5 A

Problem 7.2 d) The frequency at which maximum current occurs in problem 7.2 c) is ______ .

Problem 7.2 e) A parallel resonant circuit has R = 10 kfl, C = 100fiF, L = 100 mH. Calculate the
quality factor and bandwidth of this resonant circuit.

Problem 7.2 f) In the previous problem, recalculate quality factor and bandwidth of the resonant
circuit if the resistor, capacitor, and inductor are now arranged in series configuration.

55
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 7.2 g) Calculate the quality factor of the parallel RLC circuit shown below.

(A) 250 (B) 0.707

(C )500 (D )707

Problem 7.2 h) The bandwidth (BW) of circuit shown in problem 7.2 g) is

56
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 7.3 - Laplace Transform
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 56 while solving these questions

Problem 7.3 a) Find the Laplace transform of function: / ( t ) = e~bt (b > 0)

(C) — (D) —
' ’ s+b ' ' s -b

Problem 7.3 b) Find the Laplace transform of function: / ( t ) = e~atu ( t — 1)

1 p - (s + a )
(A) — (B) --------
s+a s+a

e~(s-a)
s -a

at ~ ( t — 1)
Problem 7.3 c) Find the Laplace transform of function: / ( t ) =— ten atu

#- \ s+a . \ e“ (s+a)
^ i.M a j- I I ^ (s-a )2

<C>e- (S+a)( < ^ + ^

Problem 7.3 d) Find the Laplace transform of function: / ( t ) = (e " 31 — — 3)

(A) e3s(-^
5+1- + S-+b3') (B) (s + l)(s + 3 )

<D > • ■ " < = ! - ^ P

Problem 7.3 e) Find the Laplace transform of function: / ( t ) = te~atS(t — 2)

(A) 2 e -2<« “) (B) ^

(C) e-<s+«> (D) —

' ' s+a

Problem 7.3 f) Find the Laplace transform of function: f i t ) — tu (t ) * sin At

(A) 4 / (s 2 + 16) (B) 4 /[s2(s 2 + 16)]

(C) 4 /s 2 (D) l / ( s 2 + 16)

57
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 7.3 g) Find the inverse Laplace transform of following function

5
F (s) =
(s + 3) + (s + 5)

(A) 3e~3t + 5e~5t (B) e~4t

(C) 2e~8t ( D ) V 4t

Problem 7.3 h) Find the inverse Laplace transform of following function

s+ 8
F ( s ) = (s + l ) ( s + 7 )

(A) e~8t + e~t — e~7t (B) e _t + e~7t

(C) — e ~7t) (D) 5e~7t — 8e_t

6

Problem 7.3 i) Find the inverse Laplace transform of following function:

s 2 + 2s + 1
F(5) = (s + 2 )(s)(s + 3)

( A ) ^ - —- e ~ 2t + - e ~ 3t (B) e~2t + e~3t + -

6 2 3 3

(C) te~2te~3t (D) S ( t ) ( e ~ 2t + e~3t)

Problem 7.3 j) Find the inverse Laplace transform of following function:

s+ 4
F (s ) =
(s 2)(s + 5)

(A) 5e_5t + - + — (B) - e ~ 5t + - t

4 5 5 4

(C) 7 -u (t ) + ^ t - ^ - e 5t (D) 25u(t) - e 5t

25 5 25

58
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 7.4 - Transfer functions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 56,361 - 362 while solving these questions

Problem 7.4 a) statements regarding transfer function are INCORRECT.

(A) Transfer function is the ratio of LTI system's output to input in Laplace domain

(B) Transfer function is the ratio of LTI system's output to input in time domain

(C) Initial conditions of LTI system are must be set to zero.

(D) Initial conditions of LTI system can be non-zero.

Problem 7.4 b) Transfer function of the LTI system given below is _________ .

dt J0

Problem 7.4 c) Determine the impulse response of the transfer function given below:

Problem 7.4 d) Calculate the transfer function V0/Vi for the circuit shown below.

(A) (fl||sL)/[(/? + sL)||(^)] (B) (R\\sL)/[R + (R + sL)\\(±)]

(C) (R + sL)/[(R + sL) || ( i ) ]

59
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 7.4 e) Calculate the transfer function V0/Vi for the circuit shown below.

rV V V

Lnmrv.
L
Vi Vo

(,A)R/(R\\sL) (B) [/? + (/? + £)]/0?||sL)

(c) ( * + £ ) / [ W W + (R + £ ) ] (d )[r + £ + (« + £ ) ] / [(s u rf) + ( R +

Problem 7.4 f) Calculate the transfer function V0/Vi for the circuit shown below.

R
“AAAr
Vi Vo

(A) R + ±\\(R + sL\\R) (B) R+±\\sL\\R

(C) ^\\sL\\R (D) (R\\sL\\l/sC)/[R + (R\\sL\\l/sC)]

60
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 8 - Signal Processing
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts Section Page #
Sampling, Aliasing, Nyquist Theorem 376
Analog Filters Electrical and Computer 379 - 380
Digital Filters, Z-Transform, Difference Equations Engineering 3 6 9 -3 7 1
Convolution 370

Facts about this section

• 5 - 8 questions can be expected on the exam according to NCEES® FE specification.

• Signal Processing is an average weighted exam section.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.
• Students with a major in telecommunication engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Signal Processing found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the important equations relevant to this section include continuous time convolution,
discrete time convolution, z-transform, and Nyquist theorem.
• Graphical convolution of continuous time functions involves flipping simpler function about y-
axis, determining regions of overlap, identifying limits of integration, and correctly calculating
integrals.
• Graphical convolution of discrete time functions involves flipping simpler function about y-axis,
determining regions of overlap, and calculating integrals.
• Develop familiarity with Z transform table and its application in difference equation.
• Identify signal with highest frequency to correctly apply Nyquist theorem.
• Calculate transfer functions of analog filter circuits given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook to
develop understanding through derivation.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review the solutions at the end of this book.

Note-Although convolution has been removed as a line item from FE Electrical and Computer
exam specification in the latest NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, it is still present in the Electrical
and Computer Engineering section of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Signal Processing' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical
and Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

• Exam specification details can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

61
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 8.1 - Sampling
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 225 and 376 while solving these questions

Problem 8.1 a) For perfect reconstruction of a band limited signal, it must b e______________

(A) Sampled at or above Nyquist rate (B) Passed through ideal low pass filter

(C) Modulated with high frequency signal (D) Options A and B are correct

Problem 8.1 b) The minimum sampling frequency required for perfect reconstruction of the message
signal sinc(lOOOTrt) + sinc(2 0 007rt) is __________ .

Problem 8.1 c) Sampling continuous time signal cos (30007rt + 9) at 2000 Hz will result in _________

A) Nyquist sampling (B) Critical sampling

C) Aliasing (D) Oversampling

Problem 8.1 d) In the previous problem, recovered signal will b e_________ if sampling rate is 2000Hz.

A) cos (30007it + 9) (B) cos (30007it — 9)

C) cos (10007rt + 0) (D) cos (10007rt — 0)

Problem 8.1 e) Determine the aliased frequency of x ( t ) = cos (500nt + 0) if it is sample at 500 Hz.

A) 500 Hz (B) 250 Hz

C) 0 Hz (D) There will be no aliasing

Problem 8.1 f) In the previous problem, recovered signal will be__________ if sampling rate is 200Hz.

A) cos (500?rt + 0) (B) cos (5007rt — 0)

C) cos (1007Tt + 0) (D) cos (10077t — 0)

Problem 8.1 g) Determine the aliased frequency of x (t ) = cos (4007it + 0) if it is sampled at 300 Hz.

A) 200 Hz (B) 300 Hz

C) 100 Hz (D) 400 Hz

Problem 8.1 h) In the previous problem, recovered signal will b e______if it is sampled at 150 Hz.

A) cos (4007rt + 0) (B) cos (4007Tt — 0)

C) cos (1007zt + 9) (D) cos (1007zt — 9)

62
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 8.2 - Analog Filters
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 379 - 380 while solving these questions

Problem 8.2 a) Identify the filter type given by following transfer function of an analog filter.

3 0 0 (0 )2+ ^ )
H{jco) = -------------------------- y
(Jco)2 + 100joi + 5q

(A) High-Pass Filter (B) Low-Pass Filter

(C) Band-Pass Filter (D) Band-Reject Filter

Problem 8.2 b )_____is the -3 dB (cut-off) frequency of a series RL circuit with Rs = 2kfl and L = 2H.

(A) 10 rad/s (B) 500 rad/s

(C) 1000 rad/s (D) 1500 rad/s

Problem 8.2 c) The series RL circuit mentioned in previous problem can be used as a ________ .

(A) High-Pass Filter (B) Low-Pass Filter

(C) Band-Pass Filter (D) Band-Reject Filter

Problem 8.2 d )______ is the -3 dB frequency of a series RC circuit with Rs = 2kfi and C = 50 fiF.

(A) 10 rad/s (B) 500 rad/s

(C) 1000 rad/s (D) 1500 rad/s

Problem 8.2 e) The series RC circuit mentioned in previous problem can be used as a ________.

(A) High-Pass Filter (B) Low-Pass Filter

(C) Band-Pass Filter (D) Band-Reject Filter

Consider a series RLC circuit with Rs = 2kQ, C = 50/iF and L = 2H for problems 8.2 f) to 8.2 h).

Problem 8.2 f) The bandwidth of this series RLC circuit is _______ .

Problem 8.2 g) This series RLC circuit can be used as a _______.

Problem 8.2 h) Calculate the lower cut-off frequency (t)L of this filter if its upper cut-off frequency o)v
is found to be 1500 rad/s.

(A) 10 rad/s (B) 500 rad/s

(C) 1000 rad/s (D) 1500 rad/s

63
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Set # 8.3 - Digital Filters, Z-transforms, Difference Equation
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 369 - 371 while solving these questions

Problem 8.3 a )___________ is used to solve a difference equation that models a discrete time system.

(A) Laplace Transform (B) Discrete Convolution

(C) Z-Transform (D) Integration

Problem 8.3 b) Find the z-transform of x[n] = u[n] — u[n — 5].

(A) z _1 + z ' 2 + z -3 + z~ 4 (B) 1 + z _1 + z~2 + z ~3 + z~ 4

(C) 5z -5 (D) 1 + z _1 + z~2 + z~3 + z~ 4 + z -5

Problem 8.3 c) Find the z-transform of x[n] = 0.2nu[n].

(A) CO2 z ~ xy (B) 0.2nz~1

( i C ) 0 . 2 / ( l- z - 1) (D) 1/(1 — 0.2z-1)

Problem 8.3 d) Find the z-transform of x[n] = [2 3 1 0 5].

(A) 2 + 3z -1 + z -2 -I- 5 z“ 4 (B) 1/(2 + 3 z_1 + z~2 + 5z -4)

(C) 5(1 - 0.75nz - 1) (D) 2 + 3z

Problem 8.3 e) Find the z-transform of x[n] = [2 3 1 0 5] (arrow indicates location of x[0]).

(A) 2 + 3 z_1 + z -2 + 5z~4 (B) 2 z2 + 3z + 1 + 5 z-2

(C) 5(1 - 0.75nz - 1) (D) 2 + 3z

Problem 8.3 f) Find the z-transform of x[n] = 5(0.75n)it[n].

(A) 5/(1 - 0.75z_1) (B) 5(0.75nz _n)

(C) 5(1 - 0.75nz _1) (D) 0.5” z~ n

Problem 8.3 g) Find the inverse z-transform of X ( z ) = 4 + 2 z _1 + 3 z-3 + z - s .

(A) {4,2,3,1} (B) {4,2,0,3,0,1}

(C) {0,4,2,0,3,1} (D) {4,2,3,1,0}

Problem 8.3 h) Find the inverse z-transform o f X ( z ) = z / (z — 0.5)

(A) 1/(1 - 0.5z_1) (B) 0.5n_1u[n]

(C) 0.5” u[n] (D) 1 - 0.5n

64
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 8.3 i) Find the inverse z-transform of X(z) = (5 z + 2)/ [(z — 1)(z —4)]

(A) i ( 4 nw[n] — l nu[n] + 5[n]) (B) cos[n] — 4nu[n]

(C) - 4 nu[n] + - u [ n ] (D)-5[n] —^u[n] + ^ 4 nu[n]

2 S 2 3 6

Problem 8.3 j) Find the inverse z-transform of X ( z ) = [(z — 2)(z + l) ] / [ ( z — 0.1)(z — 0.2)]

(A) ~0.1n - 2(0.2 ) nu[n] (B) -1 0 0 5 [n ] + 209(0.1)nu[n] - 108(0.2 ) nu[n]

(C) ±6 (n ) + 0.1 nu[n] + 0.3nu[n] (D) 0.56[n] + 2(0.1)nu[n]

Problem 8.3 k) Find the inverse z-transform of X ( z ) = (z + 0.5)/[(z — 0.1)(z + 0.4)]

(A) - —
2
S[n] + 12(0.1)nu[n] + - ( —0.4)nu[n]
2
(B) 4-0 .1 nu[n] + 2- ( - 0 . 4 ) nu[n]

(C) 2S[n] + 6(0.1)nu[n] —-(0

4
.4 )nM[n] (D )-(0
2
.1 )nu[n] + - 02 . 4 nu[n]

Problem 8.3 I) Solve the following difference equation to determine y[n ].

y[n] + y[n — 1] + 2y[n — 2] = x[n] + x[n — 1] + 2 x[n — 2] where x[ri\ = 4n

Problem 8.3 m) A digital filter based on a discrete-time, linear, time-invariant system is given by the
difference equation: y[n] + 2y[n — 1] = x[n] + 3x[n — 1], Determine the transfer function H (s ) if all
initial conditions are equal to zero.

Problem 8.3 n )________ is a type of non-recursive digital filter.

(A) Finite Impulse Response Filter (B) Infinite Impulse Response Filter

(C) Options A and B are correct (D) Non-recursive filters don't exist

Problem 8.3 o )________ is a type of recursive digital filter.

(A) Finite Impulse Response Filter (B) Infinite Impulse Response Filter

(C) Options A and B are correct (D) Non-recursive filters don't exist

Problem 8.3 p) Digital filtering does not involve________ .

(A) Sampling (B) A/D conversion

(C) D/A conversion (D) Phase modulation

65
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 8.4 - Continuous Time Convolution
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 370 while solving these questions

Problem 8.4 a )_______ option correctly represents the convolved output of x (t) and h( t ).

x {t ) — 4 ( u ( t ) - u ( t - 4 )) y ( t ) = 2 ( u ( t ) - u ( t - 2))

66
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 8.4 b) option correctly represents the convolved output of / ( t ) and /i(t).

h(t) = 3e *u(t )

(A) - e tf o r t < 0 , - e tf o r t > 0 (B) - e 2tf o r t < 0 , —- e ~ 2tf o r t

(C) ^e t f o r t < 0, ^ elf o r t > 0 (D)

Problem 8.4 c )______ option correctly represents the convolved output of x (t) and y(t).

x ( t ) = s in (t ) ( u ( t ) — u ( t — 7r ) )

(A) c o s(t) 0 < t < n, — c o s ( t ) n < t < 2 n

(B) s in ( t ) 0 < t < n, 1 - s in ( t ) n < t < 2 n

(C) c o s(t) -1 0 < t < n , 1 - co s (t ) n < t < 2 n

( D )l- co s ( t ) 0 < t < n, 1 — c o s ( t ) n < t < 2 n

67
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 8.4 d) option correctly represents the convolved output of x(t ) and y (t).

x(t)

3 y(t)
2

3 5 -4 -2

x(t) — 3 (u(t — 3) —u(t — 5)) y (t) = 2 (u(t + 4) —u (t + 2))

(A) 6(1 + t) for — 1 < t < 1, 6(1 — t ) for 1 < t < 3

(B) 1 + 6 1 for — 1< t < 1, 1 — 61 / o r 1 < t < 3

(C) 6(1 + t) /o r - 1 < t < 1, 6 ( 3 - t ) for l < t < 3

(D) 6(t) /o r — 1 < t < 1, 3 —t /o r 1 < t < 3

Problem 8.4 e) Find the convolved output of following functions for t > 2.

y(t)
2

x(t) = 2e 1 y{t) = u(t) — u(t — 2)

(A) 0 (B) 2(ef — e-t )

(C) 2(e~t+2 - e~z) (D) el — e_t_2

68
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 8.5 - Discrete Time Convolution
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 370 while solving these questions

Problem 8.5 a) Find the convolved output of discrete time functions x[n] and y[n] shown below.

(C) [ 0 2 4 8 4 2 0 ] (D) [02 620]

Problem 8.5 b) Find the convolved output of discrete time functions x[n] and y[n] shown below.

(C) [0 1 4 8 8 3 0] (D) [0 1 8 8 1 0]

Problem 8.5 c) Discrete time convolution is used to fin d _____________

(A) Zero input solution (B) Zero state solution

(C) Product of signals (D) Modulation index

Problem 8.5 d) The convolved output of x[n] = u[n] — u[n — 5] and y[n] = 0.2” u[n] is

Problem 8.5 e) The convolved output of x[n\ = u[n — 2] and y[n] = 0.4nu[n] is ___

69
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 9 - Electronics
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Semiconductor materials*
Discrete devices
Amplifiers Electrical and Computer Engineering 3 8 1 -3 8 8
Operational Amplifiers
Power Electronics
Instrumentation Instrumentation, Measurement and Control 220-225
Note: Semiconductor materia s belong to Properties of Electrical Materials but are discussed here.

Facts about this section

• 7 - 1 1 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Electronics is one of the most heavily weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Hard' by the author.
• Students with a major in electronics engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to 'Electronics' found in NCEES® FE ReferenceHandbook.

• Some of the most important equations relevant to this section include conductivity of semi­
conductors, contact potential, Shockley's equation, BJT's mathematical relationships, JFETs and
MOSFETs mathematical relationships.
• Learn how to calculate the Q-point of diodes, BJTs, JFETs and MOSFETs.
• BJT amplification takes place in the 'active region'.
• JFET/MOSFET amplification takes place in the 'saturation region'.
• Derive equations for two-source configuration of an ideal Operational Amplifier and CMRR
given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Familiarize yourself with workings of measurement devices such as RTDs, thermocouples,
Wheatstone bridge, ammeters, voltmeters etc.
• Review basic concepts related to power electronics and understand equations related to
choppers and rectifiers.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Electronics' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

70
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.1 - Semiconductor materials
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 382 - 383 while solving these questions

Problem 9.1 a )___________ is typically used as n-type doping material.

(A) Antimony (B) Silicon

(C) Germanium (D) Boron

Problem 9.1 b )___________ is typically used as p-type doping material.

(A) Antimony (B) Silicon

(C) Germanium (D) Boron

Problem 9.1 c) Intrinsic carrier concentration of a semi-conductor wafer at equilibrium is found to be

rij = 2 x 10lo77i-3 . Electron and hole mobilities are [xn = 0.20 m2V~1s~1 and np = 0.10m 2V'_1s _1
respectively. Calculate the conductivity of this semi-conductor wafer.

(A) 4.8 x 10 10 S/m (B) 9.6 x 1010 S/m

(C) 1.4 x 10'9 S/m (D) 7.2 x 1010 S/m

Problem 9.1 d) A p-n junction has acceptor concentration = 2 x 1015m -3, donor concentration =
2 x 1015m -3 and intrinsic concentration = 1 x 10lom ~3. Calculate the contact potential of this p-n
junction at 300 K.

Problem 9.1 e )____material class has the largest energy gap between valence and conduction bands.

(A) Semi-conductors (B) Conductors

(C) Insulators (D) All materials have same energy gaps

Problem 9.1 f) Drift current in semi-conductors (at constant temperature) can be increased b y______ .

(A) Increasing applied potential (B) Decreasing applied potential

(C) Increasing surface area (D) Decreasing surface area

Problem 9.1 g) Diffusion current is caused by difference in ______between different regions.

(A) Electric potential (B) Temperature

(C) Charge concentration (D) All of the above

Problem 9.1 h) Group_____elements of periodic table are typically used as p-type doping materials.

71
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.2 - Diodes and Thyristors
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 385 while solving these questions

Problem 9.2 a) Find the operating states of diodes Di and D2 in following circuit assuming ideal model.
1k£l D1 D2
(A) Di On, D2 Off AA/V H 4-
(B) Di On, D2On 2kfi 1V
5V

(C) Di Off, D2 On

(D ) D i Off, D2 Off

Problem 9.2 b) Calculate the current passing through diode shown below assuming ideal diode model.

4V

Problem 9.2 c) Calculate the diode current in given circuit assuming constant voltage drop Von = 0.7V.

■AAAr
iov ma
m a sv
Problem 9.2 d) Calculate the diode currents in given circuit assuming constant voltage drop V 0n = 0.7 V.

D1 2kfl 5kQ

Copyrighted Material © 2020

Problem 9.2 e) Calculate the minimum value of resistance for resistor R which is required for
maintaining Zener voltage Vz = 2V across the resistor R. Iz represents Zener knee current which is the
minimum current that must flow through the diode in reverse breakdown region.

Problem 9.2 f) The current flowing through the Zener diode circuit given below is

2kQ

Problem 9.2 g) A diode circuit has saturation current Is = 10 16A, emission coefficient rj = 2 and
diode current = 50/iA Calculate the voltage applied across this diode if it is operating at T = 300 K.

Problem 9.2 h) Calculate the average output voltage of a thyristor-based single phase half-wave
controlled rectifier with a purely resistive load if input voltage Vmax = 480K @ 60 Hz and thyristor is
fired at 60° in every positive half cycle of the input voltage.

Problem 9.2 i) In the previous problem, recalculate the average output DC voltage if a full-wave
controlled thyristor-based single-phase rectifier is used.

Problem 9.2 j) Match the semiconductor devices with correct controllability features.

SemiconductorDevices Controllability

1 - Thyristor (SCR) A - Fully controllable

2 -D io d e B-Semi-controllable

3 -B JT C - Uncontrollable

4 - MOSFET
73
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 9.2 k) A thyristor-based single-phase half-wave controlled rectifier is powered by a 110 VAC,
60Hz power source and it is connected to a 50 load resistor.

Select the graph that most accurately represents the voltage across resistor if firing angle is 45°

Vout Vout

(A) (B)

Vout Vout

A.
(c) (D)

74
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.3 - Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 386 while solving these questions

Problem 9.3 a) Calculate the emitter current IE and the voltage VCE for the BJT shown below.

(A) lE = 0, VCE = 0.5 V (B) lE = 0, VCE = 1.75 V

(C) lE = 2.09 mA, VCE = 1.68 V (D) lE = 1. 5mA, VCE = 2.5 V

Problem 9.3 b) Calculate the collector current lc and the voltage VCE for the BJT shown below.

7V q

(A) lc = 0 mA, VCE= 0.5 V (B) lc = 1.5 mA, VCE= 2 V

(C) lc = 0.75 mA, VCE= 0.1 V (D) lc = 1.13 mA, VCE= 1.3 V

75
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 9.3 c) Determine the operating region of the transistor shown in the circuit given below.

Problem 9.3 d) Calculate the emitter current IE and the voltage VCE for the BJT shown below.

(A) lE = 2.4 mA, VCE= 2.7V (B) lE =0 mA, VCE = 0.2V

(C) lE =0 mA, VCE= 10V (D) lE = 5 mA, VCE = 4.5V

76
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 9.3 e) Calculate the emitter current IE and the voltage VEC for the BJT shown below.

Problem 9.3 f) Calculate the emitter current IE and the voltage VEC for the BJT shown below.

Problem 9.3 g) Calculate the emitter current IE and the voltage VEC for the BJT shown below.
>10 V

5kQ

5k&
p=100
5 V O -— V V W

ik n

-10V<
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.4 - Junction Field Effect Transistors (JFETs)
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 387 while solving these questions

Problem 9.4 a) Consider the JFET circuit shown below for which IDSS = 7.5mA and pinch-off voltage
Vp — —3V. Calculate the value of source resistance Rs that will result in drain current iD = SmA.

Problem 9.4 b) Calculate the maximum transconductance gm of an N-channel JFET which has IDSS =
2mA and pinch-off voltage Vp = —4V.

Problem 9.4 c) The JFET given below is operating in __________ region (Vp = —SV, IDSs — 10mA).

(A) Cut-off (B) Saturation

(C)Triode (D) None of the above

Problem 9.4 d) In the previous problem, transconductance g m of given JFET is

78
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.5 - Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect
Transistors (MOSFETs)
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 388 while solving these questions

Problem 9.5 a) Calculate the drain current iD for the following transistor (K = Q.SmA/V2, Vt = IK ).

10V o

(A) OmA (B) 1.5mA

(C) 2.5mA (D) 3.2mA

Problem 9.5 b) Find the operating region of the transistor shown below (K = 0.5mA/V2 , Vt = IV).

5V
O

0 6V

79
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 9.5 c) Calculate the VDS for the MOSFET circuit shown below (K —0.2mA/V2 , Vt = IV).

(A) 0. 5V (B) 3.28V

(C) 0V (D) 1.75V

Problem 9.5 d) Calculate the drain current iD for the following transistor (K = 0.1 mA/V2 , Vt = —

(A) 5mA (B) 0.3mA

(C) 0.1mA (D) 0

80
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 9.5 e) Calculate the drain current iD for following transistor (K — Q.lmA/V2 , Vt — IV).
4V r s 10V

10kQ 10 k Q

20kQ 10kQ,

- t>-5V
Problem 9.5 f) Determine the operating region of MOSFET shown in the circuit shown below if
threshold voltage Vt = I V and conductivity factor K — 0.2SmA/V2.

Problem 9.5 g) Calculate the value of drain resistor Rt and source resistor R2 if drain current iD =
1mA, drain voltage VD = 1.2V, threshold voltage Vt = IV and conductivity factor K = 0.2SmA/V2.

20kfi

81
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.6 - Operational Amplifiers
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 381 - 382 while solving these questions

Problem 9.6 a) Find the output voltage V0 in the circuit shown below.
lOkn

Problem 9.6 b) Find the value of resistance 'R' in the circuit shown below if V0 = 12V.
R

Problem 9.6 c) Find the output voltage V0 in the circuit shown below.
6k£)

Copyrighted Material © 2020

Problem 9.6 d) Find the output voltage V0 in the circuit shown below.

10kfl SOkfl

Problem 9.6 e) Find the output voltage V0 in the circuit shown below.

10k0 5k<>

Problem 9.6 f) Consider the basic BJT differential amplifier circuit shown below. Determine the value of
VB2 for which h i = 2IE2 if threshold voltage Vt = IV.

Problem 9.6 g) In the previous problem, IE1 = __and IE2 — ____ if current source IE- totai = 6 mA.
 Problem Set # 9.7 - Power Electronics
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 384 while solving these questions

Problem 9.7 a) Power electronics converter that changes DC to DC is called_________

(A) Inverter (B) Chopper

(C) Rectifier (D) Cycloconverter

Problem 9.7 b) A boost converter is to be used to feed a load at 600VDC from a 150VDC source.
Calculate the switching frequency of this chopper if its ON time is lOfis.

(A) 25kHz (B) 50kHz

(C) 75kHz (D) 100kHz

Problem 9.7 c) A buck converter with input voltage source of 60VDC feeds a resistive load of 5ft.
Calculate the output current if chopper frequency is 500Hz and its ON time is 1.5ms.

(A) 3A (B) 6A

(C) 9A (D) 12A

Problem 9.7 d) In the previous problem, recalculate the value of output voltage if Buck-Boost
converter is used instead of Buck converter.

(A) 120VDC (B) -120VDC

(C) 180VDC (D) -180VDC

Problem 9.7 e) Calculate the average DC output voltage of a 6-pulse rectifier with a line-line RMS
voltage of 600V @ 60Hz and no output filter.

(A)790V (B) 810V

(C)839V (D)862V

Problem 9.7 f) In the previous problem, recalculate the average DC output voltage if 12-pulse rectifier
is used instead of the 6-pulse rectifier.

(A)790V (B)810V

(C)839V (D)862V

Problem 9.7 g) Calculate the line-line RMS fundamental output voltage of a 3-phase voltage-source
inverter if it is used with an input voltage of 600VDC and sine-triangle pulse width modulation with a
peak modulation index of 0.5.

84
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 9.8 - Instrumentation
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 220 - 224 while solving these questions

Problem 9.8 a )__________ is not an example of a transducer.

(A) Microphone (B) Thermocouple

(C) Vernier Calliper (D) Photo diode

Problem 9.8 b) A 200Q RTD has a temperature coefficient = 0.0039 ° C 1 at room temperature (20°C).
Find the new resistance of this RTD if it is placed in a 35°C environment.

(A )188 Q (B )2 1 1 Q

(C )200 Q (D )255 Q

Problem 9.8 c) Determine Rx if Wheatstone bridge is balanced and Ri= 100Q, R2 = 1000Q, R3 = 500Q.

Problem 9.8 d) Calculate the incremental resistance R if the voltage difference in the circuit is 0.5V.

Problem 9.8 e) The gauge factor for a metallic strain gauge is found to be 1.5. Calculate the change in
resistance of this metal if its original resistance was 100ft and a strain of 0.10 was recorded.

(A) 5ft (B) 10ft

(C) 15ft (D) 20ft

85
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 9.8 f) Calculate voltage across lOkQ resistor measured by a voltmeter with 100 kQ resistance.

10k£l 20kn 50kn

(A) 2.5V

(C) IV (D) 5.5V

Problem 9.8 g) Recalculate the voltage across lOkQ resistor of the previous problem if 500kQ
voltmeter is used instead of the lOOkQ voltmeter.

(A) 2.1V (B) 1.98V

(C) IV (D) 5.5V

Problem 9.8 h) The percentage error in calculating current using 50 Q ammeter shown in the circuit
given below is _______ .

(A) 1% (B) 2%

(C) 2.5% (D) 5%

86
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 10 - Power Systems
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Pages
Power theory - power factor, single/three
phase, voltage regulation, voltage drop
Transmission and distribution -
Electrical and Computer
real/reactive losses, efficiency, delta/wye 363 - 368
Engineering
Transformers - connections, impedance
Motors and generators - synchronous,
induction, dc, servomotors, generators

Facts about this section

• 8 - 1 2 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Power Systems is one of the most heavily weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.
• Students with a major in power engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Power Systems found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
• Some of the most important equations relevant to this section include single-phase power,
three-phase power, conversion between line and phase quantities, conversion between A - Y
quantities, transformer turns ratio, power factor, voltage regulation, voltage drop, efficiency,
losses, power, torque and synchronous speed.
• Reactive power required to bring power factor angle from i^to d2 is given by:
Q = P(tan dx — tan d2) Q — o)CV2
• Transformer impedance varies depending on viewpoint (primary or secondary).
• Understand the difference between leading/lagging power factor and real/reactive power.
• Review basic power related concepts using your college/university textbooks.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

B O N U S : Unlock a free 'Power Systems' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

87
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 10.1 - Power Theory/Single Phase Power
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 while solving these questions

Problem 10.1 a )______W real power is supplied by a generator to a single-phase load of 20 + 5j ft

operating at 120V if line impedance is 2 + 2 / ft.

Problem 10.1 b) Calculate the current passing through the circuit shown below.

(A) 2/80° A

(B) 1.96/68.7° A

(C) 2/11.3° A
10/80°V 1 j£l
rms
(D) 1Q/-100 A

Problem 10.1 c) Calculate the apparent power supplied by current source to the circuit shown below.

(A) 20/90° VA

(B) 100/0£ VA 5ft

(C) 2QO/-67.30 VA

(D) 50/C£ VA

Problem 10.1 d) Calculate the total power (in Watts) absorbed by the circuit shown below.

10 a 5j&

88
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 10.1 e) Calculate the average power absorbed by 5H resistor shown in circuit given below.

(A) 1W

(B) 5W -2jfl

(C) 25W
1Q
(D) OW

Problem 10.1 f) Calculate the real power delivered by a single-phase voltage source v (t)
120V2 cos(3771) V to a purely resistive load as shown in the circuit given below.

(A) OW 20 fi

(B) 120W

(C) 720W

(D) 2400W

Problem 10.1 g) Calculate the real power delivered by a single-phase voltage source v (t)
120V2 cos(377t) V to a purely inductive load as shown in the circuit given below.

(A) OW 20mH

(B) 120W

(C) 720W

(D) 2400W

Problem 10.1 h) Calculate real power delivered by a single-phase voltage source v ( t ) =

120V2 cos(377t) V to a purely capacitive load as shown in the circuit given below.

(A) OW

(B) 120W

(C) 720W

(D) 2400W

89
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Set # 10.2 - Transmission and Distribution / 3-Phase Power
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 while solving these questions

Problem 10.2 a) Calculate the line voltages of a balanced 3-cj) Y- connected system if Van = 120/30° V.

(A) 120/30° V, 1207-30° V, 120/150° V (B) 208/30° V, 12Q/-3Q0 V, 120/150° V

(C) 208/60° V, 208/-60° V, 208/180° V (D) 120/60° V, 12Q/-6Q0 V, 120/180° V

Problem 10.2 b) A balanced 3-4> Y- connected load with Zv — 20 + 5jfi is connected to a positive-
sequence balanced 3-<J> Y- connected source Van — 120/30° V. Calculate the phase current Ian.

(A) 5.8/-1Q40 A (B) 5.8/16° A

(C) 22/30° A (D) 22/-12Q0 A

Problem 10.2 c) Calculate line current II supplied by a balanced positive-sequence 3-<(> Y- connected
source Van = 277/0° V to a balanced 3 cj> Y network with = 5 + 5j f l and ZUne = 1 + 1jI2.

(A) 15/Of A (B) 195/-150 A

(C) 33/-450 A (D) 3.3/-450 A

Problem 10.2 d) Calculate the load voltage of a positive sequence balanced 3-4> Y-Y network consisting
of Van = 120/60° V source with Z Une = 2 + 1//2 and Z ioad = 10 + 10ji2.

(A) 104/63° V (B) 120/30° V

(C) 16.5/44.5° V (D) 110/53° V

Problem 10.2 e) Calculate the load impedance of a positive sequence balanced 3-4* Y-Y system with
source voltage Van = 120/0° V. line current Ian = 5/-5°A and Zline = 0.5 + 0.25ji2.

(A) 10.5/55° O (B) 23.5/5.7° Q

(C)7.8/9fO (D) 13/50° Q

Problem 10.2 f) Calculate the line current Ia in a network comprising of A source Vab = 208/30° V
powering a 3-4> balanced Y-connected load bank with Zphase — 10 + 5jH (assume lossless line).

(A) 18.5/30° A (B) 1Q.7/-26.50 A

(C) 18.5/-26.50 A (D) 10.7/30° A

90
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 10.2 g) Calculate the line current Ia provided by a balanced 3-cj> Y-connected source with
Van = 120/0° V to a balanced 3 4> A connected load having per phase Zphase = 10 + 2jSl.

(A) 20/12°A (B) 15/45 °A

(C) 25.8/-250 A (D) 35.3/-11.30 A

Problem 10.2 h) Calculate the equivalent Wye load for a load network consisting of balanced 3 4» Y-
loads in parallel with balanced 3 4> A loads if Zphase_Y = 10 + Sjfl and Zphase_A = 6 + 9jil.

(A) 2.8 Q (B) 4.2 Q

(C) 8.4 Q (D) 12.6 Q

Problem 10.2 i) Calculate the equivalent A load in the previous problem.

(A) 2.8 Q (B) 4.2 Q

(C) 8.4 Q (D) 12.6Q

Problem 10.2 j) A positive sequence balanced 3- <J) Y-Y network has source voltage Van = 120/0° V
feeding load impedance 20/0° Q. Calculate the power generated by source if Zune = 0/2.

(A) 720 VA (B) 2400 VA

(C) 360 VA (D) 2160 VA

Problem 10.2 k) A food processing plant consumes 200 kW at 0.83 pf lagging. It is serviced by a l-4>
distribution line carrying 400 A current. What is the voltage across load?

(A) 500 V (B) 200 V

(C) 600 V (D) 0.5 V

Problem 10.21) Calculate the losses of a l-4> distribution line if it provides 200 A to a small municipality
that consumes 100 kW at 600 V and 0.85 pf lagging.

(A) 2 kW (B) 20 kW

(C) 10 kW (D) 0 kW

Problem 10.2 m) Calculate phase voltage at service entrance of a hospital (consuming 125 kW) which is
being fed by a lossless 3-cj) balanced Y network providing 300 A line current at 0.694 power factor.

(A) 416 V (B) 200 V

(C )289 V (D )600 V

91
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 10.2 n) The diagram given below shows secondary winding of a three phase 480V/208V Delta-
Wye transformer. Calculate the voltage between terminals A and B.

208/0v

(A) 480V (B)120V

(C) 208V (D)360V

Problem 10.2 o) In the previous problem, calculate the voltage between terminals C and N.

(A)480V (B) 120V

(C) 208V (D)360V

92
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 10.3 - Power Factor
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 while solving these questions

Problem 10.3 a) Calculate the size of a capacitor bank for 600V/60Hz system required for increasing
the power factor of an industrial facility from 0.75 pf lagging to 0.9 lagging. The real power
consumption of this industrial facility is 200 kW.

(A) 400|iF (B) 293|iF

(C) 703piF (D) 586|J.F

Problem 10.3 b) An automotive plant contains a 480V MCC that feeds several induction motors. The
total real power demand of this MCC is lOOkW and the overall power factor at this MCC is found to be
0.60. Calculate the magnitude of reactive power that must be provided locally to this MCC by a
capacitor bank to improve its power factor from 0.60 lagging to unity.

(A) 33kVAR (B) 133kVAR

(C) 15kVAR (D) OkVAR

Problem 10.3 c) A 750 fxF capacitor bank operating at Vrms = 400V, 60 Hz is to be connected in parallel
to an industrial load consuming 75 kW at 0.80 power factor lagging. The power factor after connecting
this capacitor bank will be_______ .

Problem 10.3 d) An electrical utility is providing 3-phase 75 kVA power supply at 0.85 lagging power
factor and another 3-phase 35 kVA power supply at 0.75 lagging power factor to a customer operating
a 600V, 60 Hz system. The overall power factor at customer's end is _______ .

Problem 10.3 e) A balanced 3-phase positive sequence source Van — 120F/0°V, 60Hz is connected to a
3-phase phase Y-connected load that consumes 375 kW at 0.85 power factor lagging. A balanced 3-
phase Y-connected capacitor will be installed in parallel with this load. Calculate the per-phase
capacitance of this capacitor bank if power factor needs to be improved to 0.95 lagging.

(A) 10|_iF (B) 8nF

(C)15mF (D)7mF

93
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 10.4 - Voltage Regulation/ Voltage Drop
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 while solving these questions

Problem 10.4 a) A power transformer is rated 2.5 MVA 13.8 kV/600 V with no-load secondary voltage
of 650V. Calculate the voltage regulation of this transformer.

(A) -5% (B) 2.5%

(C) 8.3% (D) 4.7%

Problem 10.4 b) For an ideal transformer, voltage regulation is always__________ .

(A) > 1 (B) > 2.5

(C) = 0 (D) * 0

Problem 10.4 c) A distribution transformer is rated 10 kVA 4000 V/400 V with equivalent series
impedance = 1 + 0.5; ft. Calculate the voltage regulation at 0.85 lagging power factor.

Problem 10.4 d) A power transformer is rated 5MVA 12000V/240V with voltage regulation of 5%.
Calculate the no-load voltage rating of this power transformer.

(A )276 V (B) 252 V

(C )360 V (D )240 V

Problem 10.4 e) A leading power factor will result in ________ voltage regulation.

(A) > 0 (B) < 0

(c) = o (D) > 1

Problem 10.4 f) Voltage drop occurs due to of a line.

(A) Resistance (B) Reactance

(C) Both resistance and reactance (D) None of the above

Problem 10.4 g) A single-phase 240V power source is feeding a 20A, 0.85 lagging power factor load
with a #10 AWG copper conductor in a steel conduit such that XL = 0.063fi/1000/t R = 1.2fi/1000/t.
One-way length of this circuit is 500 feet. Calculate the approximate total voltage drop of given circuit.

(A) 9.3V (B) 17V

(C) 19V (D)21V

94
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 10.5 - Transformers
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 while solving these questions

Problem 10.5 a) A distribution transformer has 50:1 turns ratio. Calculate the primary voltage if 1A
current flows through a 12Q load connected on transformer secondary.

(A) 50 V (B) 600 V

(C) 12 V (D) 1 V

Problem 10.5 b) The rated secondary current of a 1-phase 15kVA 600V/ 120V transformer is _____ .

(A) 125 A (B) 7.2 A

(C) 2.5 A (D) 15 A

Problem 10.5 c) A 5kVA distribution transformer has 10:1 turns ratio. Calculate the primary current if
rated secondary voltage of this transformer is 120V.

Problem 10.5 d) Q impedance Zv is seen by the transformer primary in the figure shown below.

50:1

Zp 10Q

Problem 10.5 e )____Q impedance Zs is seen by the transformer secondary in the figure shown below.

10:1

10kn Zs

95
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 10.5 f) Select the option that best describes transformer connections shown below.

(A) Delta-Delta a ---------------------------------------- ' --------- a'

(B) Delta-Wye HI 3 i XI

(C) Wye-Delta ^ ' b'

(D) Wye-Wye H2 :x2

H3 X3

Problem 10.5 g) Select the option that best describes transformer connections shown below.

(A) Delta-Delta
L* • !
(B) Delta-Wye H I3 FXI
b'
(C) Wye-Delta
H2 X2
(D) Wye-Wye

• ■
H3 X3

Problem 10.5 h) Select the option that best describes transformer connections shown below.

(A) Delta-Delta
a -----------
(B) Delta-Wye
HI 3 EXI
(C) Wye-Delta b'
(D) Wye-Wye H2 X2

L• •
H3 3 fc X3

96
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 10.6 - Motors & Generators
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 while solving these questions

Problem 10.6 a) Calculate the number of poles present in a 3-(j> 480 V induction motor with
synchronous speed of 1800 rpm (system frequency is 60 Hz).

(A) 1 (B) 2

(C)4 (D )8

Problem 10.6 b) Find the synchronous speed of a 3-4> 600V 2-pole induction motor operating at 60Hz.

(A) 7200 rpm (B) 1800 rpm

(C) 3600 rpm (D) 1200 rpm

Problem 10.6 c) An existing synchronous motor is retrofitted from 50Hz, 4-pole construction to a 60Hz
2-pole construction. Calculate the change in its synchronous speed.

(A) 1500 rpm (B) 2100 rpm

(C) 3600 rpm (D) 0 rpm

Problem 10.6 d) Calculate the slip of a 2-pole 600V induction motor operating at 60Hz with a rotational
speed of 3400 rpm.

Problem 10.6 e) Calculate the rotational speed of a 60Hz, 4-pole 3-phase induction motor operating at
2.3kV and full-load slip of 0.1.

(A) 1800 rpm (B) 1980 rpm

(C) 1720 rpm (D) 1620 rpm

Following scenario applies to problems 10.6 f) and 10.6 g). A three-phase induction motor is rated as
480V, 50hp, 60Hz and has two poles.

Problem 10.6 f) Identify the operating state of this induction motor if it has a slip of value 1.5.

(A) Stationary (B) Braking

(C) Motoring (D) Generating

Problem 10.6 g) Identify the operating state of this induction motor if it has a slip of value -0.5.

(A) Stationary (B) Braking

(C) Motoring (D) Generating

97
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 10.6 h) An induction motor acts as a generator when________ .

(A) Rotor speed is less than synchronous speed

(B) Rotor speed is equal to synchronous speed

(C) Rotor speed is greater than synchronous speed

(D) Only synchronous motor can be run as a generator

Problem 10.6 i) Calculate the per phase armature voltage (Ea) of a 3-phase, Y-connected, lOOkVA,
480V, 60Hz synchronous generator if it has a synchronous reactance of IQ/phase with a terminal
voltage of 480V (line-line). Assume that load power factor is 0.90 lagging and armature resistance is
negligible.

(A) 277V (B) 347V

(C) 480V (D) None of the above

Problem 10.6 j) Select the statement that best describes the effect of increasing load current Ia on
synchronous generator's armature voltage Ea if constant power factor is maintained.

(A) Ea will increase byincreasing Ia (B) Ea will decrease by increasing Ia

(C) Ea will remain constant (D) None of the above

Consider following scenario for next problems 10.6 k) to 10.6 o). A 240VDC separately excited DC
motor delivers 50hp mechanical power to the connected load at 1200rpm with 90% efficiency.

Problem 10.6 k) The total input power supplied to this DC motor is _______kW.

Problem 10.61) Mechanical torque developed by this DC motor is _______Nm.

Problem 10.6 m) The armature current Ia of this DC motor is _________________________________ A.

Problem 10.6 n) The internal voltage Va of this DC motor is _______V.

Problem 10.6 o) The armature resistance Ra of this DC motor is _____ ft (ignore armature inductance).

98
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 11 - Electromagnetics
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Electrostatics/Magnetostatics 3 5 5 -3 5 6
Electrodynamics - Maxwell's equations,
Electrical and Computer Engineering 59 - 60, 368
Wave propagation
Transmission Lines 369

Facts about this section

• 4 - 6 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Electromagnetics is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Electromagnetics found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Some of the important equations relevant to this section include Maxwell's equations,
transmission line reflection coefficient equation, standing wave ratio equation, wave equation.
• Review vector calculus and learn how to calculate divergence and curl of a given vector.
• Divergence of a magnetic field is zero.
• V x E = —dB/dt is the vector form of Faraday's Law.
• V x H = J + dD/dt is the vector form of Ampere's Law.
• 17. D = p is the vector form of Gauss' Law for electric field.
• V. B = 0 is the vector form of Gauss' Law for magnetic field.
• Read transmission line questions carefully to distinguish between characteristic impedance and
load impedance.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

99
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 11.1 - Electrostatics
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 355 - 356 while solving these questions

Problem 11.1 a) Calculate the magnitude of force on charge Q± = 5nC located at Px(0,1,0) due to
another charge Q2 = lO nC located at P2( 0,0,2).

(A) 50 x 10 6 N (B) 10 x 10'9 N

(C) 20 x 10'6 N (D) 90 x 10 9 N

Problem 11.1 b) Calculate the magnitude of force between point charges Q± — 10fiC and Q2 = 100juC
that are separated by 1cm distance.

(A)90kN (B)450kN

(C) 225kN (D) 4.5kN

Problem 11.1 c) Calculate the electric field intensity at origin due to point charges Qx = 50nC located
at (0,1, 0) and — —50 nC located at (0, -1, 0).

(A) 0 V/m (B) 100 V/m

(C) 900 V/m (D) 50 V/m

Problem 11.1 d) Calculate the electric field at a point P between two infinitely large parallel plates
located in the x-y plane having charge densities ps and —ps respectively.

(A) 0 (B) ps/e

(C) 2ps/e (D) pse

Problem 11.1 e) Two infinitely long parallel wires (having line charge densities of + 2 C/m and -1 C/m
respectively) located along z axis have lm space between them. Calculate the electric field mid-way
between the two wires.

(A) 3 V/m (B) 0 V/m

(C) 2 x 1010 V/m (D) 1 x 1011 V/m

Problem 11.1 f) Calculate the amountof work required to bring a charge Q1 = 10 ~6C from infinity to
Px (0, 0, 0) in the presenceof another charge Q2 = 2 x 10~6C located at P2(2, 0, 0).

(A) 4.5 x 1 0 12 J (B) 4.5 x 10'3 J

(C) 9 x 1 0 12 J (D) 9 x 10"3 J

100
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 11.1 g) Calculate potential energy stored by system of two charges Qx — 5 x 10 6C and Q2 =
10~6C located at P1 (1, 0, 0) and P2 (0,1, 0) respectively.

(A) 63.6mJ (B) 31.9mJ

(C) 15.9mJ (D) 5mJ

Problem 11.1 h) System A containscharges — 50 x 10~6C and Q2 = 100 x 10_6C thatare lm

apart. System B contains charges Q3 — 5x 10-6 C and Q4 = 10 x 10-6 C that are 1cm apart.Select
the option that accurately represents potential energies of System A and System B.

(A) System A = System B = 45J (B) System A = 4.5 x 1013 J,System B = 45 J

(C) System A = 45J, System B = 4.5 x 1013 J (D) System A = 4.5 J, System B = 45 J

Problem 11.1 i) Calculate the amount of work that needs to be done to decrease the space between
Qi = 9 x 10 ~9C and Qx = 15 x 10~9C from lm to 1cm.

(A) 1.215 x 10'6 J (B) 15 x 10'4 J

(C) 1.202 x 10'6J (D) 1.202 x l0 '4J

Problem 11.1 j) Calculate the amount of work done in moving a charge Q± = 10 x 10-9 C through a
distance of 2cm along y-axis in a 200 V/m ax electric field.

(A) 4 x 10'8 J (B) 0 J

(C) 4 x 10 9 J (D) 2 x 10'9 J

Problem 11.1 k) Calculate the potential difference between two parallel plates that are lm apart and
have an electric field strength of 2000 V/m.

(A) 2000 V (B) 2 V

(C )0 V (D)100V

Problem 11.11) A point charge Qx = 100 x 10~9C is accelerated 200m between two parallel plates in
a constant electric field strength of lkV/m. Calculate the potential difference between these plates.

(A) 22.5 mV (B) 100 kV

(C) 200 kV (D) 1 kV

101
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 11.2 - Magnetostatics
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 355 - 356 while solving these questions

Problem 11.2 a) Calculate the force on a 2A current-carrying conductor of length 2m in a uniform

magnetic field = 0.5T (assume that angle between conductor and field is 30°).

(A) 2 N (B) 4 N

(C)0N (D) 1 N

Problem 11.2 b) Calculate the energy stored in a magnetic field that has a strength of 2A/m in a 2m 3
volume (assume |i = 4ji x 10"7 H/m).

Problem 11.2 c) Consider a 0.1m long conductor carrying 5A in a 10|fT magnetic field. If the force
resulting on this conductor is 1 jaN, the angle between conductor and magnetic field is _______ .

Problem 11.2 d) Calculate the voltage induced in a coil with 20 turns if flux passing through it changes
from O.IWb to 1.5Wb in 2s.

(A) -28 V (B) -14 V

(C) -1.4 V (D)-10V

Problem 11.2 e) A coil of length 20cm has 50 turns and a cross-sectional area of 2cm2. Calculate the
induced voltage if current is increased from 50mA to 100mA in Is (assume |i = p. = An x 10 ~7 H/m).

Problem 11.2 f) Calculate the magnetic flux density inside a torus of radius 2cm having 50 turns if 1A
current is passing through it.

Problem 11.2 g) Two infinitely long parallel wires are placed as shown below. The magnetic flux density
at point 'A' due to these wires (assume |i = An x 10 - 7 H/m) is _______.

Point A
(0,0,0 )

1A 3A

Problem 11.2 h) A current carrying wire in air is generating 0.1T magnetic flux density at a radial
distance of 20cm. The total current passing through this wire is ______.

102
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 11.3 - Electrodynamics - Maxwell's Equations
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 59 - 60, 368 while solving these questions

Problem 11.3 a) Calculate the divergence of electric field E given by following equation:

E = 3xi + 2y 2j + xk

(A) 3x + 2y2 + x (B) 3 + 4y2 + 1

(C) 0 (D) 3 + 4y

Problem 11.3 b) Calculate the divergence of a vector field D given by following equation:

D = xyi + yzj + xz 2k

(A) xy + yz + xz2 (B) y + z + 2xz

(C) x + z +2x (D) 0

Problem 11.3 c) Calculate the net electric flux from a hollow sphere which contains the point charges
Qa = + 1 nC , Qb — + 3 nC, Qc — + 1 nC and Qd = —2nC.

(A) OVm (B) 1017Vm

(C) 339Vm (D) 678Vm

Problem 11.3 d) Calculate the net flux from a hollow sphere of radius 5cm which contains two
concentric spheres. Inner sphere has a radius = 1cm with surface charge density = 3|iC/m2 and the
outer sphere has radius = 3cm with surface charge density = -5|iC/m2.

(A) 1250Vm (B) -5963Vm

(C) 3750Vm (D) 410Vm

Problem 11.3 e) Calculate the value of "a" given that B is a magnetic field.

B = 3 axi + 2yj — 2zk

(A) 3 (B) 1

(C) 0 (D) -1

Problem 11.3 f) Which of the following vector fields can be magnetic in nature?

A = 2x 2i + yj + 3z 2k B = 2y 2i + 3xj - 2xyk

(A) A (B) B

(C) Both A and B (D) Neither A nor B

103
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 11.3 g) A changing magnetic field is inducing an electric field E given by equation below

i? = 2yzi + 3x 2yj + x 2y 2k. Calculate the time rate of change of the magnetic field.

(A) —2yz i + 3x 2yj + x 2k (B) —2 x 2yi — (2y — 2xy2) j - ( 6 xy — 2z)k

(C) 3x2j (D) 0

Problem 11.3 h) Calculate the curl of an induced electric field produced by a changing magnetic field B
given by B = —cos2 (3t)k.

(A) - 2 cos (3 t ) i (B) sin2 (3 t) k

(C) - 6 cos (3 1) sin (3 t ) k (D) 5sin ( 3t)J

Problem 11.3 i) Match the entries in Column A with the correct entries in Column B.

Column A Column B

Gauss' Law for Electric Fields § E. dl = — ffs ^ . dS

dD
Gauss' Law for Magnetic Fields j>H.dl = Ienc + ffs dS

Faraday's Law D. dS = JJJV pdv

Ampere's Law $ svB.dS = 0

Problem 11.3 j) The total magnetic flux emitting from a closed surface S containing magnetic field B
within its boundaries is equal to _________ .

{k)dB/dS (B) B.S

(C ) B x 5 (D ) 0

104
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 11.4 - Electrodynamics - Wave Propagation
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 369 while solving these questions

Problem 11.4 a) The characteristic impedance of a transmission line is 100Q and its wavelength is 20m.
has. Find the expression for voltage on this transmission line at 100m distance.

(A) V+ej2n + V ~ e -j2n (B) V +ejl0n + F ^ e - -'1071

(C) V+ej200n + v ~ e ~ j200n (D) ^ ( V +ej2n + V~e ~j2n)

Problem 11.4 b) In the previous problem, find an expression for current at 100 m.

(A) V+ejl0n + V ~e -jl0n (B) ^ ( V +ejl0n + V~e ~jl0n)

^ loo ^ V+e^Wn ~ V~e~iWn') (D) None of the above

Consider the following scenario for next problems 11.4 c) and 11.4 d). Magnetic field intensity of an
electromagnetic wave is given by H = 10 cos(108t — 4 z ) a x A/m.

Problem 11.4 c) Calculate the frequency (Hz) of this electromagnetic wave.

(A) 2 x 10 8 (B) 10 8

(C) 108/tt (D) 10 8/2tt

Problem 11.4 d) Calculate the wavelength (metres) of this electromagnetic wave.

(A) n (B) n/2

(C) 7t/4 (D)7t/6

Consider the following scenario for problems 11.4 e) and 11.4 f). Electric field intensity of an
electromagnetic wave is given by £■ = 12 cos(2 x 109t — fiz)ax A/m. Assume that wave is travelling
at the speed of light (3 x 10 8m /s).

Problem 11.4 e) Calculate the time taken by this wave to cover a distance equal to 50% of wavelength.

(A)2tt/109 s (B) 2/10 9 s

(C) n/109 s (D) 7r / ( 2 x 109) s

Problem 11.4 f) Calculate the wavelength (metres) of this electromagnetic wave.

(A) 0.371 (B) 3n

(C) 3071 (D) None of the above

105
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 11.5 - Transmission Lines
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 369 while solving these questions

Problem 11.5 a) A transmission line with 100 Q characteristic impedance is connected to a 300 + 50jQ
load. The reflection coefficient r at the load is ______.

Problem 11.5 b) Calculate the standing wave ratio of a transmission line having characteristic
impedance = 500 and load impedance = 500 + 25jQ.

(A) 1 (B) 2

(C )10 (D )5

Problem 11.5 c) A transmission line has per unit length inductance = lOOmH per unit and capacitance
10|iF per unit. Calculate magnitude of load impedance that will allow a reflection coefficient r = 0.5.

(A) 100Q (B) 300Q

(C) 200Q (D) 5000

Problem 11.5 d) The wavelength of a transmission line with characteristic impedance = 2000 is 10m.
Calculate the input impedance at 100m if the line is connected to a purely resistive load of 5000.

(A) 10000 (B) 35000

(C) 2000 (D) 5000

Problem 11.5 e) Calculate the load connected at the end of a transmission line (2500 characteristic
impedance) if its standing wave ratio is 2 .

(A) 1000 (B) 3000

(C) 10000 (D) 5000

Problem 11.5 f) A lossless transmission line has maximum current magnitude of 10A and minimum
current magnitude of 2A. Calculate the reflection co-efficient of this transmission line.

(A) 1/2 (B) 2/3

(C) 3/4 (D) 1

106
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 12 - Control Systems
Key Knowledge Areas*

NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1

Concepts
Section Page #
Block diagrams
Closed-loop/Open-loop response, Stability Instrumentation, Measurement and
226-229
Controller performance - Steady-state Control
error, settling time, overshoot
Bode Plots Electrical and Computer Engineering 3 7 3 -3 7 4

Facts about this section

• 6 - 9 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Control Systems is an average weighted exam section.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated as 'Medium' by the author.
• Students with a major in controls engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Control Systems found in NCEES® FEReference Handbook.
• Some of the important equations relevant to this section include steady-state error - final value
theorem, stability, and Bode Plot.
• Derive transfer function of classical negative feedback control system model block diagram
given in NCEES® Reference Handbook to gain understanding of block diagrams, closed-loop and
open-loop response.
• Review the formulas related to controller performance - steady-state gain, damping ratio, 2%
settling time, percent overshoot etc.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Control Systems' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
107
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 12.1 - Block Diagrams/Closed-loop response/Open-
loop response
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 226 - 227 while solving these questions

Consider the feedback control system shown below for problems 12.1 a) and 12.1 b).

Problem 12.1 a) The closed-loop transfer function of this control system is ______ .

Problem 12.1 b) The open-loop transfer function of this control system is ________ .

Consider the following control blocks for problems 12.1 c) and 12.1 d).

Problem 12.1 c) Determine the equivalent transfer function if above given control blocks are
connected in parallel with each other.

Problem 12.1 d) Determine the equivalent transfer function if above given control blocks are
connected in series with each other.

Problem 12.1 e) Find the closed loop transfer function for following system.

kG±(s) kG^s)
( ' 1 +kG1(s)H(s) 1 ] 1 + H (s )

1 k G i(s )+ H(s)
(C)--------------------- (D )— ------------ —
l + k G x(s)H(s) 1+kG1(s)H(s)

108
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 12.1 f) Find the relationship between F (s ),i? (s), iV(s) and L (s ) for following control system.

Problem 12.1 g) Determine the closed-loop transfer function of the following control system.

Problem 12.1 h) Determine the closed-loop transfer function of the following control system.

109
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 12.2 - Bode Plots
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 373 - 374 while solving these questions

Problem 12.2 a) Select the option that best represents the open-loop transfer function G(s) for the
Bode Plot given below.

(A) 50/(s + 10)

(B) 50/(s + 1 0 ) ( s + 100)

(C) 14/(s + 10)

(D) 14/(s + 1 0 ) ( s + 100) (o rad/s

Problem 12.2 b) Select the option that best represents the open-loop transfer function G (s) for the
Bode Plot given below.

(A) 20/(5 + 10)

(B )2 0 /(s + l ) ( s + 10)

(C) 10/(s + 10)

(D )1 0 /s 2

Problem 12.2 c) Select the option that best represents the open-loop transfer function G (s) for the
Bode Plot given below.
G'(ju>)dB
(A) 2 0/(s + 10)

(B) 2 0/(s + 10)(s + 100)

(C) 10(s + 1 0 )/(s + 100)

(D) 10(s + 1 00)/(s + 10)

110
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 12.2 d) The open-loop transfer function G (s) for the Bode Plot given below is .

Problem 12.2 e) Select the option that correctly describes the Bode log phase angle plot of following
open-loop transfer function:

G(s)
(4s + 100)

(A) z.G(/2.5) = 0°, Z.G (/25) = 0 V G (/2 5 0 ) = 0°

(B) zG(/2.5) = 0°, zG(/25) = 90°,^G(/250) = o°

(C) zG(/2.5) = 0 V G (/2 5 ) = -45°,^G0'250) = 90°

(D) zG(/2.5) = 0°,zG(/25) = -45°,^G (/25) = -9 0 °

Problem 12.2 f) The magnitude gain of following open-loop transfer function is _

(50) (s + 2)
W (s + 10 0 ) (s + 10 0 0 )

Problem 12.2 g) The magnitude gain of following open-loop transfer function is .

s(s + 10 )

Problem 12.2 h) The magnitude gain of following open-loop transfer function is

10 0 s
G(s) =
s2 + 150s + 5000

111
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 12.3 - System Stability/Frequency response
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 226 - 227 while solving these questions

Problem 12.3 a) Stability of a control system depends o n _________ .

(A) Location of zeros (B) Location of poles

(C) Phase angle (D) None of the above

Problem 12.3 b) Options_____and______ represent stable control systems.

(A) Bounded input results in bounded output

(B) Bounded input results inunbounded output

(C) Poles are located in theleft half of s-plane

(D) Poles are located in theright half of s-plane

Problem 12.3 c) A control system with non-repeated poles on imaginary axis is considered_________ .

(A) Stable (B) Unstable

(C) Marginally stable (D) None of the above

Problem 12.3 d) A control system with repeated poles on imaginary axis is considered_________ .

(A) Stable (B) Unstable

(C) Marginally stable (D) None of the above

Problem 12.3 e) Determine the phase margin (PM) of a unity gain feedback control system for which
the open-loop transfer function is G (s) =

(A) 0° (B) 60°

(C )90° (D )180°

Problem 12.3 f) Determine the gain margin (GM) of a unity gain feedback control system for which the
open-loop transfer function is G(s ) = —

(A) lOdB (B) 12dB

(C) 20dB (D) 40dB

112
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 12.3 g) The closed-loop characteristic equation of following control system is

Problem 12.3 h) Compute the entry bi in Routh Array table of following closed-loop transfer function

s + 1
T(s) =
2 s 5 + 2 s 3 + 3 s 4 + 7s 2 + s + 10

s5 2 2 1
s4 3 7 10
s3 bi=?

Problem 12.3 i) Determine the stability of system given by the following closed-loop transfer function
using Routh Hurwitz criteria of system stability.

TO)
2s 4 + 3 s 3 + s 2 + s + 1

(A) Stable (B) Unstable

(C) Depends on K (D) Cannot be determined

Problem 12.3 j) Determine the range of k for which the system given by following closed loop transfer
function is stable.

r,. (fc)(s + 10)

U s)
3 s 3 + 5 s 2 + (k + 10)s + Sk

113
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 12.4 - Controller performance
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 227 - 229 while solving these questions

Problem 12.4 a) Transfer function of a first-order control system is given as follows:

y (s ) 4
W sj ~ 2s+ 1

Determine the time domain representation of output y (t ) if y 0 = 0 and r ( t ) = 5u (t)

Problem 12.4 b) In the previous problem, determine the time domain representation y (t ) if there is a
time delay 6 — 3 in the control system as shown below:

r(s ) 4e~3s
~R(s) ~ 2 s + 1

Initial condition y 0 = 0 and input r (t ) = u(t).

Consider a control system with following transfer function for problems 12.4 c) to 12.4 I).

r(s ) _ 32
i?(s) s2 + 4s + 16

Unit-step input is provided to this control system. Calculate the following parameters for this system.

Problem 12.4 c) The steady-state gain K is _______ .

Problem 12.4 d) The damping ratio £ is _______ .

Problem 12.4 e) The given control system is _______ damped.

(A) Under (B) Critically

(C) Over (D) None of the above

Problem 12.4 f) The time tp required to reach the peak output value Mp is ______.

Problem 12.4 g) The peak output value Mp is ________________________ .

Problem 12.4 h) The percent overshoot (%OS) of the response is ______.

Problem 12.4 i) The damped natural frequency cod is ______ .

Problem 12.4 j) The damped resonant frequency cor is ______ .

Problem 12.4 k) The logarithmic decrement 6 is ______ .

Problem 12.41) The 2% settling time Ts is ______ .

114
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 12.4 m) Calculate the steady-state error of following system if input is 10u(t).

Problem 12.4 n) Calculate the steady-state error of following system if input is 5 tu{t).

Problem 12.4 o) Calculate the steady-state error of following system if input is 10t 2u (t).

Problem 12.4 p) Calculate the steady-state error of following system if input is 2 tu{t).

Problem 12.4 q) Calculate the steady-state error of following system if input is 3u(t).

Copyrighted Material © 2020

Chapter # 13 - Communications
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Modulation / Demodulation
Electrical and Computer Engineering 372 - 377
Digital Communications
Fourier transforms / Fourier Series Mathematics 5 2 -5 5
Note: Specific details on this topic are not available in NCEES®
Multiplexing
FE Reference Handbook.

Facts about this section

• 5 - 8 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Communications is an average weighted exam section.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.
• Students with a major in communications engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the concepts related to Communications found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Some of the important equations relevant to this section include efficiency of amplitude
modulation, power transmitted in a message, modulation index, 98% bandwidth power of FM
signal, PCM, PAM, Fourier transform pairs, parity bit coding, cyclical redundancy code.
• Learn how to differentiate between graphical illustrations of AM, FM and PM signals.
• Frequency and Phase Modulated signals appear very similar.
• Understand the steps involved in digital signal processing.
• Learn how to calculate Fourier transform/series using table.
• Develop understanding of the two main multiplexing techniques
- Time Division Multiplexing
Frequency Division Multiplexing
• Review the error coding process especially parity-bit coding and cyclical redundancy coding.
• Solve problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
116
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 13.1 - Communication Theory
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 372 while solving these questions

Problem 13.1 a )_______ is a unit step function that starts at t = 4 and has a magnitude of 2.

(A) 2u ( t - 2) (B) 4 u ( t - 2)

(C) 2u ( t - 4) (D) 2u(t)e~4t

Problem 13.1 b) Unit step function u(3t — 9) is equal t o _________.

Problem 13.1 c )___is a rectangular pulse with center at t = 4 , amplitude = 2and time-period = 1/3.

(A) 2 U ( j ) (B) 211 ( ^ )

(C ) 4 F l( ^ ) (D) 2 n (3 (t - 4 ))

Problem 13.1 d )____is a triangular pulse with center at t = —1 , amplitude = 5 and r = 2.

(A) 54 ( ~ “) ( B ) 5 / l( iii)

(C) 5/l(2(t - 1)) ( D ) 5 / l( 2 ( t + l) )

Problem 13.1 e) Unit impulse function S ( —3t) is equal to ________.

Problem 13.1 f) Consider a time-domain signal f i t ) . Whichone of the followingoptions correctly

describe the impact o f/ (4 t)?

(A) / (4 t) = 4 f ( t ) (B) / (4 t ) = f ( t ) / 4

(C) Time period of / (4 t ) increases by 4 (D) Time period of / (4 t) decreases by 4

Problem 13.1 g ) _______ is an example of an even function.

(A) f i t ) = t 5 sin 3t (B) f i t ) = sin 3t

(C) f i t ) = t 2 + sin 3 1 (D) None of the above

Problem 13.1 h )________is an example of an odd function.

(A) f i t ) = t 5 sin 3t (B) f i t ) = sin 3t

(C) f i t ) - t 2 + sin 3 1 (D) None of the above

Problem 13.1 i) Calculate the total energy (Joules) contained in a finite energy signal given below:

2>
(ftt -- L\
xit) = s n (—y ~j

117
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 13.2 - Amplitude Modulation
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 375 while solving these questions

Consider the following scenario for problems 13.2 a) to 13.2 c).

The maximum amplitude of an amplitude-modulated (AM) wave is 12V and minimum amplitude is 2V.

Problem 13.2 a) The amplitude of carrier signal is ________ .

Problem 13.2 b) The amplitude of message/modulating signal is ________ .

Problem 13.2 c) The modulation index of this AM wave is _________.

Consider the following amplitude modulated (AM) wave for problems 13.1 d) to 13.1 f).

x ( t ) = 50(1 + 0.8 cos4007zt) cos(1000007it)

Problem 13.2 d) The modulation index of this AM wave is ________ .

Problem 13.2 e) The frequency of message/modulating signal is ________ Hz.

Problem 13.2 f) The frequency of carrier signal is ________ Hz.

Problem 13.2 g) Costas-loop is used for detecting a signal modulated w ith____modulation technique.

(A) Single-Sideband Amplitude Modulation (B) Angle Modulation

(C) Frequency Modulation (D) Double Sideband Amplitude Modulation

Problem 13.2 h) The modulation index of an amplitude modulated wave withmessage signal
5 sin 27r(1000t) and carrier signal 50 sin 27r(4000t) is _______ .

(A) 20% (B) 100%

(C) 10% (D) 50%

Consider the following scenario for problems 13.2 i) and 13.2 j).

An amplitude modulated (AM) wave is double-sideband modulated with a monotone message signal
m (t) = A cos cot. The normalized average power for this message is < m £(t) > = 1/2.

Problem 13.2 i) Calculate the efficiency of this AM wave if modulation index is 0.60.

Problem 13.2 j) What percentage of the total power is contained in carrier wave?

118
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem 13.2 k)
option represents an amplitude modulated wave.

Carrier Wave

(A)

Modulated Wave
(B)

(C) Modulated Wave

(D) None of the above

119
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 13.3 - Angle Modulation
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 375 - 376 while solving these questions

Consider the following scenario for problems 13.3 a) and 13.3 b). A frequency-modulated wave has a
maximum frequency deviation value = 100kHz and the bandwidth of its modulating signal is 5kHz.

Problem 13.3 a) The frequency-deviation ratio of given FM wave is_______.

Problem 13.3 b) 98% bandwidth of given FM wave is _______ .

Consider the following equation of an analog modulated wave for problems 13.3 c) to 13.3 d).

x ( t ) = 20 cos(20007zt + 5 sin(207it))

Original message/modulating signal is 1007T cos(2077t).

Problem 13.3 c) The given wave x ( t ) has been_______modulated.

(A) Amplitude (B) Frequency

(C) Phase (D) Pulse-code

Problem 13.3 d) Carrier frequency is _____and message frequency is ______ .

Consider the following equation of an analog modulated wave for problems 13.3 e) to 13.3 h).

x (t) = 20 cos(2 0 007rt + 107T cos(207rt))

Original message/modulating signal is lOrc cos(207rt).

Problem 13.3 e) The given wave modulated wave x ( t ) has been______ modulated.

(A) Amplitude (B) Frequency

(C) Phase (D) Pulse-code

Problem 13.3 f) The instantaneous phase of modulated wave x ( t ) is_______ .

Problem 13.3 g) The instantaneous frequency of modulated wave x ( t ) is _______ .

Problem 13.3 h) The frequency deviation of modulated wave x (t) is_______ .

Problem 13.3 i) Calculate the 98% power bandwidth of a frequency modulated signal if the signal has
frequency deviation ratio = 1.25 and its message bandwidth = 10 kHz.

(A)20000Hz (B)10000Hz

(C)125000Hz (D)45000Hz

120
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 13.3 j) Angle modulated signals can be demodulated using

(A) Costas loop (B) Phase-lock loop

(C) Envelope detection (D) Sampling

Problem 13.3 k) In the problem 13.2 k) which option represents a frequency-modulated wave?

(A) Option A (B) Option B

(C) Option C (D) None

Problem 13.3 I) In the problem 13.2 k) which option represents a phase-modulated wave?

(A) Option A (B) Option B

(C) Option C (D) None

Problem 13.3 m) Calculate 98% power bandwidth of a frequency modulated signal with frequency
deviation ratio of 0.1 and message bandwidth of 10 kHz.

(A)10000Hz (B)5000Hz

(C)1000Hz (D)20000Hz

121
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 13.4 - Fourier Transforms
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 52 - 55,372 - 373 while solving these questions

Problem 13.4 a) Fourier transform of the function shown in the figure given below is ______.

Amplitude

Time

4 -3 -2 -1 1 2 3 4

Problem 13.4 b) Fourier transform of the function shown in the figure given below is

Amplitude
3

Time

1 2 3 4

Problem 13.4 c) Calculate the Fourier transform of the function given below:

x (t ) = cos(27r(300)t) FI

(A) 6 sin c( 6/ ) (B) 6 sin c( 6 ( / — 300))

(C) 3 sin c( 6 ( / — 300)) + 3 sin c( 6 ( / + 300)) (D) 6 sinc( 6/ ) e -27r^300

Problem 13.4 d) Calculate the Fourier transform of the function given below

x ( t ) = e~5t cos(2n(20)t) u ( t )

... i i_____ _____ i

' ' ;'27T/+5 ' ' ;'27r(/-20)+5 ;'27r(/+20)+5

(C)— -— e~40njf ( D ) - f ------- -------H---------- -------

' ' j2 n f+ 5 ' '2 \ j'2tt(/-20)+5 j2n (f+ 20 )+ 5.

Problem 13.4 e) Fourier transform of the function given below is ______.

x(0 = 4n(Ll2)

122
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 13.5 - Digital Communications
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 377 and 379 while solving these questions

Problem 13.5 a )_________ quantization levels can be represented by a binary word of length 7 bits.

Problem 13.5 b) The minimum bandwidth required to transmit a pulse code modulated message m (t),
with M (/) = 0 for / > 100 Hz using 256 quantization levels is _____.

Problem 13.5 c) A PAM system modulates 15 kHz signal and uses a clock to sample the signal at equal
time intervals. The minimum clock frequency required for this PAM system is _____.

(A) 15 kHz (B) 30 kHz

(C) 7.5 kHz (D) 150 kHz

Problem 13.5 d) In the previous problem, calculate the time spacing between adjacent samples of the
pulse-amplitude modulated wave form is _____us.

Problem 13.5 e) Calculate the channel capacity (bits/sec) of a digital communication system that has
signal-to-noise ratio S/N = lOdB and available bandwidth = 10kHz.

Problem 13.5 f) Calculate the minimum signal-to-noise ratio S/N (in dB) required to transmit 100,000
bits/sec if available bandwidth is 25kHz.

Consider the following scenario for problems 13.5 g) and 13.5 h).

A digital communication system is using cyclical redundancy code for multiple error detection such that
data fram eT = 101011 and generator code G = 111.

Problem 13.5 g) The remainder E for this scheme is ____ .

Problem 13.5 h) The transmitted code for this scheme is ________ .

Problem 13.5 i) Complete the following table by adding odd-parity bits for error detection.

Data Frame Odd-Parity Bit (0/1)

0000
1000
0 111

Problem 13.5 j) Complete the following table by adding even parity bits for error detection.

Data Frame Even-Parity Bit (0/1)

0000
1000
0 111

123
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 13.6 - Multiplexing

Problem 13.6 a )__________ is an example of digital multiplexing.

(A) Time-division multiplexing (B) Frequency-division

(C) Wavelength division (D) Options A, B and C are examples of digital multiplexing

Problem 13.6 b) Three channels are to be frequency multiplexed together as shown below:

Channel 1 has a Band Width of 50kHz

Channel 2 has a Band Width of 100kHz

Channel 3 has a Band Width of 50kHz

Calculate the minimum link bandwidth if a guard band of 5kHz is required between channels.

(A)200kHz (B) 215kHz

(C)210kHz (D)220kHz

Problem 13.6 c) Five channels are multiplexed using time division multiplexing. Every channel sends 10
bytes/second. Calculate the frame size if this system can multiplex 1 byte/channel.

(A) 10 bytes (B) 1 bytes

(C) 5 bytes (D) 50 bytes

Problem 13.6 d) The bit rate in previous problem is ________ bps.

Problem 13.6 e) Calculate the bit duration of a time-division multiplexer that multiplexes three 50 kbps
channels using 1 -bit time slots.

(A) 50000 bps (B) 150000 bps

(C) 1000 bps (D) 25000 bps

Problem 13.6 f) The frame duration in problem previous problem is________ .

Problem 13.6 g) Four bandlimited signals x1( t ) , x 2( t ) , x 3( t ) and x 4 (t) with bandwidths BWX =
4 kHz, BW2 = 2 kHz, BW3 — 1kHz and BW4 = 500 Hz (respectively) are transmitted over a
communication channel using time-division multiplexing.

The overall sampling rate required for perfect reconstruction of message is _______ .

124
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 14 - Computer Networks
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Routing and Switching
Network topologies
392 - 407
Network types
Electrical and Computer Engineering
Network models
Network intrusion detection/prevention
4 1 3 -4 1 6
Network security

Facts about this section

• 4 - 6 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Computer Networks is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.
• Students with a major in computer network engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the computer networking concepts found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Learn routing/switching process including data forwarding, routing tables etc.
• Review the differences between major network topologies (bus, ring, star etc.).
• Understand differences and similarities between OSI and TCP/IP model.
• Review computer network protocols such as IPv4, IPv6, TCP, UDP and ICMP.
• Familiarize yourself with fundamentals of network security such as firewalls, port scanning, web
vulnerability testing, penetration testing and basics of encryption.
• Understand the algorithm of Diffie-Heliman key-exchange protocol, RSA public-key
cryptosystem and McCabe' cyclomatic complexity.
• Solve problem sets on next pages and review solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Computer Networks' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical
and Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

125
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 14.1 - Routing and Switching
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 392 - 407 while solving these questions

Problem 14.1 a) The process of finding efficient paths between nodes based on address is called_____ .

Problem 14.1 b) Which of the following table(s) is maintained by a router?

(A) Time table (B) Forwarding table

(C) Routing table (D) Options C & B are correct

Problem 14.1 c) Routing takes place in OSI Model's______ layer.

Problem 14.1 d) Switching takes place in OSI Model's_____ layer.

Problem 14.1 e )______ establishes computer's unique hardware media access control (MAC) address.

(A) Router (B) Switch

(C) Network Interface Card (D) Hub

Problem 14.1 f ) _____has access to IP datagram and can use IP address for determining optimal paths.

(A) Router (B) Switch

(C) Network Interface Card (D) Hub

Problem 14.1 g) Complete the routing table given below. Assume that you are starting at node A.

Destination Node Next Hop

B
C
D
E
F

126
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 14.2 - Network Topologies / Types / Models
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 392 - 407 while solving these questions

Problem 14.2 a) http and email will run in __________ OSI model layer.

Problem 14.2 b) Session layer is not responsible fo r_______________ .

(A) Modulation/Demodulation (B) Relation between two end users

(C) Identifying users (D) Controlling data exchanged by users

Problem 14.2 c) Breaking a single connection can disrupt an entire network in ______implementation.

(A) Bus (B)Star

(C) Ring (D) All of the above

Problem 14.2 d) LAN can be implemented using___topology.

(A) Ring (B) Star

(C) Bus (D) All of the above

Problem 14.2 e) ATM LAN is an example o f___________ .

(A) Star topology (B) Bus topology

(C) Ring topology (D) Mesh topology

Problem 14.2 f ) _________ network type serves the largest geographical region.

(A) LAN (B) WAN

(C) MAN (D) PAN

Problem 14.2 g ) _____ links are required to connect 29 nodes in a fully connectedmeshnetwork.

Problem 14.2 h) In the previous problem,____ input/output ports arerequired on each node to
construct a fully connected mesh network with 29 nodes.

Problem 14.2 i) Tree topology can be considered a hybrid o f_____and_____ .

(A) Bus, Ring (B) Ring, Star

(C) Bus, Star (D) Bus, Mesh

Problem 14.2 j) Select the option that correctly ranks network topologies based on cabling cost.

(A) Bus > Star > Mesh (B) Mesh > Bus > Star

(C) Star > Bus > Mesh (D) Mesh > Star > Bus
127
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 14.2 k) Ring topology is generally used to create a ______ network.

(A) LAN (B) WAN

(C) MAN (D) PAN

Problem 14.2 I) OSI Model's presentation layer is responsible for performing_______ function(s).

(A) Encryption/Decryption (B) Compression/Decompression

(C) Translation (D) All of the above

Problem 14.2 m) Physical addressing is performed in _______ layer of OSI model.

(A) Network (B) Transport

(C) Data Link (D) Session

Problem 14.2 n) As data packet moves from an upper layer to a lower layer, headers are_____and
process is called______ .

(A) Added, Decapsulation (B) Removed, Encapsulation

(C) Added, Encapsulation (D) Removed, Decapsulation

128
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 14.3 - Internet Protocol Addressing: IPv4/IPv6
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 394 - 400 while solving these questions

Problem 14.3 a )______ header field(s) handle fragmentation in IPv4 addressing.

(A) Identification (B) Fragment Offset

(C) Flags (D) All of the above

Problem 14.3 b) Select the scenario in which the least significant bit of 'Flags' field is set (=1) for a
fragmented IPv4 datagram?

(A) First fragment (B) Last fragment

(C) All fragments except first (D) All fragments except last

Problem 14.3 c) How many routers can be visited by an IPv4 datagram before being dropped if its
'Time To Live' field is 20?

(A) 0 (B) 2

(C) 19 (D) 20

Problem 14.3 d) Calculate the header length of an IPv4 datagram if its Internet Header Length 'IHL'
field contains 1000 .

(A) 8 bits (B) 32 bits

(C) 8 bytes (D) 32 bytes

Problem 14.3 e) Select the statement that correctly describes IPv4 datagram based on IHL value
calculated in the previous question.

(A) IPv4 header is of minimumsize (B) IPv4 header isof maximum size

(C) IPv4 header uses 'Options'field (D) IPv4 header does not use 'Options' field

Problem 14.3 f) Fragment offset field of an IPv4 header is equal to 20010. Which one of the following
statements correctly describe the fragmentation order of this fragment?

(A) 200 bytes of data has already arrived ahead of this fragment

(B) 200 bytes of data is expected t to arrive after this fragment

(C) 1600 bytes of data has already arrived ahead of this fragment

(D) 1600 bytes of data is expected to arrive after this fragment

129
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 14.3 g) Select the correct statement regarding IPv6 datagram header from following options.

(A) Header length is at least 20 bytes

(B) Header length has a fixed size of 20 bytes

(C) Header length is at least 40 bytes

(D) Header length has a fixed size of 40 bytes

Problem 14.3 h )______ field determines the lifetime of an IPv6 datagram.

(A) Flow label (B) Time to live

(C) Hop limit (D) Payload length

Problem 14.31) Select the option that represents the most abbreviated form of following IPv6 address:

2A1F:0000:0000:0011:0000:0000:0000:2100

(A) 2A1F::11::2100

(B) 2A1F:0:0:11:0:0:0:2100

(C) 2A1F:0:0:11::2100

(D) 2A1F::11:0::2100

Problem 14.3 j) Select the option that represents the expanded form of following IPv6 address:

B:C8::15:0:AC

(A) B:C8:0:0:0:15:0:AC

(B) B000:C8:0:0:0:15:0:AC

(C) OOOB:OOC8:0000:0000:0000:0015:0000:OOAC

(D) BOOO:C800:0000:0000:0000:0015:0000:OOAC

130
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 14.4 - Protocols: TCP/UDP/ICMP
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 400 - 404 while solving these questions

Problem 14.4 a) Protocol data unit (PDU) in TCP is called_______ .

(A) Frame (B) Segment

(C) Datagram (D) Bits

Problem 14.4 b) Select the INCORRECT statement(s) from given options.

(A) TCP is a connection-oriented protocol (B) TCP uses acknowledgment mechanism

(C) UDP is a connectionless protocol (D) UDP uses acknowledgment mechanism

Problem 14.4 c) TCP header can have a maximum and minimum size o f____and____ respectively.

(A) 65535, 0 (B) 40,16

(C) 60, 20 (D) 160, 20

Problem 14.4 d) TCP establishes connection between client and server by means o f___________ .

(A) Two-way handshake (B) Three-way handshake

(C) Four-way handshake (D) None of the above

Problem 14.4 e )_____application layer protocol(s) use TCP protocol in transport layer.

(A) Telnet (B) SMTP

(C) http (D) All of the above

Problem 14.4 f ) _____messages can be broadly categorized as error-reporting and query messages.

(A) TCP (B) UDP

(C) IP (D) ICMP

Problem 14.4 g) ICMP error messages are reported to _______ .

(A) Destination only (B) Source and destination

(C) Source only (D) All network nodes

Problem 14.4 h) Suppose that an IPv4 datagram arrives at a router and requires fragmentation but
Don't Fragment (DF) flag is set. In this case, type and code field of ICMP message will b e____and__

(A) 11,1 (B) 3,1

(C) 5, 2 (D) 3, 4
131
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 14.5 - Network Security: Intrusion
Detection/Prevention and Encryption
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 413 - 416 while solving these questions

Problem 14.5 a) Which one of the following statement(s) INCORRECTLY describes firewall capabilities?

(A) Firewall is not required if communication is encrypted

(B) Firewalls can prevent traffic from specific IP addresses

(C) Firewall acts as a security checkpoint between networks

(D) Firewall controls incoming/outgoing traffic based on predefined rules

Problem 14.5 b )__________ firewall provides network security by inspecting IP header and TCP header
using a list of pre-established rules.

(A) Packet filtering (B) Application level gateway

(C) Circuit level gateway (D) Dynamic

Problem 14.5 c) Which one of the following statements is NOT true regarding signature-based
intrusion detection systems?

(A) They are helpful against previously unknown threats

(B) They compare current user patterns (signatures) with a list of known malicious patterns

(C) They require frequent updates of signatures to remain effective

(D) None of the above

Problem 14.5 d )_____parameter(s) can be used as part of anomaly-based intrusion detection systems?

(A) Time-of-day use (B) Computer power consumption

(C) User profiles (D) All of the above

Problem 14.5 e )___ information is revealed by the following command: nmap 192.1.2.3

(A) Open ports (B) Open services

(C) Domain name (D) All of the above

Problem 14.5 f ) ____type of scan is performed by the following command: nmap-F 192.1.2.3

(A) Full (B) Fast

(C) Forward (D) Final

132
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 14.5 g) Alpha digitally signs a message using RSA public-key cryptosystem and sends it to
Beta. In order to verify this signature, Beta will require________ .

(A) Alpha's private key (B) Alpha'spublic key

(C) Beta's private key (D) Beta'spublic key

Problem 14.5 h) Alpha and Beta are using RSA public-key cryptosystem for encrypting confidential
data. Alpha chooses two prime numbers p = 7 and q = 9 to generate public and private keys. Determine
Alpha's private key if Alpha's public key is 11.

(A) 9 (B) 10

(C) 11 (D) 12

Problem 14.5 i) In the previousproblem,calculate the value of cyphertext if plain text is 8 .

Problem 14.5 j) Public key isknown to ____ and private key is known t o _____inpublic-key encryption.

(A) Everyone, Sender (B) Everyone, Receiver

(C) Everyone, Sender (D) Sender, Receiver

Problem 14.5 k) Alpha and Beta are using Diffie-Hellman key-exchange protocol to exchange a secret
key between themselves without transmitting it. They publicly select 5 as prime modulo (p) and 3 as
base generator (g). Alpha and Beta then select 1 and 2 as their private keys, respectively.

Calculate the value of their Diffie-Hellman secret key.

Problem 14.51) Create a control flow graph of given code to determine number of nodes and edges.

int sumCalculator (int x) {

int count = 0;

int sum = 0;

while (count < x) {

sum = sum + count;

count++;}

return sum;}

Problem 14.5 m) In the previous problem, calculate McCabe's cyclomatic complexity.

(A) 0 (B) 2

(C)4 (D) 6

133
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 15 - Digital Systems
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Number systems
Boolean logic
Logic gates and circuits Electrical and Computer Engineering 389 - 392
Logic minimization (K-Maps, SOP, POS)
Flip-flops and counters
State machine design Mathematics 34
Programmable logic devices Note: NCEES® FE Reference Handbook does not contain
Timing specific details on these topics.

Facts about this section

• 8 - 1 2 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Digital Systems is one of the most heavily weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Hard' by the author.
• Students with a major in computer engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand digital system concepts found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Learn how to use calculator for converting numbers between different bases.
• Study the truth tables of all logic operators especially XOR and XNOR.
• Understand the difference between l's complement and 2's complement calculations.
• Review graphical symbols of logic gates, combinational and sequential logic devices.
• Understand the rules regarding grouping of K-map terms for function minimization.
• Gain understanding of how different flip-flops and counters work.
• Learn how to navigate between state diagram and state table.
• Develop familiarity with programmable logic devices, controllers, and timing diagrams.
• Review relevant concepts using college/university textbooks.
• Solve the problem sets of this chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Digital Systems' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

134
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.1 - Number Systems
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 389 while solving these questions

Problem 15.1 a) 8 A D h e x is equal t o _______ in binary number system.

Problem 15.1 b) 963io is equal to _______ in binary number system.

Problem 15.1 c) Select the option(s) that correctly represent IOIOIO 2 in respective number systems.

(A) 2Ai6 (B) 42 io

(C) 528 (D) All of the above

Problem 15.1 d) l's complement sum of OOIO2 and O O II 2 is equal to _____.

Problem 15.1 e) l's complement sum of I I O I 2 and I O I I 2 is equal to ______.

Problem 15.1 f) 2 's complementsum of I O I I 2 and O IO I 2 is equal to _______ .

Problem 15.1 g) 2 's complementsum of I I I O 2 and O IO I 2 is equal to _______ .

Problem 15.1 h) IOIO 2 and IIIO IO 2 are 2's complement representation o f____and____ respectively.

(A) 5, 6 (B) -5, -6

(C) 6, 6 (D) -6, -6

Problem 15.1 i) Select the option that represents INCORRECT pairing of decimal number with its 2's
complement representation in binary number system.

(A) -20,101100 (B) -16, 110000

(C) -30,100010 (D) -11, 101111

Problem 15.1 j) Select the option that represents INCORRECT pairing of decimal number with its l's
complement representation in binary number system.

(A) -20,101011 (B) -16, 110010

(C) -30, 100001 (D )-17,101110

135
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.2 - Boolean Logic
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 390 while solving these questions

Problem 15.2 a) Apply De Morgan's Theorem to following function: [A + BCD + (E + F ) ]

(A) (B + C + D ) ( E ) ( F ) (A) (B) ( A ) ( B C D ) ( E F )

(C)A + BCD + (E + F ) (D) ( A ) (B + C + D ) ( F ) ( F )

Problem 15.2 b) Apply De Morgan's Theorem to following function: [(.ABC)(D + EF )]

(A)A + B + C + D(E + F ) (B) ( A B C ) ( D ) ( E F )

( Q A + B + C + DE ( D ) A B + DEF

Problem 15.2 c) Simplify following function using Boolean logic: AB + A(BC ) + B(A + C)

(A ) A B + A ( B + C) + B ( A C ) ( B)AB + C ( A + B )

(C) AB + A B C (D) AB + A ( B C )

Problem 15.2 d) Simplify following function using Boolean logic: AB + B(A + C) + C(A + B)

(A) AB + AB + BC + AC + BC (B) AB + BC + AC

(C) AB + BC (D) ABC

Problem 15.2 e) Convert following function to 'Sum of Product' form: (A + B)(A + B + C)

(A) A + AB + BC {B)A + B + C

(C) A + B (D)AB + BC

Problem 15.2 f) Simplify AC + AC using Boolean logic if C = AB + AB.

(A) A (B) B

(CM (D )B

136
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.3 - Logic gates and circuits
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 390 while solving these questions

Problem 15.3 a) Find the output expression for logic circuit shown below.

(A) AB + CD (B) AB{C + D) + (A + B)CD

(C) AB(C + D) (D)AB(C + D )

Problem 15.3 b) Find the output expression for logic circuit shown below.

(A) 0 (B) A + B

(C) 1 (D) A + B

Problem 15.3 c) Find the output expression for logic circuit shown below.

(A) A + B + C (B) AB + C

(CM + BC (D) AB + BC

137
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.3 d) Find the output expression for logic circuit shown below.

(A) AB + C (B )ABC

(C) A B C (D M + B + C

Problem 15.3 e) Find the output expression for logic circuit shown below.

(A) 0 (B) 1

(C)AB (D )A + B

Problem 15.3 f ) _______ logical function can be used to detect odd number of Is in a given input.

(A) AND (B) OR

(C) XOR (D) XNOR

138
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.4 - Logic minimization - K-Maps/SOP/POS
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 391 - 392 while solving these questions

Problem 15.4 a) Determine minimized 'Sum of Product' expression for logic function given by K-Map.

C
0 1
00
01
AB
11
10

(A) C + AB + BC (B) ABC + AB + BC

(QB C + AB + A B C (D )ABC + AB + BC

Problem 15.4 b) Determine minimized 'Sum of Product' expression for logic function given by K-Map.

C
0 1
00
01
AB
11
10

(A)AB + A B (B) ABC + ABC

(CM (DM
Problem 15.4 c) Determine minimized 'Sum of Product' expression for logic function given by K-Map.

CD
00 01 11 10
00
01
AB
11
10

(A) A B + AB (B) B

(C)B (D) AB + A B

139
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.4 d) Determine minimized 'Sum of Product' expression for logic function given by K-Map.

CD
00 01 11 10
00
01
AB
11
10

(A) AC + AB + A BD (B) A + AB + BCD

(C)AC + ABC + A B D (D) AB + ABC + A B D

Problem 15.4 e) Determine minimized 'Sum of Product' expression for logic function given by K-Map.

CD
00 01 11 10
00
01
AB
11
10

(A) A B + CD (B ) C D + CD + BC

(C) D + BC (D) ABC + D

Problem 15.4 f) Determine minimized 'Sum of Product' expression for logic function given by K-Map.

C
0 1
00
01
AB
11
10

(A) B + AC (B) A C + ABC

(C ) A B C + AC (D) C + AC

140
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.5 - Sequential Circuits - Flip-Flops and Counters
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 391 while solving these questions

Problem 15.5 a) Determine the output sequence of flip-flop # 2 shown in the circuit given below.

Flip-Flop # 1 Flip-Flop # 2
101 - D Q D Q

s. Q A
V
Clock n ..............J
(A) 101 (B) 111

(C) 010 (D) 000

Problem 15.5 b) The logical circuit shown below represents a

(A) JK Flip-Flop (B) SR Flip-Flop

(C) D Flip-Flop (D) Multiplexer

Problem 15.5 c) The logical circuit shown below represents a

-Q

(A) JK Flip-Flop (B) SR Flip-Flop

(C) D Flip-Flop (D) Multiplexer

141
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.5 d) The logical circuit shown below represents a

I) Q
t> Q

C lock--------

(A) JK Flip-Flop (B) SR Flip-Flop

(C) T Flip-Flop (D) Multiplexer

Problem 15.5 e) Determine the output sequence Q2 of SR flip-flop shown in the circuit given below.

Flip-Flop # 1 Flip-Flop # 2

0 0 1 ----- D Q s Q2
1

>

> Q, R Q2
Clock

(A) 100 (B) 001

(C) 111 (D )110

Problem 15.5 f) Determine the output state Q3 Q2 Q1 of the counter shown below after application of
three clock cycles. Assume that initially output states are Q3 = Q2 = Qx = 0.

(A) 000 (B)111

(C) 001 (D )011

142
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.5 g) Determine the output state Q3Q2 Q1 Q0 of the counter shown below after application
of three clock cycles. Assume that initially output states are Q3 = Q2 = Qi = Qo = 1-

Qu(i SK) Q (M S B )

0 D 0

Clock
> Q

(A )1000 (B) 0000

(C )1010 (D) 1100

Problem 15.5 h) Determine the output sequence of the counter shown below.
Assume that initially output states are Q1 = Q0 = 0.

Flip-Flop # 0 Flip-Flop # 1
(M S B )

(A) (0 0) initial state/ (o 1 ) cycle 1, (1 0 ) cycle 2/ ( ii) cycle 3

(B) (0 0 ) initial state/ ( 1 0 ) cycle 1/ (0 1 ) cycle 2/ ( ii) cycle 3

(C) ( i 1) initial state/ (0 1 ) cycle 1/ (1 0 ) cycle 2/ (0 0 ) cycle 3

(D) (1 1) initial state/ ( 0 1 ) cycle 1/ ( 1 0 ) cycle 2/ ( 0 0 ) cycle 3

143
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.6 - Combinational circuits
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 391 while solving these questions

Problem 15.6 a) ____is not an example of a combinational circuit.

(A) Decoder (B)Encoder

(C) Multiplexer (D) Flip-flop

Problem 15.6 b) A decoder with n inputs will have______ outputs.

(A) n (B) n — 1

(C) 2n (D) 2n - 1

Consider the following 2-to-4 decoder for problems 15.6 c) and 15.6 d).

Problem 15.6 c) Complete the truth table of 2-to-4 decoder given below where 'E' represents enable.

E A B ys yi Vi yo
0 X X
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

Problem 15.6 d) Match the output in Column A with correct combination of logical inputs in Column B.

Column A Column B
yo ABE
...y i ........ ABE
yi ABE
ys ABE
Consider the following 3-to-8 decoder for problems 15.6 e) and 15.6 f).

Problem 15.6 e) Complete the truth table of a 3-to-8 decoder given below where 'E' represents enable.

E A B C y7 y6 ys y4 ys y2 yi yo
0 X X X
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1

144
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.6 f) Match the output in Column A with correct combination of logical inputs in Column B.

Column A Column B
y0 ABCE
yi ABCE
ji ABCE
ji ABCE

Consider the following combinational circuit for problems 15.6 g) and 15.6 h).

Problem 15.6 g) The output X can be expressed a s__________ .

Problem 15.6 h) The output Y can be expressed a s__________ .

Problem 15.6 i) A multiplexer with n selection lines will have_____outputs and_____ inputs.

(A) 2n outputs, 1 input (B) 1 output, 2n inputs

(C) n outputs, 1 input (D) 1 output, n inputs

Problem 15.6 j) [24 x 1] Multiplexer will have_____ inputs and_____ selection lines.

(A) 16 inputs, 4 selection lines (B) 16 inputs, 1 selection line

(C) 4 inputs, 16 selection lines (D) None of the above

145
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Consider the following [4 x 1] Multiplexer for problems 15.6 k) and 15.6 I).

Problem 15.6 k) Complete the truth table of the [4 x 1] multiplexer given below.

Si So X
0 X X

Si SO

Problem 15.61) The output X can be expressed in terms of input, selection lines and enable E a s___

(A) E[SiS0I0 + 5 j5 0/ j + SxSqI2 + S i So ^3 ] (B) E\S±SqIq + + SiS0I2 +

(C) EISxSqI q + S-lSqI-l + St S0I2 + S iS ’0/3] (D) None of the above

Problem 15.6 m) Complete the truth table of [8 x 1] multiplexer given below.

E S 2 Si So X
0 X X X
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1

Problem 15.6 n) The output function of following [4 x 1] multiplexer is (assume E = 1).

(A) 0

(B) XYZ

(C ) X + Y + Z

(D)X + Y + Z

X Y

146
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.7 - Programmable Logic Devices/Gate Array

Problem 15.7 a) Match the programmable logic devices in Column A with the correct combination of
AND-OR plane in Column B.

Column A Column B

PAL AND-plane programmable, OR-plane programmable

PLA AND-plane programmable, OR-plane fixed

ROM AND-plane fixed, OR-plane programmable

AND-plane fixed, OR-plane fixed

Consider the following programmable logic device for problems 15.7 b) to 15.7 e).

c —f e z

000000 £ > *
O --'
£>=
Problem 15.7 b) The given programmable logic device is an example of a

(A) PAL (B) PLA

(C) ROM (D) FPGA

Problem 15.7 c) The output x can be expressed a s_________.

(A) ABC + ABC + ABC (B) ABC + ABC + AB

(C) ABC + ABC + AB + ABC (D) None of the above

Problem 15.7 d) The output y can be expressed a s________ .

(A) ABC + ABC + ABC (B) ABC + ABC + AB

(C) ABC + ABC + AB + ABC (D) None of the above

Problem 15.7 e) The output z can be expressed a s_________.

(A) ABC + ABC + ABC (B) ABC + ABC + AB

(C) ABC + ABC + AB + ABC (D) None of the above

147
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Consider the following programmable logic device for problems 15.7 f) to 15.7 i).

Problem 15.7 f) The given programmable logic device is an example of a

(A) PAL (B) PLA

(C) ROM (D) FPGA

Problem 15.7 g) The output x can be expressed a s _.

(A)AB+ABC (B) ABC + ABC

(C) ABC + ABC (D) None of the above

Problem 15.7 h) The output y can be expressed a s _.

(A) AB + ABC (B) ABC + ABC

(C) ABC + ABC (D) None of the above

Problem 15.7 i) The output z can be expressed a s________ .

(A) AB + ABC (B) ABC + ABC

(C) ABC + ABC (D) None of the above

148
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.8 - State Machine Design
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 34 while solving these questions

Problem 15.8 a) Complete the state table for the 'Finite State Machine' shown below.

Next State
Present State Output z
w=
o

1
£
II

A C B 0
B C B 1
C ? ? ?

(A) w = 0 (B), w = 1 (A), z = 1 (B) w = 0 (A), w = 1 (B), z = 0

(C) w = 0 (A), w - 1 (B), z = 1 (D) w = 0 (C), w = 1 (A), z = 0

Problem 15.8 b) In problem 15.8 a) an input sequence w = 111 is applied to the 'Finite State Machine'
Calculate the output sequence if machine is initially in state A.

(A)111 (B )010

(C )000 (D )011

Problem 15.8 c) In problem 15.8 a) an input sequence w = 000 is applied to the 'Finite State Machine'
Calculate the output sequence if machine is initially in state A.

(A )101 (B )000

(C) 010 (D)111

149
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.8 d) Complete the state table for the 'Finite State Machine' shown below.

RESET

Next State
Present State Output z
ab = 00 01 10 11
A A A C B 1
B B A D B 1
C ? ? C A 0
D D D C B 0

(A) 00 - C, 01 - D (B) 00 - C, 01 - C

(C) 00 - D, 01 - C (D) 00 - A, 01 - D

Problem 15.8 e) States A, B, C and D of problem 15.8 d) are represented by y 2yx - 00, 01,10,11
respectively in the table given below.

Select the simplified output expression for 'z' as a function of present state.

Next State
Present State
Output 'z'
y-iV\ ab = 00 01 10 11

00 00 00 10 01 1
01 01 00 10 01 1
10 10 11 10 00 0
11 11 11 10 01 0

(A) z = y 2 y1 (B) z =

(C)z = y^Yi (D )z = y i

150
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 15.9 - Timing

Problem 15.9 a) Calculate the propagation delay of a logical circuit for which timing diagram is given
below. This circuit has a positive edge triggered clock. Q represents the output of this logical circuit
which changes its state at positive clock edge as shown below.

(A)10ns (B)15ns

(C)20ns (D)35ns

Problem 15.9 b) An input change that causes the output to unintentionally change from 1 to 0 to 1
when the output was originally expected to stay constant as 1 , iscalled a ______ .

(A) Dynamic hazard (B) Static-1 hazard

(C) Static-0 hazard (D) Propagation delay

Problem 15.9 c) An input change that causes the output to unintentionally change from 0 to 1 to 0
when the output was originally expected to stay constant as 0, iscalled a ______ .

(A) Dynamic hazard (B) Static-1 hazard

(C) Static-0 hazard (D) Propagation delay

Problem 15.9 d) An input change that causes the output to unintentionally change from 0 to 1 to 0 to 1
or 1 to 0 to 1 to 0 when the output was expected to change just once as 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 is called a ___.

(A) Dynamic hazard (B) Static-1 hazard

(C) Static-0 hazard (D) Propagation delay

151
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 15.9 e) Racing condition can be observed in a JK Flip-Flop when the clock signal is high and
input values for J and K are_____ respectively.

(A) 0 and 0 (B) 0 and 1

(C) 1 and 0 (D) 1 and 1

Problem 15.9 f) Racing condition of JK Flip-Flop can be addressed by implementing______ .

(A) PLA (B) PAL

(C) Master-Slave JK Flip-Flop (D) None of the above

152
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 16 - Computer Systems
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Microprocessors
Memory technology and Systems Electrical and Computer Engineering 408 - 410
Interfacing

Facts about this section

• 5 - 8 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Computer Systems is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Easy' by the author.
• Students with a major in computer engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand the computer systems concepts found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Review computer architecture and the role of functional units such as ALU, I/O, CU etc.
• Learn the fundamental concepts related to microprocessors.
• Familiarize yourself with different memory technologies (RAM, ROM, EROM etc.).
• Learn how different components of computer system interface with each other.
• Understand the difference between direct-mapped cache, fully associative cache and n-way set
associative cache.
• Learn how to calculate tag bits, index bits, block offset bits and address bits of cache memory.
• Review cache replacement policy and write policy.
• Solve the problem sets of chapter and review solutions at the end of this book.

B O N U S: Unlock a free 'Computer Systems' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical and
Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

153
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 16.1- Microprocessor
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 409 while solving these questions

Problem 16.1 a) A microprocessor register that stores address of the most recently requested program
in a buffer register is called_________ .

(A) Program counter (B) Stack pointer

(C) Instruction pointer (D) Accumulator

Problem 16.1 b) A microprocessor register that stores address of current or next instructions in a
buffer register is called_________ .

(A) Program counter (B) Stack pointer

(C) Accumulator (D) Options A and B are correct

Problem 16.1 c) A single integrated circuit that accepts and executes coded instructions for data
processing and controlling associated circuitry in a computer system is called a _________ .

(A) Microprocessor (B) Microcomputer

(C) Microcontroller (D) Personal computer

Problem 16.1 d )______microprocessor has a hard-wired control unit with a simple instruction set.

(A) Single-core (B) RISC

(C) Multi-core (D) CISC

Problem 16.1 e) ADD R5, #6 is an example of instruction in which____addressing mode is being used.

(A) Direct (B) Immediate

(C) Register Direct (D) Register Indirect

Problem 16.1 f ) ______ option correctly describes the result of instruction given in previous problem.

(A) Content of R5 is added to memory location 6

(B) Content of memory location 6 is added to R5

(C) Constant 6 is added to R5

(D) None of the above

154
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 16.1 g) LOAD R4, (R5) is an example of an instruction using________ addressing mode.

(A) Direct (B) Immediate

(C) Register Direct (D) Register Indirect

Problem 16.1 h )____option correctly describes the result of instruction given in previous problem.

(A) Content of R4 is loadedto R5

(B) Content of R4 is loadedto memory location pointed by R5

(C) Content of R5 is loadedto R4

(D) Content stored at memory location pointed by R5 will be loaded to R4

Problem 16.1 i) Match the addressing mode in Column A with correct application in Column B.

Column A Column B

Indirect addressing Static data

Immediate addressing Loops

Direct addressing Constants

Auto-indexed addressing Pointers

Registers

Problem 16.1 j) Select the INCORRECT statement(s) regarding multithreading from given options.

(A) Multithreading allows execution of multiple processes simultaneously

(B) Single-core processors use frequency-division multiplexing to provide multithreading

(C) Multicore processors use time-division multiplexing to provide multithreading

(D) All of the above options are incorrect

155
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 16.2 - Memory Technology and Systems
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 409 while solving these questions

Problem 16.2 a )_______ storage device uses random access methods for accessing memory.

(A) Cassette tape (B) CD

(C) Hard disk (D) Flash memory

Problem 16.2 b) A Giga Byte contains________ bits.

Problem 16.2 c) A memory that acts as a buffer between CPU and main memory to speed up
processing is called________ .

(A) DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) (B) ROM

(C) Cache Memory (D) EPROM

Problem 16.2 d )________ is an example of a secondary memory.

(A) Cache memory (B) RAM (Random AccessMemory)

(C) DVD (D) DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory)

Problem 16.2 e )______________ ROM can be programmed only once and it is non-erasable.

(A) PROM (B) EPROM

(C) EEPROM (D) DRAM

Problem 16.2 f ) _________ is a memory unit which varies in size between different computer systems.

(A) Nibble (B) Word

(C) Bit (D) Byte

Consider the following scenario for problems 16.2 g) to 16.2 j).

A direct-mapped cache memory is 32KB with a block size of 512 bytes. Main memory size is 256KB.

Problem 16.2 g) A total o f______ address bits are required for cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 h )_______ bits are required in the block offset field of cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 i) ______ bits are required in the index field of cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 j ) ______ bits are required in the tag field of cache memory address.

156
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 16.2 k) Replacement policy is not required fo r_______ mapping.

(A) Direct (B) N-way set associative

(C) Fully set associative (D) All of the above

Consider the following scenario for problems 16.2 I) to 16.2 o).

A fully associative cache memory is 32KB with a block size of 512 bytes. Main memory size is 256KB.

Problem 16.2 I) A total o f______address bits are required for cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 m )______ bits are required in the block offset field of cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 n )_______bits are required in the index field of cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 o )________bits are required for the tag field of cache memory address.

Consider the following scenario for problems 16.2 p) to 16.2 s).

4-way set associative cache memory is 32KB with a block size of 512 bytes. Main memory size is 256KB.

Problem 16.2 p )______ bits are required for block offset field of cache memory.

Problem 16.2 q) The total number of sets in this cache are equal to ______ .

Problem 16.2 r ) _______ bits are required in the index field of cache memory address.

Problem 16.2 s ) ________ bits are required for the tag field of cache memory address.

Problem 16.21) What is the average memory access time of a single direct-mapped cache memory
with a hit rate of 90%, a hit time of 5ns and a miss penalty of 200ns.

(A)5ns (B)10ns

(C)15ns (D)25ns

157
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 16.3 - Architecture & Interfacing
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 409 while solving these questions

Problem 16.3 a) Basic Input Output System (BIOS) is read from ______ during normal start-up routine.

(A) RAM (B) ROM

(C) USB (D) CD

Problem 16.3 b )_______ is the process of transforming data into different format for another system.

(A) Encryption (B) Encoding

(C) Hashing (D) Decoding

Problem 16.3 c) Computer architecture is primarily concerned with_________________of a computer.

(A) Logical/functional design (B) Instruction set

(C) Addressing modes (D) All of the above

Problem 16.3 d) Central processing unit (CPU) consists o f_______ .

(A) ALU (B) Control Unit

(C) Register Array (D) All of the above

Problem 16.3 e) A set of conductors used to transfer data, instructions, addresses and control signals
between various components of a computer system is called_______.

(A) Stack pointer (B) Register

(C) Interrupter (D) Bus

Problem 16.3 f) The width o f_____ bus directly impacts the processing speed of a microprocessor.

(A) Address (B) Data

(C) Control (D) All of the above

Problem 16.3 g ) _____ has a shared memory storage and signal pathway for instruction and data.

(A) Harvard architecture (B) Von Neumann/Princeton architecture

(C) MIT architecture (D) Stanford architecture

158
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Chapter # 17 - Software Engineering
Key Knowledge Areas*
NCEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
Concepts
Section Page #
Algorithms
Data structures Electrical and Computer Engineering 4 1 0 -4 1 3
Software implementation

Facts about this section

• 4 - 6 questions can be expected on the exam according to the latest NCEES® FE specification.
• Software Engineering is one of the most lightly weighted exam sections.
• Difficulty level of this section is rated 'Medium' by the author.
• Students with a major in computer engineering may find this section easier.

Tips for preparing this section

• Understand software engineering concepts found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

• Learn how to dry run pseudo codes and simple algorithms.
• Understand the mechanics of sorting algorithms (such as bubble sort, merge sort, heap sort,
quick sort) and searching algorithms (such as binary search and hash trees).
• Review graph traversal algorithms - breadth-first search (BFS) and depth-first search (DFS).
• Review tree traversal algorithms - in-order, pre-order, and post-order tree traversal.
• Review flow chart development and its symbols.
• Gain fundamental understanding of object-oriented and structured programming including
different types of data structures (static and dynamic).
• Learn key steps involved in software implementation and testing process.
• Review relevant concepts using your college/university textbooks.
• Solve problem sets on next pages and review solutions at the end of this book.

BONUS: Unlock a free 'Software Engineering' lecture by signing-up for the On-demand FE Electrical
and Computer exam preparation course preview at: www.studyforfe.com/fe-course-preview/

* Exam specification can be found on pages 479 - 481 of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.
159
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 17.1 - Algorithms - Complexity, Big-0
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 412 while solving these questions

Problem 17.1 a) The value of x after execution of following pseudo-code will be______ .

in tx = 0; y — 0; z = 10;

do while z > 0

{ y = y + 1;

x — 2y - 1;

z = z - 3; }

end while

Problem 17.1 b) The value of temp after execution of following pseudo-code will b e______ .

int temp — 0;

for (int N = 1; N < = 100; N + + )

{ N = 2N;

temp = N ; }

Problem 17.1 c) Processing time of an algorithm for solving a problem of size n is given by expression
60 + 0.005n3 + O.Oln. Select the option that correctly identifies Big-0 value of this algorithm.

(A) 0 (1 ) (B) 0(ri)

(C) 0 ( n 3) (D) None of the above

Problem 17.1 d) Processing time of an algorithm for solving a problem of size n is given by expression
0.5n + 15n2 + 20n log2 n. Select the option that correctly identifies Big-0 value of this algorithm.

(A) 0 ( n ) (B) 0 (n lo g 2 n)

(C) 0 ( n 2) (D) 0 ( log2 n)

Problem 17.1 e) Select the INCORRECT statement(s) from given options.

(A) 0 ( x + y) = 0 ( x ) + 0 ( y ) (B) 0( x y ) = 0 ( x ) 0 ( y )

(C) 0 ( x + y) — max{0(x), 0 ( y )} (D) O(x ') = 0 ( x ) if x' = cx for all c > 0

160
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 17.1 f) Processing time of an algorithm X for solving a problem of size n is given as x ( n ) =
0.2 n2 log10 n (milli-seconds) and that of an algorithm Y is given as y (n ) = 10n2 (milli-seconds).
Which algorithm has a better Big-0 performance?

(A) Algorithm X (B) Algorithm Y

(C) Performances are equal (D) Insufficient details

Problem 17.1 g) In the previous problem, the largest problem size n0 below which algorithm X will
perform better than algorithm Y is ______ .

Problem 17.1 h) Calculate the worst-case time complexity of following code fragment,

for (int i = 0; i < n; i + + ) {

for (int j —0;j < n; j + + ) {

printf ( “First loop")-,

for (int k = 0; k < n; k + + ) {

printf ("Second loop");

}}}

(A) 0(n) (B) 0 ( n 2)

(C) 0 ( n + n) (D) nO(n)

Problem 17.1 i) ______ correctly compares Big-0 complexity as a function of problem size 'n'.

(A) 0 ( n 3) < 0 ( n 2) (B) 0 ( n 2) < 0 ( 2 n)

(C) 0 ( n ) < 0 ( lo g n) (D) O (n logn ) < 0 ( n )

161
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 17.2 - Algorithms - Sorting, Searching
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 410 while solving these questions

Problem 17.2 a )______ option correctly represents the order of array[ ] = {4,0,3,1,7} after it has
undergone two passes of bubble sort.

(A) {0,3,1,4,7} (B) {3,0,1,4,7}

(C) {0,1,3,4,7} (D) {0,1,3,7,4}

Problem 17.2 b) Bubble sort requires a maximum o f___comparisons for sorting an array with 7 items.

(A) 6 (B) 7

(C) 21 (D) 49

Problem 17.2 c) The best-case run-time complexity of bubble sort algorithm is _______.

(A )O (lo gn ) (B) 0(ri)

(C )O (n lo g n ) (D) 0 ( n 2)

Problem 17.2 d) An unsorted array contains 8 elements.____passes will be required to fully sort this
array using insertion sort.

Problem 17.2 e) Select the option that correctly shows intermediate steps of insertion sort algorithm
on array [ ] = {10,15,5,13}.

(A) 10,15,5,13 5,10,15,13 5,10,13,15 (B)10,15,5,13 5,13,10,15 5,10,13,15

(C) 10,5,15,13 10,5,13,15 5,10,13,15 (D)5,15,10,13 5,10,15,13 5,10,13,15

Problem 17.2 f) Merge sort requires_______ additional space for sorting an unsorted array of size n.

(A) 0 (1 ) (B )O (lo gn )

(C )O (n lo g n ) (D )O (n)

Problem 17.2 g) Select the option that correctly describes time complexity of merge sort algorithm.

(A) Best-case time complexity = O (n lo g n ) (B) Average-case time complexity = O (n lo g n )

(C) Worst-case time complexity = O (n lo g n ) (D) All of the above

162
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 17.2 h) Consider two sorted sub-arrays a[ ] = {14,46,60,64} and b[ ] = {31,33,76,82} that
need to be merged into a final sorted array c[ ] using merge sort. How many comparisons will be
required to place the first item within c[ ] ?

(A) 1 (B) 2

(C)3 (D) 4

Problem 17.2 i) _______ pivot option will result in best Big-0 performance using quick sort algorithm.

(A) First item (B) Last item

(C) Median of three (D) Random item

Problem 17.2 j) The median-of-three pivot for quick sort implementation on array [ ] =
{43,6,13,2,17,29,11,31,73} will be________ .

Problem 17.2 k) Apply quick sort on array[ ] = {3,9,8,10,2,11,4} using the last item (4) as pivot.
Select the option that best represents the array after (4) has been inserted in its correct location.

(A) {10,11,4,8,2,3,9} (B) {9,2,4,8,10,3,11}

(C) {3,2,4,10,9,11,8} (D) {2,11,4,8,9,11,3}

Problem 17.21) How many recursions are required to search 105 in a r ra y [] = {5,10,15,25,105}
(sorted array) using binary search algorithm?

(A) 1 (B) 2

(0 3 (D) 4

Problem 17.2 m) Select the option that correctly represents the hash table of size m = 8 that maps the
items 20,10,16,14,15,17 using hash function h(x ) = x%m. Assume that hash table is initially empty.

(A) 16 17 10 20 14 15

(B) 16 17 10 20 14 15

(C) 15 14 20 10 17 16

(D) None of the above

163
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 17.3 Data Structures - Array/Linked List/Stack/Queue
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 411 while solving these questions

Problem 17.3 a) Select the option that correctly describes the output of following code fragment,

int array[ ] = {11,9,15,16,21,3};

for (int i = 0; i < 4; i + + ) {

printf (% d, array[i ]); }

(A )0 1 2 3 (B )11 9 15 16 21

(C )11 9 15 16 (D) 11 9 15 16 21 3

Problem 17.3 b) Select the option that correctly describes the time complexity involved in counting the
number of items in a linked list.

(A) 0 (1 ) (B )O (lo gn )

(C) 0 ( n ) (D )O (n lo g n )

Problem 17.3 c) The purpose of following code segment for a given linked list is t o __________ .

struct node * function (struct node * head, int data) {

struct node * temp = (struct node*) malloc (size(struct node));

temp -> data = data;

temp -> next = head;

return (temp);}

(A) Delete a node (B) Insert a new node at the end

(C) Insert a new node in the middle (D) Insert a new node at the start

Problem 17.3 d) Every linked list node contains_____ .

(A) Data (B) Link to next node

(C) Both A and B (D) None of the above

Problem 17.3 e) The process of adding data to a stack is called a _____operation.

(A)Push (B) Pop

(C) Peek (D) Traversal

164
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 17.3 f) The purpose of following code segment for a given stack is to ______ .

void function () {

struct node * temp; temp = top;

printf ("%d", temp -> data);}

(A) Push (B) Pop

(C) Peek (D) Traversal

Problem 17.3 g) If following operations are performed on an empty stack, the sequence of popped
values will be_____.

Push(4), Push(8), Pop(), Push(6), Push(lO), Pop().

(A) 4, 8 (B) 8, 6,10

(C) 4, 6 (D) 8,10

Problem 17.3 h) In the previous problem, the final state of given stack will be______ .

(A) Top - 10, 6, 8, 4 - Bottom (B) Top - 10, 4 - Bottom

(C) Top - 8, 4 - Bottom (D) Top - 6, 4 - Bottom

Problem 17.3 i) The purpose of following code segment for a given queue is to ______ .

void function () {

printf ("%d", front -> data);}

front = front -> next;}

(A)Enqueue (B) Dequeue

(C) Display (D) Peek

Problem 17.3 j) Suppose that items are inserted in a queue as follow: 5(first item), 6, 3,1, 9 (last item).
What will be the order of removal from this queue?

(A) 9,1, 3, 6, 5 (B) 5, 6, 3,1, 9

(C) 9, 3, 5, 6, 1 (D) 5, 3, 9, 6, 1

165
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 17.4 Data Structures - Tree/Graph
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 411 while solving these questions

Problem 17.4 a) is an example of a non-linear data structure.

(A) Array (B) Linked List

(C) Tree (D) Stack

Consider the following tree for problems 17.4 b) and 17.4 c).

Problem 17.4 b) What is the height of this tree?

(A) 0 (B) 1

(C) 2 (D) 3

Problem 17.4 c) What is thedepth of node 1 in this tree?

(A) 0 (B) 1

(C )2 (D )3

Consider the following tree for problems 17.4 d) to 17.4 f).

Problem 17.4 d) Select the option that correctly identifies in-order traversal for given tree.

(A) 6, 2, 3, 5, 9, 4,1 (B) 1, 3, 6, 2, 4, 5,9

(C) 6, 3, 2,1, 5, 4, 9 (D) None of the above

166
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem 17.4 e) Select the option that correctly identifies pre-order traversal for given tree.

(A) 6, 2, 3, 5, 9, 4, 1 (B) 1, 3, 6, 2, 4, 5, 9

(C) 6, 3, 2,1, 5, 4, 9 (D) None of the above

Problem 17.4 f) Select the option that correctly identifies post-order traversal for given tree.

(A) 6, 2, 3, 5, 9, 4, 1 (B) 1, 3, 6, 2, 4, 5, 9

(C) 6, 3, 2,1, 5, 4, 9 (D) None of the above

Problem 17.4 g) Graphs can be represented using_____ method(s).

(A) Adjacency matrix (B) Incidence matrix

(C) Adjacency list (D) All of the above

Consider the following graph for problems 17.4 h) and 17.4 i).

0 0
© -------- ©
Problem 17.4 h) The size of adjacency matrix required to represent this graph is .

Problem 17.4 i) _____non-zero entries exist in the adjacency matrix of given graph.

Consider the following graph for problems 17.4 j) and 17.4 k).

Problem 17.4 j ) ________ will be the output of breadth first search (BFS) algorithm on this graph.

(A)OAGBEFCDH (B)OACHGBDEF

(C)OAHCDBEFG (D)OAGBCDHEF

Problem 17.4 k )_________ will be the output of depth first search (DFS) algorithm on this graph.

(A)OAGBEFCDH (B)OACHGBDEF

(C)OAHCDBEFG (D)OAGBCDHEF

167
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Problem Set # 17.5 - Software design methods/implementation/testing
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 412 - 413 while solving these questions

Problem 17.5 a) Software with a tendency to break due to changes in unrelated segments is called___

Problem 17.5 b) Static software testing involves verification through___________ .

(A) program code review (B) program code execution

(C) software maintenance (D) Options A, B and C are all correct

Problem 17.5 c) Glass box testing of a software is also known a s_________ testing.

Problem 17.5 d) testing is conducted at software's interface without close examination of its
internal structure.

Problem 17.5 e) is the process of testing individual pieces of source code before handing it
over for formal execution of test cases.

(A) System testing (B) Integration testing

(C) Unit testing (D) User acceptance testing

Problem 17.5 f ) _______ model requires sequential execution of design, integration, and testing.

(A) Iterative (B) Spiral

(C) Waterfall (D) Code-and-fix

Problem 17.5 g )______ describes the functionality of algorithm implemented by following flow chart.

(A) Sum calculation Start

(B) Average calculation

Input n

(C) Finding the largest number

i=0
(D) Finding the smallest number Y"0

1 - y/n

j/ Print z /

i .....
Stop

168
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Solutions

Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer

1.1a B 1.3 1 B 1.5 n See Sol. 2.1 j See Sol.
1.1 b B, C 1.3 m A 1.5 o C 2.2 a B
1.1c B 1.4 a D 1.5 p B 2.2 b C
1.1 d B, C 1.4 b C 1.6 a D 2.2 c A
1.1 e D 1.4 c y=2x -5 1.6 b See Sol. 2.2 d D
1.1 f See Sol. 1.4 d See Sol. 1.6 c See Sol. 2.2 e 0.5,0.5
1.1 g B 1.4 e A, B 1.6 d See Sol. 2.2 f 0.20
1.1 h B 1.4 f A 1.6 e See Sol. 2.2 g 0.80
1.1 i C 1.4 g B 1.6 f A 2.2 h 0.40
1.1 j D 1.4 h D 1.6 g See Sol. 2.2 i 0.40
1.1 k 2m 1.4 i See Sol. 1.7 a C 2-2 j C
1.11 A 1.4 j See Sol. 1.7 b D 2.2 k 0.50
1.2 a B 1.4 k See Sol. 1.7 c A 2.3 a B
1.2 b C 1.41 See Sol. 1.7 d 14 2.3 b 0.24
1.2 c C 1.4 m C 1.7 e See Sol. 2.3 c 0.228
1.2 d C 1.4 n A 1.7 f D 2.3 d 0.51
1.2 e D 1.4 o B 1-7 g A 2.3 e 0.0228
1.2 f -12 -24j 1.5 a C 1. 7h 0 2.3 f 0.1359
1.2 g C 1.5 b A 1.7 i 16 2.3 g 0.0013
1.3 a C 1.5 c B 1.7 j -4i+j+10k 2.3 h 0.1587
1.3 b B 1.5 d D 1.7 k B 2.3 i 0.1359
1.3 c A 1.5 e B 2.1a 6 2.4 a 3.18
1.3 d B 1.5 f B 2.1 b 88.2°F 2.4 b 0.63
1.3 e A 1-5 g B 2.1c V 2 0 /3 2.4 c 5.5%
1.3 f B 1.5 h -1/3 2.1 d 2.21 2.4 d 5/6
1.3 g 70 1.5 i C 2.1 e 6.9 2.4 e 2
1.3 h 15600 1.5 j C 2.1 f 3 2.4 f 1
1.3 i 531441 1.5 k D 2.1 g 80 3.1a C
1.3 j 29524 1.5 1 C 2.1 h 3 3.1 b D
1.3 k R2 1.5 m A 2.1 i 110 3.1c D

169
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer
3.1 d D 4.2 d $4000 5.2 e D 6.5 c A
3.1 e C 4.2 e $2,968 5.2 f B 6.5 d B
3.1 f C3 4.2 f $26,000 6.1a B 6.5 e C
3.1 g C 4.2 g $24,000 6.1 b D 6.6 a A
3.1 h A, D 4.2 h See Sol. 6.1c B 6.6 b B
3.1 i B 4.3 a 20000 6.1 d D 6.6 c B
3-1 j D 4.3 b B, C 6.1 e A 6.6 d C
3.2 a A 4.3 c 2000 6.1 f 875il k 6.6 e 6.2-14jft
3.2 b C 4.3 d Contr. A 6.2 a D 6.6 f D
3.2 c B 4.3 e Opt. C 6.2 b A 6.6 g A
3.2 d D 4.3 f Proj. B 6.2 c B 7.1a C
3.2 e 1F,2A,3B 5.1a D 6.2 d C 7.1b B
3.2 f C 5.1 b C 6.2 e 6kfl 7.1c D
3.3 a C 5.1c D 6.3 a B 7.1 d B
3.3 b B 5.1 d B 6.3 b 1.5kn 7.1 e C
3.3 c B 5.1 e .015H/m 6.3 c A 7.2 a D
3.3 d D 5.1 f D 6.3 d 7.5mA 7.2 b SOOOrads1

3.3 e 17-99mA 5.1 g B 6.3 e lk H 7.2 c B

3.3 f 4 5.1 h D 6.3 f 2A 7.2 d 3162rads1

3.3 g D 5.1 i A 6.3 g 16a 7.2 e See sol.

4.1a $241,157 5.1 j B 6.3 h 32V 7.2 f See sol.
4.1b $231,225 5.1k B 6.4 a C 7.2 g B
4.1c B 5.11 B 6.4 b D 7.2 h 1000rads1

4.1 d A 5.1m 0.5/iF 6.4 c C 7.3 a A

4.1 e $17,440 5.1 n A 6.4 d B 7.3 b B
4.1 f $392,724 5.1 o B 6.4 e 1A 7.3 c C
4.1 g $1.69mn 5.1 p D 6.4 f B 7.3 d D
4.1 h 10.47% 5.1 q B 6.4 g B 7.3 e A
4.1 i $251,416 5.1 r 4H 6.4 h B 7.3 f B
4.1 j $4878 5.2 a B 6.4 i C 7.3 g D
4.2 a D 5.2 b C 6.4 j A 7.3 h C
4.2 b str. line 5.2 c B 6.5 a D 7.3 i A
4.2 c $250,000 5.2 d .04K1 6.5 b C 7.3 j C
170
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer
7.4 a B, D 8.3 1 4n 9.2 k B 9.8 a C
7.4 b See sol. 8.3 m See sol. 9.3 a C 9.8 b B
7.4 c See sol. 8.3 n A 9.3 b D 9.8 c 5000H
7.4 d D 8.3 o B 9.3 c Cut-off 9.8 d 200H
7.4 e C 8.3 p D 9.3 d A 9.8 e C
7.4 f D 8.4 a C 9.3 e See sol. 9.8 f B
8.1a A 8.4 b A 9.3 f See sol. 9.8 g A
8.1b 2kHz 8.4 c D 9.3 g See sol. 9.8 h B
8.1c C 8.4 d C 9.4 a non 10.1a 592W
8.1 d D 8.4 e C 9.4 b lm S 10.1b B
8.1 e D 8.5 a B 9.4 c B 10.1c C
8.1 f D 8.5 b C 9.4 d 2.92mS 10.1 d 9.19W
8.1 g C 8.5 c B 9.5 a D 10.1 e B
8.1 h C 8.5 d See Sol. 9.5 b Triode 10.1 f C
8.2 a D 8.5 e See Sol. 9.5 c B 10.1 g A
8.2 b C 9.1a A 9.5 d C 10.1 h A
8.2 c B 9.1b D 9.5 e 0.44mA 10.2 a C
8.2 d A 9.1c B 9.5 f Saturation 10.2 b B
8.2 e A 9.1 d 0.634V 9.5 g 5 k n ,3 k H 10.2 c C
8.2 f 1000 rad/s 9.1 e C 9.6 a -5V 10.2 d A
8.2 g Band-pass 9.1 f A 9.6 b 5kft 10.2 e B
8.2 h B 9.1 g C 9.6 c 2.5V 10.2 f B
8.3 a C 9.1 h Group III 9.6 d -35V 10.2 g D
8.3 b B 9.2 a A 9.6 e 0.5V 10.2 h A
8.3 c D 9.2 b 0.66mA 9.6 f 4.3V 10.2 i C
8.3 d A 9.2 c 0.13mA 9.6 g 0.5V 10.2 j D
8.3 e B 9.2 d See sol. 9.7 a B 10.2 k C
8.3 f A 9.2 e 400H 9.7 b C 10.21 A
8.3 g B 9.2 f 2mA 9.7 c C 10.2 m B
8.3 h C 9.2 g 1.4V 9.7 d D 10.2 n D
8.3 i D 9.2 h 114V 9.7 e B 10.2o C
8.3 j B 9.2 i 152V 9.7 f C 10.3 a D
8.3 k A 9.2 j See sol. 9.7 g 183V 10.3 b B
171
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer
10.3 c 0.98 lag 11.1a D 11.4 d B 12.3 i B
10.3 d 0.82 lag 11.1 b A 11.4 e D 12.3 j 0<k<5
10.3 e D 11.1c C 11.4 f A 12.4 a See sol.
10.4 a C 11.1 d B 11.5 a 0.5/6.91° 12.4 b See sol.
10.4 b C 11.1 e D 11.5 b C 12.4 c 2
10.4 c 7% 11.1 f D 11.5 c B 12.4 d 0.50
10.4 d B 11.1 g B 11.5 d D 12.4 e A
10.4 e B 11.1 h A 11.5 e D 12.4 f 0.90s
10.4 f C 11.1 i D 11.5 f B 12.4 g 1.16
10.4 g D 11.1 j B 12.1a See sol. 12.4 h 16.3%
10.5 a B 11.1 k A 12.1b See sol. 12.4 i 3.46rad/s
10.5 b A 11.11 C 12.1c See sol. 12.4 j 2.82rad/s
10.5 c 4.16A 11.2 a D 12.1 d See sol. 12.4 k 3.62
10.5 d 25000ft 11.2 b 5fii 12.1 e A 12.41 2s
10.5 e son 11.2 c 11.5° 12.1 f See sol. 12.4 m 0.24
10.5 f D 11.2 d B 12.1 g See sol. 12.4 n OO
10.5 g A 11.2 e 0.15/iV 12.1 h See sol. 12.4o OO
10.5 h C 11.2 f SQOfjJ 12.2 a A 12.4 p OO
10.6 a C 11.2 g 0.4jUT 12.2 b D 12.4 q 0.11
10.6 b C 11.2 h lOOkA 12.2 c C 13.1a C
10.6 c B 11.3 a D 12.2 d See sol. 13.1 b u(t-3)
10.6 d 5.5% 11.3 b B 12.2 e D 13.1c D
10.6 e D 11.3 c C 12.2 f -60dB 13.1 d B
10.6 f B 11.3 d B 12.2 g 20dB 13.1 e 8(t)/3
10.6 g D 11.3 e C 12.2 h -33.9dB 13.1 f D
10.6 h C 11.3 f B 12.3 a B 13.1 g A
10.6 i B 11.3 g B 12.3 b A, C 13.1 h B
10.6 j C 11.3 h C 12.3 c C 13.1 i 18J
10.6 k 41.4kW 11.3 i See sol. 12.3 d B 13.2 a 7V
10.61 4.94Nm 11.3 j D 12.3 e D 13.2 b 5V
10.6 m 173A 11.4 a B 12.3 f B 13.2 c 0.71
10.6 n 215V 11.4 b C 12.3 g See sol. 13.2 d 0.80
10.6o 0.14H 11.4 c D 12.3 h -8/3 13.2 e 200Hz
172
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer
13.2 f 50kHz 13.5 j See Sol. 14.3 e C 15.1 g OOII2
13.2 g D 13.6 a A 14.3 f C 15.1 h D
13.2 h C 13.6 b C 14.3 g D 15.1 i D
13.2 i 15.2% 13.6 c C 14.3 h C 15.l j B
13.2 j 84.7% 13.6 d 400bps 14.3 i C 15.2 a D
13.2 k A 13.6 e B 14.3 j C 15.2 b A
13.3 a 3.18 13.6 f 20fi s 14.4 a B 15.2 c B
13.3 b 41.8kHz 13.6 g 15kHz 14.4 b D 15.2 d B
13.3 c B 14.1a Routing 14.4 c C 15.2 e C
13.3 d lkHz,10Hz 14.1b D 14.4 d B 15.2 f B
13.3 e C 14.1c Network 14.4 e D 15.3 a B
13.3 f See sol. 14.1 d Data link 14.4 f D 15.3 b C
13.3 g See sol. 14.1 e C 14.4 g C 15.3 c A
13.3 h See sol. 14.1 f A 14.4 h D 15.3 d C
13.3 i D 14.1 g See Sol. 14.5 a A 15.3 e B
13.3 j B 14.2 a App. Lyr 14.5 b A 15.3 f C
13.3 k B 14.2 b A 14.5 c A 15.4 a B
13.31 C 14.2 c C 14.5 d D 15.4 b D
13.3 m D 14.2 d D 14.5 e D 15.4 c C
13.4 a 40sinc(8f) 14.2 e A 14.5 f B 15.4 d A
13.4 b See sol. 14.2 f B 14.5 g B 15.4 e C
13.4 c C 14.2 g 406 14.5 h C 15.4 f C
13.4 d D 14.2 h 28 14.5 i 8 15.5 a C
13.4 e See Sol. 14.2 i C 14.5 j B 15.5 b B
13.5 a 128 14.2 j D 14.5 k 4 15.5 c C
13.5 b D 14.2 k B 14.5 1 See Sol. 15.5 d A
13.5 c B 14.21 D 14.5 m B 15.5 e B
13.5 d C 14.2 m C 15.1a See Sol. 15.5 f B
13.5 e 34.5kbps 14.2 n C 15.1b See Sol. 15.5 g D
13.5 f 11.7dB 14.3 a D 15.1c D 15.5 h A
13.5 g 11 14.3 b D 15.1 d 01012 15.6 a D
13.5 h 10101111 14.3 c D 15.1 e IOOI2 15.6 b C
13.5 i See Sol. 14.3 d D 15.1 f OOOO2 15.6 c See Sol.
173
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer Problem Answer
15.6 d See Sol. 16.1c A 16.3 f B 17.3 j B
15.6 e See Sol. 16.1 d B 16.3 g B 17.4 a C
15.6 f See Sol. 16.1 e B 17.1a 7 17.4 b D
15.6 g See Sol. 16.1 f C 17.1b 29 17.4 c A
15.6 h See Sol. 16.1 g D 17.1c C 17.4 d C
15.6 i B 16.1 h D 17.1 d C 17.4 e B
15.6 j A 16.1 i See Sol. 17.1 e A 17.4 f A
15.6 k See Sol. 16.1 j D 17.1 f B 17.4 g D
15.61 C 16.2 a D 17.1 g 1050 17.4 h 4x4
15.6 m See Sol. 16.2 b 8 x 230 bits 17.1 h B 17.4 i 6
15.6 n C 16.2 c c 17.1 i B 17.4 j B
15.7 a See Sol. 16.2 d c 17.2 a C 17.4 k D
15.7 b B 16.2 e A 17.2 b C 17.5 a Fragile
15.7 c C 16.2 f B 17.2 c B 17.5 b A
15.7 d B 16.2 g 18 17.2 d 7 17.5 c White box
15.7 e A 16.2 h 9 17.2 e A 17.5 d Black box
15.7 f A 16.2 i 6 17.2 f D 17.5 e C
15.7 g C 16.2 j 3 17.2 g D 17.5 f C
15.7 h B 16.2 k A 17.2 h A 17.5 g B
15.7 i A 16.2 1 18 17.2 i D
15.8 a C 16.2 m 9 17.2 j 43
15.8 b D 16.2 n 0 17.2 k C
15.8 c C 16.2o 9 17.21 C
15.8 d A 16.2 p 9 17.2 m A
15.8 e D 16.2 q 16 17.3 a C
15.9 a B 16.2 r 4 17.3 b C
15.9 b B 16.2 s 5 17.3 c D
15.9 c C 16.2 t D 17.3 d C
15.9 d A 16.3 a B 17.3 e A
15.9 e D 16.3 b B 17.3 f C
15.9 f C 16.3 c D 17.3 g D
16.1a B 16.3 d D 17.3 h D
16.1b A 16.3 e D 17.3 i B
174
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 1 - Mathematics
1.1 Algebra and Trigonometry
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 34 - 38 for reference

1.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

log3(12x - 12) - log3(x) = 2

According to the logarithmic identities given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

( 1 2 x - 12)
(x)

The given logarithmic function can be rearranged as follows:

(12x - 12)
-— -T-r— - = 32 -> 12x - 12 = 9x -» 3x = 12 -» x = 4
(x)

1.1 b) CORRECT ANSWERS - B, C

Logarithm can only be calculated for positive real numbers.

Logarithms of 0 and negative real numbers are undefined.

1.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

log3(x + 1) + log30 - 1) = 1

According to the logarithmic identities given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

lo g x + lo g y = l o g x y -» lo g 3 ( x + 1 ) + lo g 3 ( x - 1 ) = lo g 3 [ ( x + l ) ( x - 1 )] = Io g 3 ( x 2 - 1)

The given logarithmic function can be rearranged as follows:

lo g 3 ( x 2 - l ) = l

Taking anti-log on both sides of the equation results in following:

x 2 - 1 = 31 = 3

x 2 = 4 -> x = 2, —2

It is important to validate these results by substitution to see if values of x are acceptable solutions.

log3(2 + 1) + log3(2 — 1) = 1 + 0 = 1 Therefore, x = 2 is a valid solution.

l° g 3( —2 + 1) + log3( —2 — 1) = log3( —1) + log3( —3) x = 2 is an invalid solution because logarithm of

negative real number is undefined.

175
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B, C

l n ( x 2 — 7x + 11) = 0

x 2 —7x + 11 = e° = 1 -» x 2 —7x + 10 = 0

x = 5,2 can be obtained by solving above given quadratic equation.

Helpful tip - Verify that x = 5,2 are valid solutions.

1.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Domain represents the set of valid input x values for which logarithmic function can be calculated.

lo g (x2 — 7x + 10) can be calculated if x2 —7x + 10 > 0 -> (x — 5)(x - 2) > 0

x = 5 and x = 2 are the two critical points that need to be considered on the number line to evaluate the range
of inputs for which x 2 —7x + 10 > 0

positive negative positive

region region region
-o o ------------------------------------1-00

2 5

It can be observed that x 2 —7x + 10 > 0 can be guaranteed for ( —oo, 2) and (5, °o).

Helpful tip - Verify that 2 < x < 5 will result in x 2 —7x + 10 < 0

1.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER: log10 7 / log10 5

According to the logarithmic details given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

logb X = lo g a x / lo g a b

In our case, b — 5, a = 10 and x = 7.

Therefore, logs 7 can be expressed in log-base 10 as follows:

I o g 5 7 = lo g 107 / I o g 105

176
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Trigonometry'.

According to the trigonometric identities given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

1 cos2 X
c o t2 X = — r— = — ^— sin2 X + cos2 X = 1
tan2 x sin^ x

Substituting this identity into the given trigonometric expression results in:

9 ^ 9 N 7 / C0 S 2 X \ 9 9
sinz x (c o t z x + 1) = s irr x — — h 1 1 = sin^ x + cos x — 1
\sin2 x J

1.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Trigonometry'.

According to the trigonometric identities given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

1 cos2 x
cot2 x = — =— = —r-=— sinz x + cosz x
tan2 x sin2 x

Substituting this identity into the given trigonometric expression results in:

cos2 x cos2x
cot2 x _ sjn2 x _ siffi-x- _ cos x _ cos2 x
(cot2x + l ) ( cos2x ^ ( cos2x + sin2 x\ 1
\sin2x / \ sm^ac- )

1.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Trigonometry'.

(sin x + cos x) 2 — 1 = (sin2 x + cos2 x + 2 sin x cos x) — 1

According to the trigonometric identities given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

sin2 x + cos2 x = 1 s in 2 x = 2 sin x cos x

Therefore, (sinx + cosx)2 — 1 = (1) + (sin2x) — 1 = sin2x

1.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Trigonometry'.

csc2 x cot2 x + csc2 x = csc2 x (cot2 x + 1)

According to the trigonometric identities given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

cot2 x + 1 = csc2 x

Therefore, csc2 x (cot2 x + 1) = csc2 x (csc2 x) = csc4 x

177
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.1 k) CORRECT ANSWER: 2m

According to the 'Law of Sines' given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

a b c
sin/1 sinfi sinC

c = 2m

a 2m
sin 60° sin 60°

Note - Equilateral triangle has equal sides and equal angles.

1.11) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the 'Law of Cosines' given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

a2 = b2 + c2 —2bccosA

b2 + c2 - a2
A = cos 1
2be

3.462 + 42 - 22
A = cos 1---------------------= 30°
2 (3.46) (4)

b2 = a2 + c2 —2ac cos B

a2 + c2 —b2
B = cos 1
2ac

B = cos 1

The sum of angles in a triangle = 180°.

Therefore, A + B + C = 180°

C = 180°- A - B = 90°

178
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.2 Complex Numbers - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 36 - 37 for

1.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Algebra of Complex Numbers'.

a = 8 + Aj b = 5 + Oj

a - b = (8 + 4/) - (5 + 0j )

a — b = 3 + 4/

Polar representation of given complex number can be found as shown below:

r = |3 + 4/| = V 32 + 42 = 5

Therefore, a - b = 5/53° in polar format.

Helpful tip - Complex number arithmetic can be performed quickly using calculators.

1.2 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Algebra of Complex Numbers'.

a = 4 + Aj = 5.66/45° in polar format.

6 = 2 + 3; =3.61/56.3° in polar format.

a/ b = (5.66/45°)/(3.61/56.3°)

a/b = (1.56/45°-56.3°) = (1.56/-110)

Helpful tip - Complex number division can be performed easily in polar form.

1.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Algebra of Complex Numbers'.

a = 2130° b = 4/15°

a x b = (2/302) (4/15°) = 8/45°

a x b = 8 cos 45° + jr'8 sin 45° = 5.7 + 5.7;

Helpful tip - Complex number multiplication can be easily performed in polar form.

179
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Algebra of Complex Numbers'.

a —4/30° = 4 cos 30° + ;4sin30° = 3.46 + 2;

b = 6/30° = 6 cos 30° + ;6 sin 30° = 5.2 + 3;

a + b = (3.46 + 2;') + (5.2 + 3;') = 8.66 + 5;

a + b = 8.66 + 5;

Helpful tip -Addition/subtraction of complex number can be easily performed in rectangular form.

1.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Algebra of Complex Numbers'.

5(cos 53° + j sin 53°) is rectangular form of 3 + 4j.

5e;53 is Euler's form of 3 + 4j.

5/53° is polar form of 3 + 4;.

Therefore, all options are accurate representations of 3 + 4;.

1.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER: -1 2 - 24j

Z = (2 + 6;) x (3 + 3j )

Z = 6+ 6j + 18; + 18j 2

Z = 6+ 24; + 18(—1)

Z = 6 + 24; - 18 = -1 2 + 24j

Z* = -1 2 - 24;

1.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to the Euler's Identity:

cos 0 = -------------

ejo _ e~jQ
sin 9 = ----- —-----
2;
ejQ + e-j0 eje _ e-jo
2 cos 6 + ;4 sin 6 = 2 -------------- h; 4 -------------
2 2;

2 cos 6 + ;4 sin 6 = ejd + e~jd + 2(eje —e~ie)

2 cos 6 + ;4 sin 6 = 3eid - e~je

180
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.3 Discrete Mathematics and Progressions - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 34 - 35, 50 for reference

1.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Discrete Math - Set Theory'.

'Set A' is defined as the proper subset of 'Set B' if every element in 'Set A' is also present in 'Set B', and there
exists at least one element in 'Set B' which is not present in 'Set A'.

According to above given definition only {2,4, 6} qualifies as a proper subset of {2, 4, 6, 8,10,12}.

1.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Discrete Math - Set Theory'.

'Set A' is defined as a subset of 'Set B' if every element in 'Set A' is also present in 'Set B'.

Equal sets are also subsets. According to the definition {a, b, c, d, e} qualifies as a subset of {a, b, c, d, e}.

1.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - A

This problem falls under the category of 'Discrete Math - Set Theory'.

{1, 2, 3,4, 5} and {a, b, c, d, e} are examples of disjoint sets because they do not share any common element.

1.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Discrete Math - Set Theory'.

Cartesian product of A x B contains ordered pairs in the format (a, b).

Therefore, {(l,a),(l,b),(l,c),(l,d),(2,a),(2,b),(2,c),(2,d)} is the cartesian product of {1,2} x {a, b, c, d}.

1.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

This problem falls under the category of 'Discrete Math - Function Characteristics'.

Function is defined as a set of relations between inputs (domain - x) and outputs (range - y) such that each
input is related to only one output.

According to the definition, {(1, a), (1, b), (1, c)} is not a function because input 1 is related to multiple outputs.

1.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Discrete Math - Function Characteristics'.

{(a, 1), (b, 1), (c, 2), (d, 2)} is a surjective function because each output is linked to at least one input.

Helpful tip - Understand the difference between injective, surjective and bijective functions.

181
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 70

According to the problem statement, progression is 2, 4, 6, 8,10,12.....

It can be observed that given progression is 'Arithmetic' such that:

First term value 'a' = 2, difference between terms 'd' = 2, # of terms 'n' = 35, last term 'I' -

According to the arithmetic progression formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

I = a + (n — 1)d

l35 = 2 + (35 - 1)2 = 70

Therefore, 35thterm of the given arithmetic progression is 70.

Helpful tip - Review arithmetic progression formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

1.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 15600

This problem falls under the category of 'Progressions and Series'.

According to the problem statement, we are given an arithmetic progression such that:

First term value 'a' = 1, # of terms 'n' = 120, last term 'I' = 259, sum 'S' = ?

According to the arithmetic progression formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

S = n(a + l)/2

120(1 + 259)
5= — ------- - = 15600

Therefore, sum of given arithmetic progression is 15600.

1.3 i) CORRECT ANSWER : 531441

This problem falls under the category of 'Progressions and Series'.

According to the problem statement, progression is 3, 9, 27, 81

It can be observed that given progression is geometric such that:

First term value 'a' = 3, common ratio V = 3, # of terms W — 12, last term T = ?

According to the geometric progression formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

I = a rn_1

*12 = (3)(3)12-1 = 531441

Therefore, 12thterm of the given geometric progression is 531441.

Helpful tip - Review geometric progression formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

182
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.3 j) CORRECT ANSWER : 29524

This problem falls under the category of 'Progressions and Series'.

According to the problem statement, progression is geometric such that:

First term value 'a' = 1, common ratio V = 3, last term T = 19683/5' = ?

According to the geometric progression formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

S = (a - r l ) / { 1 - r )

1 - (3 x 19683)
5 = ---- - - ------------ - = 29524
1 -3
Therefore, sum of given geometric progression is 29524.

1.3 k) CORRECT ANSWER - R2

A n B is the intersection of sets A and B.

R2 represents overlapping areas of sets A and B.

R4

1.3 I) CORRECT ANSWER - 8

It can be observed that given directed graph has 5 nodes/vertices in the form of A, B, C, D and E.

1.3 m) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The given directed graph contains following edges/arcs:

A -> C {A, C)

A -» B (A, B)

B ^C (B ,C )

D -> C (D , C )

C -» E (C, E )

E - * E ( E , E)
183
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.4 Analytic Geometry - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 35, 39 - 45 for reference

1.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Angle a between two straight lines can be calculated using following equation:
, m2 ~ m i
a - tan”1— -------
1 4- m1m2

m1 and m2 are slopes of lines L1and Lz respectively.

According to the problem statement:

7i - x i + 4 = ( l ) * i + 4 m1 = 1

y 2 = 5x 2 + 6 = ( 5 ) x 2 + 6 m2 = 5

a = ta,rlrT(Si) = tan ^ =33JO

Helpful tip - Review straight line equations given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

1.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The standard form of straight-line equation is given below.

y ~ mx + b

According to the problem statement, straight line passes through (2, 10) and (3,12).

y2 - y i 12 “ 10
771 = ----------- = —r---— = 2
x2 —xr 3 —2

y - 2x + b

Since the line passes through (2,10), it implies that 10 — 2(2) + b

b = 10-4 = 6

Therefore, equation of a straight line passing through {2,10) and (3,12) isy = 2x + 6

1.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER : y ~ 2x - 5

The standard form of straight-line equation is given below.

y —mx + b

According to the problem statement, slope is 2 and intercept is -5.

y = (2)* + (-5 )

Therefore, equation of a straight line with slope 2 and intercept -5 is y — 2x - 5.

184
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER: y = 4(x - 3) + 6

Point-slope form of straight-line equation is given below:

y - y 1 = m ( x - x 1)

According to the problem statement, ??i = 4 and = (3,6).

y - 6 = 4(x - 3)

y —4(x — 3) + 6

1.4 e) CORRECT ANSWERS - A, B

The equation of straight line given in the problem statement is y = 4x + 4. Therefore, its slope

Perpendicular line must have a slope = —1/4 and its general equation will be y — —xj4 + b.

Straight line equations given below meet above mentioned requirements:

x

y — —x/4 + 4

Note: y-intercept 'b' is irrelevant for this problem.

1.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Standard forms of parabola equations are given below.

(y —k) 2 = 2p{x —h) Parabola opening on the positive x-axis.

(y —k)2 = —2p(x —li) Parabola opening on the negative x-axis.

{x —h)2 = 2p(y —k) Parabola opening on the positive y-axis.

(,x —h) 2 = —2p(y —k) Parabola opening on the negative y-axis.

It can be observed that (x — 4 )2 = 2(y — 2) represents a parabola opening on the positive y-

1.4 g ) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Standard forms of ellipse equations are given below.

l—- i- -I- ^ 7 —i a > b Ellipse with a horizontal major axis (wide ellipse).
az bd

- ---- + ^ _ i a>b Ellipse with a vertical major axis (tall ellipse).

b1 ad

(x —2)^
It can be observed that--------- 1--------- = 1 represents a tall ellipse with a vertical major axis.
100 144

185
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.4 h) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Standard forms of hyperbola equations are given below.

^ /l) ^ (y
~~~i------— “ 1 Hyperbola opening on the x-axis (sideways).

—~2----£2— ~ 1 Hyperbola opening on the y-axis (upwards/downwards).

(y —4)^ (.x~2)^
It can be observed that —^ --------= 1 represents a hyperbola that opens upwards/downwards.

1.4 i) CORRECT ANSWER - See Solution.

It can be observed that given conic section is a parabola with following standard equation:

(x —h) 2 = 2p(y —k) Parabola opening on the positive y-axis.

According to the problem statement: (x — 4 )2 = 12 (y — 3) = 2(6) ( y — 3) -» ft = 4, fc = 3,p = 6

Eccentricity of a parabola is always equal to 1.

Focus = (ft, k + p/2) - ^4,3 + ^ = (4,6). Directrix = y = k - ^ = 3 —^ = 0 .

1.4 j) CORRECT ANSWER - See Solution.

It can be observed that given conic section is a parabola with following standard equation:

(y —k) 2 = 2p(x —h) Parabola opening on the positive x-axis.

According to the problem statement: (y — 8 )2 = 4(x — 2) = 2 ( 2) (x — 2) ft = 2, /c = 8, p = 2

Eccentricity of a parabola is always equal to 1.

Focus = (ft + p/2, k) = (^2 + ^,8^ — (3,8). Directrix = x = h — 2 1.

1.4 k) CORRECT ANSWER - See Solution.

2(x —10)2 + 8(y —6)2 = 200

Let us first convert the given conic section equation into standard form as shown below:

2(x - 10)2 ( 8(y - 6)2 _ 200 (x ~ 10)2 ( (y - 6)2 _ ^ (x - 10)2 ( (y - 6)2 _ 1

200 + 200 " 200 ^ 100 + 25 = 1 (10)2 + (5)2 1

It can be observed that given conic section is an ellipse (standard form of an ellipse is given below for reference).

(x - ft)2 (y ~ k ) 2 _
a2 + b2

In our case, a = 10, b — 5, ft = 10, k = 6. This represents a wide ellipse with a horizontal major axis,

186
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Eccentricity of an ellipse is given by following equation:

e = yjl —b2/a2 = 71 - 25/100 = 0.866 c = Va2 - b2 = V75

Focus = (ft ± c, k) ~ (10 ± V75,6). Directrix = x —(ft ± ^ = (lO ± = (10 ± 11-54)

1.4 I) CORRECT ANSWER - See Solution.

2 0 - 10)2 - 8(y —6)z = 200

Let us first convert the given conic section equation into standard form as shown below:

2(x-10)2 8 ( y - 6 ) 2 200 ( x ~~ 10)2 (y - 6)2 1 ( x — 10)2 (y — 6)2 ^

200 200 “ 200 ^ 100 25 ~ ^ (lO )2 (5)2

It can be observed that given conic section is a hyperbola opening along x-axis.

(x - ft)2( y - k)2 _
a2 b2

In our case, a = 10, b ~ 5, h = 10, k = 6.

Eccentricity of an ellipse is given by following equation:

e = yjl + b2/a2 = yjl + 25/100 = 1.11 c = Va2"+&2 = Vl25

Focus = (h ± c , k ) = (10 + V l 25, 6). Directrix = x = (ji ± ^ = ^10 ± ~ = (10 ± 9)

1.4 m) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to the formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, volume (V) of a right circular cylinder is:

V = nr2h —7r(lm)2(2m) = 6.28m3

Helpful tip - Review formulas of different geometric shapes given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

1.4 n) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, area (A) of a right circular cone is:

A = n r ( r + yjr2 + ft2)

According to the problem details: A —n r ( i ' + V r2 + ft2) - A —n ( 2 m ) (2m + yj(2m)2 + (4?n)2) — 40.6m2

1.4 o) CORRECT ANSWER - B

n r 2h n d 2h n r 2h
V r ig h t c i r c u la r cone ~ ^ b r ig h t c i r c u la r c y lin d e r ^ ^ ^ p a r a b o lo id o f r e v ~ g — ^2

It can be observed that right circular cylinder can hold highest volume of liquid.

187
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.5 Calculus - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 45 - 49 for reference

1.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Calculus'.

f(x) = 2 tan2 x + sin2 %

d 7 d
f ( x ) = 2 — tan x H— ■—sin x
dx dx

i, ■v / & \ d
f ( x ) = 2 [ 2 tan x tan x + 2 sin x —- sin x
V dx ) dx

According to the derivatives given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

d d
- r - t a n x = sec x — sin * = c o s*
dx dx

Substituting these formulas results in:

f ' { x ) = 4 tan x s e c2 x + 2 sin x cos x

1.5 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Calculus'.

f ( x ) = 4 x 2 + 6x + 2y 2

d _ d d _
/ (x) —4~—x 2+ 6— x +2 — v
dx dx dx

According to thederivatives given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

d
— x n — n x 11
dx

f i x ) - 4(2jc) + 6(1) + 2(0)

f ’{x) — 8x + 6

1.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Calculus'.

fix) = 2 tan xsecx

d
f ( x ) = 2 — (tan x sec x )
dx

i d d \
f ( x ) = 2 { tan x — s e c x + sec x — tan x
\ dx dx J

188
Copyrighted Material © 2020
According to the derivatives given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

d d
—- t a n x — see*1x sec x = secx tanx
dx dx

Substituting these formulas results in:

f i x ' ) - 2 (t a n x (s e c x ta n x ) + secx (sec2x ) )

f i x ) = 2(ta n2 x s e c x -I- se c3 x )

1.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Calculus'.

fix ) = 2 sin-1 x + 2 cos” 1 x

f i x ) = 2 —— (sin -1 x ) + 2 ~ - ( c o s ~ 1 x )
dx ax

According to the derivatives given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

d 1 d - 1
sin 1 r — -------- — cos x =
dx Vl - x 2 V1 - x 2

Substituting these formulas results in:

T = 5 )t 2 (7T=p)J r w -"

1.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

3 x 3 + 2x
f i x ) = -------------
J J 2x + 4

According to the quotient rule given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

(2x + 4) (3 x 3 + 2 x ) - <3x3 + 2x) 4 - (2x + 4)

f ( x ) = ------------- 32------ ax
{2x + 4) 2

(2x + 4)(9x2 + 2) — (3 x 3 4- 2x)(2) 18x3 + 4x 4- 36x2 + 8 - 6x3 —4x

/'(* ) = (2x + 4 )2 (2x + 4)2

12x3 + 36x2 + 8
fix ') =
(2x+4)2

1.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the problem statement:

f i x ) —4x3 + x 2 — 2x + 8 —1 < x < 1

To calculate the maximum and minimum of a function, first order derivative is calculated as shown below:
189
Copyrighted Material © 2020
f'(x) = 12x2 + 2x ~ 2
The roots of f ( x ) can be calculated using factorization, quadratic equation, or a calculator.

1
12x + 2x —2 -> x = ~ , x = —1/2

Now, we need to calculate second order derivative f " ( x ) = 24x + 2

Substituting x — —1/2 in second derivative equation results in negative value. Therefore, it is a local maximum.

Substituting x = 1/3 in second derivative equation results in positive value. Therefore, it is a local minimum.

1.5 g) CORRECT ANSWER-B

According to the problem statement:

f ( x ) = 3x3 + 3x2 - 3x + 3 —2 < x < 1

To calculate the maximum and minimum of a function, first order derivative is calculated as shown below:

f ' ( x ) = 9xz + 6x ~ 3

The roots of f ' { x ) can be calculated using factorization, quadratic equation, or calculator.

1
9x + 6 x —3 = 0 - > x = — ,x = —1

Now, we need to calculate second order derivative /"OO = 18* + 6

Substituting x = —1 in second derivative equation results in negative value. Therefore, it is a local maximum.

Substituting x — 1/3 in second derivative equation results in positive value. Therefore, it is a local minimum.

1.5 h) CORRECT ANSWER: x = -1 / 3

In the previous problem, f u(x) = 18* + 6

Point of inflection is calculated by taking second order derivative and setting it to zero as shown below:

f " ( x ) - 18x + 6 = 0 -> x = -1 /3

The calculated value of x is a point of inflection because at this point second derivative is zero and second
derivative also changes sign as x increases through it (test by substituting incremental values).

1.5 i) CORRECT ANSWER-C

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Calculus - L 'Hospital's Rule'.

According to the problem statement:

3x2 - 2 x - l 3(1)2 —2(1) — 1 0

x™ 4*2 + 6x — 10 “ 4(1)2 + 6(1) — 10 “ 0

190
Copyrighted Material © 2020
0/0 is an indeterminate form (oo/oo is the other indeterminate form).

Therefore, we need to use L 'Hospital's rule to evaluate this limit.

d 9
3x2 - 2 x - l 7K(3x - 2 x - 1 ) 6x - 2 6(1) - 2
]im — 5— ----- — = lim
*->i 4x2 4- 6x — 10
-------------------------
x~*1jL .( 4.x 2 _|_ _ jo)
lim - ------- = — — — - =f± )= -7
V147
x~>1"I”8(1) +6

1.5 j) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Calculus - L 'Hospital's Rule'.

According to the problem statement:

4cosx 4 coS7r/2 4(0) 0

2 —2 sin x 2 —2s\nn/2 2 —2 ( 1 ) 0

0/0 is an indeterminate form. Therefore, we need to use L 'Hospital's rule to evaluate this limit.
4 cos x ttz (4 cos x) —4 sin x n
lim - — — - — = lim ------------------- = lim — -----------= 2 tan — = co
X- >7r/2 2 — 2 Sill X x->n/2 a x->it/2 ~2 c o s x 2
dx smx)
1.5 k) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Integral Calculus'.

f 4
4 fr i
1
----- - dx — 4 ----- - dx
j x+ 3 ) x+3

According to the indefinite integrals given in IMCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

f 1 1
1 -dx = - I n Iax + b\ + C
J cix-+t b a~

Substituting this formula in given indefinite integral results in:

1
4 yin \x + 31- 4 In \x + 3| + C

Helpful tip - Review tables of derivatives and indefinite integrals given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

1.5 I) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Integral Calculus'.

/(sin x + cos x) dx
2 2

According to the trigonometric identity given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

sin 2 x + cos2 x = 1

Substituting this formula in given indefinite integral results in: J*(sin2 x + cos2 x) dx = J 1 dx = x + C

191
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.5 m) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the integration by parts formula provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

J u dv = uv —J v dn
1 X^
For the given problem, let us assum e that: u = In x -» du = ~dx dv —xdx -» v = —

j 4x\nxdx = 4 j u dv - 4 - J vduj = 4 ^1 n x~ - J ’Y ~ ’ dx^j = 2x2 l n x —X2 + C

According to the trigonom etric identity given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

f eax
J xeax dx = (ax — 1)

e2x \ e2W \ e2(-0) \ e2 1

f x e “ dx = _ ( 2 x - 1) ) = — (2(1) - 1) - — (2(0) - U = T +?

1.5 o) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Derivative is highest when the rate of rise over run is highest. In other words, it is a measure of the steepness of
a curve. It can be observed that given function is steepest at point C.

1.5 p) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Derivative is lowest when the rate of rise over run is lowest. The given function has a negative slope at point B.

Copyrighted Material © 2020

 1.6 Differential Equations - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 51 - 52 for reference

1.6 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Equations'.

2 y' + 4 y — 0 y (0 ) — 6

Standard form of 1st order differential equation with constant coefficient is given below:

y' + ay = 0

Solution of standard equation is y = Ce~at.

Divide given equation by 2 to convert it into standard form y ' + 2 y = 0

In our case, a = 2. Therefore, general solution is y = Ce~2t.

We can calculate coefficient using initial conditions as shown below:

y ( 0) = 6 6= C e -» C = 6

Therefore, y = 6e~2t

l-e 3
-^ 3
1.6 b) CORRECT ANSWER: y 2

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Equations'.

y ' -1- 2x 2y — x 2

We can use the method of separation of variables to solve this differential equation as shown below.

dy , , 2 2 dy 2 2 dy 2 C1 ,
— + 2x y = x* —x — 2 x Ly = x ( l — 2y )
dx dx dx

( ~ T ) dy = X*dx
■

Taking integrals on both side of equations results in following:

^ 3 ^

— 2 ln | l ~ 2y| - ln | l - 2y| = - - x 3

2 3
Ks 1 - e zx
1 — 2y — e 3X -^ y —
2

Helpful tip - Learn separation of variables and integrating factor methods.

193
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.6 c) CORRECT ANSWER : y = - i - ^ + Ce4x

2y' = 8 y + 2x needs to be converted into standard form y' + P(x)y = as shown below.

2y ' - S y = 2x -* y r ~4y = x

Integrating factor method will be used to solve this differential equation because variables cannot be separated.

Step # 1 - Determine the integrating factor eJ P(x)dx

e J p(x)dx _ eJ-4dx _ e -4x

Step #2- Multiply the entire equation by the integrating factor.

e~4x(y r — 4 y) = x ( e ” 4* )

Left hand side of the equation can be expressed as ~ ( e “ 4xy ) .

(e~4xy) = x(e~4x)
dx

Step # 3 - Integrate both sides of the equation.

(ax - 1 )

j xCe ■4X^ _
(-4 )2
(-4 x -1 ) +C=
16
+ C

xe
e y — +C
4 16

X 1 Ax
1
II

~ I6 +

1.6 d) CORRECT A N S W E R : y = ( C x + C 2* )< T 3*

y " + 6y' + 9y = 0

W e can use the method of undetermined coefficients, as explained in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

The solution will be of form y = Cerx with characteristic equation: r 2 + 6 r + 9 = 0

Comparing this equation with the standard form r 2 + ar + b = 0 shows that a = 6, b = 9.

Solving r 2 + 6 r + 9 = 0 results in rt = r 2 = — 3

Since a 2 = 46 = 36, solution is critically-damped and it can be represented as follows,

y = ( C i + C2jt)e ri* y = (C j + C2x)e~3x

194
______ _______________ _______________ Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.6 e) CORRECT ANSWER : y = 4e2x + 2e~4*

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Equations',

y " + 2y' - Qy = 0 y (0 ) = 6 y '( 0 ) = 0

W e can use the m ethod of undetermined coefficients, as explained in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

The solution will be of the form y = Cerx with characteristic equation: r 2 + 2 r — 8 = 0

Comparing this equation with standard form r 2 + ar + b = 0 shows that a = 2, b = -8 .

Solving r 2 + 2 r - 8 = 0 results in = 2, r2 = - 4

Since a 2 = 4 > 4& = — 32, solution is overdamped and can be represented as shown below:

y = + C2e r2* / = + C2r2er*

W e can calculate the coefficients using initial conditions as shown below:

y (0) = 6 -> 6 = CiePW) + c2e(-4^°> = C1 + C2-*C1 = 6 - C2 E q # l

y ' ( 0 ) = 0 -> 0 = Ct 2 e ® ( 0> + C2( - 4 ) e (_4)f0) = 2Ct - 4C2 = 0

Substituting the value of Ci from equation # 1 into equation # 2 results in following:

2 (6 - C2) - 4 C 2 = 0

12 — 2C2 — 4 C 2 = 0

Solving these equations results in C± = 4 and C2 = 2. Therefore, y — 4e2x + 2e~4x

1.6 f) CORRECT AN S W ER - A

This problem falls under the category of 'Differential Equations'.

2y" + 4 / + 8y = 0

Divide the given equation by 2 to convert into standard form y" + 2y ' + 4 y = 0

W e can use the m ethod of undeterm ined coefficients, as explained in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

The solution will be of the form y = Cerx with characteristic equation: r 2 + 2 r + 4 = 0

Comparing this equation with standard form r2+ar + b = 0 shows that a = 2, b = 4.

Since a2 = 4 <4b = 16, solution is underdamped.

1.6 g) CORRECT A N SW ER - 2nd order linear hom ogeneous differential equation

y " + 8 y ' + 1 2 y = 0 is an example of 2nd order linear homogeneous differential equation.

Helpful tip - Review the differences between several types of differential equations.

195
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1.7 Matrix and Vector Analysis - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 57 - 60 for reference

1.7 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'M atrices'.

According to the problem statement:

1 0 0‘ 0 0 2'
A= 0 1 0 B= 0 2 0
.0 0 1. .2 0 0.

1 + 0 0 + 0 0 + 2' 1 0 2
A+ B ~ 0+ 0 1+ 2 0+ 0 0 3 0
0 + 2 0 + 0 1 + 0. 2 0 1.

Helpful tip ~ Matrix operations (addition, subtraction, m ultiplication, inverse) using calculator can save time and
reduce chances of error. Alternatively, you may perform conversion by hand and cross-check it with calculator.

1.7 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'M atrices'.

According to the problem statement:

1 0 0
1 0
A= 0 1 0 B=
0 1
.0 0 1.
Matrix addition requires both m atrices to have sam e num ber of rows and columns. In this case, the two
matrices do not have same dim ensions. Therefore, given m atrices cannot be added.

1.7 C) CORRECT ANSWER - A

This problem falls under the category of 'M atrices'.

According to the problem statement:

2 1
A= 4
1 0
2 B=
2 1
6 3
2 x 1+ 1 x 2 2 x 0 + 1 x r ‘4 r
AxB = 4 x 1+ 2 x 2 4x 0+ 2x 1 8 2
6 x 1+ 3 x 2 6 x 0 + 3 x 1 .12 3.
1.7 d) CORRECT ANSWER -14

This problem falls under the category of 'M atrices'.

4 5
det = (4 x 6) - (2 x 5) = 14
2 6
Helpful tip - Learn how to find the determ inant of a 2 x 2 matrix using calculator.

196
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 5
14
1.7 e) CORRECT ANSWER:
I 2
7 7

M atrix inverse is calculated using follow ing equation.

. r4 5 6 —5 ■3 5 -
_ a dj(A) _ _
.......... b [_
acfy 6 -2 4 - ■6/14 —5 /1 4 7 ~14
det
r4 5 14 -2 / 1 4 4/14 _ 1 2
1-2 6 ~7 7 -

Helpful tip - Learn how to find the inverse of a 2 x 2 matrix using calculator.

1.7 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to the problem statem ent:

2 r 1 io -
A = 4 2 B = 8 i i
.6 3. .9 12 .

M atrix m ultiplication requires the num ber of colum ns in first matrix to be equal to the num ber of rows in the
second matrix. In this case, the two matrices do not meet this requirement.

1.7 g) CORRECT ANSWER: A

This problem falls under the category of 'M atrices'.

A x B is not always equal to B x A.

1.7 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 0

This problem falls under the category of 'M atrices'.

2 4 6'
det 8 10 12 = 2[(10)(5) - (3)(12)] - 4[(8)(5) - (12)(1)J + 6[(8)(3) - (10)(1)]
.1 3 5.

2 4 6'
det 8 10 12 - 2 ( 1 4 ) - 4 ( 2 8 ) + 6 (1 4 ) - 0
.1 3 5.

Helpful tip - Learn how to find the determ inant and inverse of a 3 x 3 matrix using calculator.

1.7 i) CORRECT ANSWER: 16

A = 2i + j + 3k B - i + 2j + 4k

A . B = ( 2 i + j + 3k). (i + 2} + 4k)

A B = 2.1 + 1.2 + 3.4 = 16

Helpful tip - Also learn how to calculate angle between vectors A and B using cross product. Typically, it is
easier to calculate angle using dot product.

197
Copyrighted Material © 2020
1.7 j) CORRECT ANSWER: -4 i + j + 10k

A ~ 3i + 2/ + k B - i + 4/ + Ok

i j k
A x B — ( 3 i + 2y + /c) x ( i + 4y + 0/c) — 3 2 1
1 4 0

4 x = (2 x 0 - 1 x 4 ) i - (3 x 0 - 1 x I ) ; + (3 x 4 - 2 x 1 )*

A x B — - M + 7 + lOfe

Helpful tip - Learn how to use calculator to find vector product.

1.7 k) CORRECT ANSWER - B

We can use head-tail rule to confirm that resultant vector will be Option B as shown below

Helpful tip - Review head-tail rule for vector addition and subtraction. Try to calculate X — Y.

198
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 2 - Probability and Statistics
2.1 Measures of Central Tendencies and Dispersions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 63 for reference

2.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 6

Arithm etic mean of given data set can be calculated as shown below.

_ 1 36
* = - ( 2 + 4 + 10 + 8 + 4 + 8) = — = 6
6 6

2.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 88.2°F

W eighted average of given data set can be calculated as shown below.

— _ (E wtXi) _ (0 .5 0 x 9 0 °F ) + (0.30 x 8 4 °F ) + (0.10 x 88°F ) + (0.10 x 9 2 °F )

~~ » , “ 0.50 + 0.30 + 0.10 + 0.10 “ 88 2 F

Helpful tip - Arithm etic mean X is a special case of w eighted average in which all weights are equal.

2.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER: ^20/3

Sam ple standard deviation is calculated by using the equation given below:

s=
\
n —1

_ 1
* = _ ( 2 + 4 + 6 + 8) = 5, n = 4
4

(2 - 5 )2 + (4 - 5 )2 + (6 - 5 )2 + (8 - 5 )2 (3 )2 + ( l ) 2 + ( l ) 2 + (3 )2
s= I-------------- ---- -------------------------------------= J ----------------------------------

s = 720/3

Helpful tip - It is im portant to understand the difference between 'sample' and 'population' because form ulas
are different for sample and population.

2.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 2.21

Sample geom etric mean is calculated by using the equation given below:

S — yjX\X2X 3 " X n

s = V (l)(2 )(3 )(4 )

5 = V24 = 2.21

Helpful tip - Review measure of central tendency/dispersion formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

199
Copyrighted Material © 2020
2.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 6.9

Sam ple root mean square is calculated by using the equation given below:

s = J i ( 3 2 + 5 2 + 62 + l l 2)

- ( 9 -f- 25 + 36 -f 12 1) = 6.9

2.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 3

Let us first arrange the given data set in ascending order.

2 ,3 , 7 ,1 ,4 ,9 ,0 -> 0 ,1 ,2 , 3 ,4 , 7,9

It can be observed that the median of given data set is 3 because it bisects the data set.

2.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER : 80

Let us first arrange the given data set in ascending order.

9 0 ,6 0 ,7 0 ,1 1 0 , 50 ,4 0 , 2 0 0 ,2 1 0 40, 5 0 ,6 0 ,7 0 ,9 0 ,1 1 0 ,2 0 0 ,2 1 0

/Tl\Ul
It can be observed that we have even num ber of terms {n = 8) due to which m edian will be average of ( - j and

Q + l) terms. Therefore, median — (7 0 -I- 9 0 )/ 2 = 80

2.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 3

Mode of a given data set is the value that occurs with greatest frequency. It can be observed that in the given
data set 1, 3, 3, 4, 9, 7, 3, 4, the value 3 occurs with highest frequency.

Helpful tip - There can be more than one modes in a data set. For instance, in this example if we replace 9 with
4, then it becomes a bimodal data set with two modes i.e. 3 and 4.

2.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER : 110

According to the definition given NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, sam ple range is the difference between
largest and sm allest sample value.

In our case, largest and sm allest sample values are 120 and 10 respectively. Sample range = 120 - 1 0 = 110.

2.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER - Influenced by outliers

Mean is highly influenced by outliers. Standard deviation is a measure of dispersion. Median is m arginally
influenced by outliers.

200
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 2.2 Permutation/Combination & Laws of Probability - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 64 - 65 for reference

2.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER: B

Since the order of selection is important, we need to calculate permutation P(n, r ) where n = 12, r = 5.

P (?!,?') = P (1 2 ,5 ) = 9 5 0 4 0

2.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER: C

Since the order of selection is not important, we need to calculate combination C ( n , r ) where n = 12, r = 5.

C ( n , r ) = C (1 2 ,5 ) = 792

2.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER: A

Since the order of selection is important, we need to calculate permutation P ( n , r ) where n — 12, r = n = 12.

P ( n , r ) = P ( n , r i ) = P (1 2 ,1 2 ) = 12! = 4 7 9 0 0 1 6 0 0

2.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER: D

Since the order of selection isn't important, we need to calculate combination C ( n , r ) with n — 12, r = n = 12.

C(n, r ) = C ( n ,n ) = C (1 2 ,1 2 ) = 1

2.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.5, 0.5

N(A) , N N(B)
PW = m » =

N ( A ) and N ( B ) represent the total number of possible outcom es belonging to events A and B respectively.

AJ(S) represents the total number of possible outcom es belonging to sample space S.

N (A) 5
P(4) = A K 5 )= To = 0-5

N(B) 5
p(fi)=7f(5)=To = 0-5

2.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.20

Probability of both A and B occurring sim ultaneously = P(A, B )

„ N N(Af)B)

p^ =H ( s r

N(Af\B) represents the total number of possible outcomes that are common between events A and B.

, ^ / V O ID S ) 2
p(^ e ) = H v ( s r = i o = a 2 0
201
Copyrighted Material © 2020
2.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.80

Probability that either A or B will occur alone or that both events will occur together can be calculated as:

P(A + B) = P(A) + P(B ) - P(A, B)

P(A + B) = 0.50 + 0.50 - 0.20 = 0.80

2.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.40

Probability that B occurs given that A has already occurred is given by following equation:

P{B\A ) =

2.2 i) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.40

Probability that A occurs given that B has already occurred is given by following equation:

2.2 ]) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Law of Total Probability' which is given by equation below:

P{A + B) = P(A ) + P{B) - P(A, B )

Probability of sunny weather = P ( A ) = 0.25

Probability of cloudy weather = P ( B ) = 0.35

Probability of both sunny and cloudy w eather = P(A, B ) — 0.15

Probability of sunny weather, cloudy w eather or both = P ( A 4- B ) — 0.25 -I- 0.35 —0.15 —0.45

2.2 k) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.50

This problem falls under the category of 'Law of Total Probability' which is given by equation below:

P{A + B) = P ( A ) + P ( B ) - P{A, B ) == 0.20 + 0.40 - 0.10 = 0.50

U P (A n B ) = o.i

P(A) = 0.2 P(B) = 0.4

202
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 2.3 Probability Distributions - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 65 - 67 for reference

23 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B
This problem falls under the category of 'Bayes' Theorem '.

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, Bayes' Theorem is given by equation shown below:

p(B m- p W p W Bi)

P [ A j ) is the probability of event Aj in population of A.

P { B j ) is the probability of event Bj in population of B.

Probability of an adult suffering m ajor depression at some point in life = P(D) = 8% = 0.08

Probability of an adult not suffering m ajor depression at some point in life = P(D') =1 - P(D) = 92%

Probability of a positive result given that person has depression (true positive) = P(+1D) = 90% = 0.90

Probability of a positive result given that person doesn't have depression (false positive) = P(+1D') = 10% = 0.1

Probability of having depression given positive result = P(D j+) = ?

P(D)P(+\D)
P{D\+) —
P ( + \ D ) P ( D ) + P ( + \ D f) P ( D ' )

, , ^ (0 .0 8 )(0 .9 0 )
p (D | + ) = ( a 0i K a-30) - ( 0 .9 2 ) ( 0. : 0) = 4 3 '9 % s 4 4 %

2.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.24

Probability of a custom er preferring online shopping = P(Online) = 0.20

Probability of a custom er preferring in-store shopping = P(Store) = 0.80

Probability of a custom er under 30 years of age given he/she prefers online shopping = P(301 Online) = 0.50

Probability of a custom er under 30 years of age given he/she prefers in-store shopping = P(30|Store) = 0.40

Probability of a custom er preferring online shopping given that custom er is less than 30 years old = ?

P (On li ne) P(30\0nli ne)

P (O n li n e |30) =
P( 30\Oni ine) P( Onl ine ) + P ( 3 0 \ S t o r e ) P ( S t o r e )

, N (0 .2 0 )(0 .5 0 )
P ( On li ne 3 0 ) = = 0.238 ^ 0.24
(0 .5 0 ) (0 .2 0 ) + (0 .4 0 ) (0 .8 0 )

203
Copyrighted Material © 2020
2.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.228

This problem falls under the category of 'Binomial Distribution' which is given by equation below:

Pn( x ) = C ( n , x ) p x q n~x

n — # of on-cam pus interviews.

x = # of hiring,

q - Failure/rejection probability.

p = Success/hiring probability.

According to the given scenario:

n = 30 x ~ 2 p = 0.10 q = 0.90

P30( 2) = C ( 30, 2 )0 .1 20.930^2 = 0.228 = 2 2 .8 %

Therefore, the engineering firm has 22.8% chance of hiring 2 new graduates after 30 interviews.

Helpful tip - Binomial distribution involves binary outcom es such as yes/no, pass/fail, head/tail etc. To gain
better understanding, it is recommended to review Binomial distribution exam ples and practice problems.

2.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.51

This problem falls under the category of 'Binom ial Distribution' which is given by equation below:

Pni x ) = C ( n , x ) p x q n~x

n — # of grand slam tournam ents.

x ~ # of tournam ent successes.

q = Failure probability.

p = Success probability.

According to the given scenario:

n = 4 x — 2, 3,4 p — 0.40 q = 0.60

P4( 2) = C (4 , 2 )0 .4 20.64" 2 = 0.34 = 3 4 %

P4(3 ) = C ( 4 ,3 ) 0 .4 30.64-3 = 0.15 = 1 5 %

P4( 4) = C ( 4 ,4 ) 0 .4 40.64" 4 = 0.025 = 2 .5 %

PT = P4{ 2) + P4( 3 ) + P4(4 ) = 0.34 + 0.15 + 0.025 = 0.51

Therefore, tennis player has 51% chance of winning 2 to 4 grand slam tournam ents out of 4.

204
Copyrighted Material © 2020
2.3 e) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : 0.0228

This problem falls under the category of 'Gaussian distribution'.

According to the problem statement x — 700, }.i = 740, a — 20.

Since, [i ^ 0 & a ^ 1 this distribution should be standardized as shown below:

x- \x 700 - 740
Z = ----- - = ----- --------= - 2
o 20

Note that, Z < —2 is the same as Z > 2.

According to the unit normal distribution table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:
P(Z > 2) = R( 2) - 0.0228

Helpful tip - Learn how to use normal distribution table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

2.3 f) C O R R EC T A N SW E R : 0.1359

According to the problem statement x1 = 12 x2 — 14 n = 10, a ~ 2.

Since, |i ^ 0 & a ^ 1 this distribution should be standardized as shown below:

12-10 2
z = ---- ----- = - = 1
1 2 2

14-10 4
Z2 ------ ----- — — 2.
2 2 2

zx < Z < z2

P{Zt < Z < Z 2) = F(2) - F ( 1) = 0.9772 - 0.8413 = 0.1359

2.3 g) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : 0.0013

According to the problem statement x = 2 , (.i = 8, a —2.

Since, (i ^ 0 & a ^ 1 this distribution needs to be standardized as shown below:

2 -8 -6
Z - 2 - — - ~3

Using the unit normal distributiontable, weare interestedin finding P (—oo < Z < —3).

Although such probabilitydoes not existin the table, itis equal to P (3 < Z < oo)because of symmetry.

P(3 < Z < co) = R{ 3) = 0.0013 = 0.13%

205
Copyrighted Material © 2020
2.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.1587

According to the problem statement x — 10, |t = 8, o — 2.

Since, |i ^ 0 & o =£ 1 this distribution needs to be standardized as shown below:

Using the unit normal distribution table, we are interested in finding P( 1 < Z < oo).

P(1 < 2 < oo) = /?(1) = 0.1587 = 15.87%

2.3 i) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.1359

According to the problem statement x1 = 4, x2 ~ 6, \x = 8, a = 2.

Since, |i ^ 0 & o ^ 1 this distribution needs to be standardized as shown below:

4 -8 4 6 -8 2

Using the unit normal distribution table, we are interested in finding P ( ~ 2 < Z < —1).

Although such probability does not exist in the table, it is equal to P( 1 < Z < 2) because of symmetry.

P(1 < Z < 2) = fl( l) - R{2) = 0.1587 - 0.0228 = 0.1359 = 13.59%

206
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 2.4 Expected values - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 65 - 66 for reference

2.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 3.18

This problem falls under the category of 'Expected Values'.

According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

n

E[X] = ^ xkf ( x k) = x1f (xa) + x2f { x2) + x3f ( x 3)

k =1

E[X] = (2) (i) ( 3 x 2 + 2) + (3) ( £ ) ( 3 x 3 + 2) + (4) (i) ( 3 x 4 + 2) = 3.18

Helpful tip - Review probability density function, cum ulative distribution function and expected values formulas
given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

2.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.63

This problem falls under the category of 'Expected Values'.

According to the form ula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

a2 = V[X] - - v ) 2f ( x k) - (*! - ju)2/ ^ ) + (x2 - fi)2f ( x 2) + (x3 - fj)2/(x3)

fi = E[X] = 3.18

a 2 = V[X] = ^ [(2 - 3.18)2(3 x 2 + 2) + (3 - 3.18)2(3 x 3 + 2) + (4 - 3.18)2(3 x 4 + 2)] = 0.63

2.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 5. 5%

This problem falls under the category of 'Expected Values',

Let X be the 'expected perform ance of fund'. According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

E[X] = = ( —5%)(0.10) + (0) (0.20) + (5%)(0.30) + (10%)(0.30) + (15%)(0.10) = 5.5%

2.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 5 / 6

This problem falls under the category of 'Expected Values'.

According to the form ula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

E[X] - L°L* /(* )d x = “ l)dx

E[X] = j (4x2 - x)dx = ^ 4 x 3 ~ ^ x 2\l = ^ .83

Therefore, expected amount of study time spent by student in doing assignment is 0.83 or 83%.

207
Copyrighted Material © 2020
2.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 2

This problem falls under the category of 'Expected Values'.

According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

E[X] = $™wxf{x)dx = x(2x 3 )dx

E[X] = —2x~1]™

2
E[X]
OO H)
E[X] = [0 —(—2)]

E[X] = 2

Therefore, expected number of traffic violations per driver are 2.

2.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 1

The total area under probability density function and probability mass function is always equal to 1.

208
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 3 - Ethics and Professional Practice
3.1 Codes of Ethics & NCEES® Model Law and Rules - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 4 -11 for reference

3.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Code of Ethics'.

According to the rule A3 of Model Rules Section 240.15, Rule of Professional Conduct:

"Licensees shall notify their employer or client and such other authority as may be appropriate when their

professional judgment is overruled under circumstances in which the health, safety, or welfare of the public is

endangered."

Therefore, junior engineer shall escalate his concerns to a higher level.

3.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Code of Ethics'.

According to the rule B1 of Model Rules Section 240.15, Rule of Professional Conduct:

"Licensees shall undertake assignments only when qualified by education or experience in the specific

technical fields of engineering or surveying involved."

John should review assignment requirements and his skills with the new supervisor and then decide accordingly.

3.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Code of Ethics'.

According to the rule B2 of Model Rules Section 240.15, Rule of Professional Conduct:

"Licensees shall not affix their signatures or seals to any plans or documents dealing with subject matter in

which they lack competence, nor to any such plan or document not prepared under their responsible charge."

Therefore, Sarah should not sign and seal these documents because they were not prepared under her
responsible charge and she may not have sufficient time to review them.

3.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to rule A4 of Model Rules Section 240.15, Rule of Professional Conduct:

"Licensees shall, to the best of their knowledge, include all relevant and pertinent information in an objective
and truthful manner within all professional documents, statements, and testimony."

Therefore, professional engineer should include all relevant details in his recommendation and act in the client's
best interest.
209
Copyrighted Material © 2020
3.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER *C

This problem falls under the category of 'Code of Ethics'.

According to the rule B9 of Model Rules Section 240.15, Rule of Professional Conduct:

"Licensees shall not use confidential information received in the course of their assignments as a means

of making personal profit without the consent of the party from whom the information was obtained."

Therefore, Mark should first obtain consent from client prior to using their unique design on other projects.

3.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C3

This problem falls under the category of 'Code of Ethics'.

Obligation to respect fellow licensees is discussed in rule C3 of Model Rules Section 240.15, Rule of Professional
Conduct.

3.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Code of Ethics'.

Engineers both licensed and non-licensed are expected to conduct themselves professionally.

Ethical problems are not always straight forward.

Engineers possess special knowledge which is not common in public domain like other professions.

It is the responsibility of engineers to educate themselves about ethical practices.

3.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - A, D

According to the Model Law, Section 110.20 'Definitions' only Professional Engineer and Professional Engineer,
Retired are duly licensed by the board as professional engineers. Engineers and engineering interns cannot use
the title of Professional Engineer until they are duly licensed by the board.

3.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the Model Law, Section 130.10 'General Requirements for Licensure' 2(3)(b), an applicant with a
PhD. in engineering acceptable to the board and who has passed the FE exam requires 2 years of
progressive engineering experience to meet experience requirements for PE licensure

3.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to the Model Law, Sections 150.10,150.30 and 160.70, boards can take disciplinary actions on
valid grounds against licensed engineers/interns, unlicensed individuals and firms holding certificates
of authorization.

210
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 3.2 Intellectual Property - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 11 -12 for reference

3.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

This problem falls under the category of 'Intellectual Property'.

According to the definitions of trademark, patent, copyright, and industrial design provided in NCEES® FE
Reference Handbook, trademark is the most applicable product for advertising agency under the given scenario.

3.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Intellectual Property'.

According to the definitions of trademark, patent, copyright, and industrial design provided in NCEES® FE
Reference Handbook, patent is the most applicable product for this manufacturer under given scenario.

3.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

This problem falls under the category of 'Intellectual Property'.

According to the definitions of trademark, patent, copyright, and industrial design provided in NCEES® FE
Reference Handbook, copyright is the most applicable product for the publisher under given scenario.

3.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

This problem falls under the category of 'Intellectual Property'.

According to the definitions of trademark, patent, copyright, and industrial design provided in NCEES® FE
Reference Handbook, industrial design is the most applicable product for packaging firm under given scenario.

3.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - 1-F, 2-A, 3-B

Trademark - ™

Copyright - ©
®
Registered Trademark-

3.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

This problem falls under the category of 'Intellectual Property'.

Stocks, bonds, and real estate are examples of tangible assets whereas software program is an example of
intellectual property.

211
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 3.3 Safety - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 13 - 33 for reference

3.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

N atio n al E le ctrica l Co de N EC® is d e v e lo p e d by the N a tio n al Fire P ro te ctio n A sso cia tio n N FPA ® and it is
a d o p te d a cro ss th e U.S. as a b e n ch m a rk fo r safe e le ctrica l d e sig n , in stallatio n , and in sp e ctio n .

3.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

N FPA ® 70E is the 'Sta n d a rd fo r E le ctrical S a fe ty in th e W o rk p la c e '. It a d d re sse s e le ctrica l sa fe ty -re la te d

w o rk p ractice s, sa fe ty -re la te d m a in te n a n ce re q u ire m e n ts and p ro ce d u re s.

3.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the risk equation provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook: Risk = Hazard x Probability.
Therefore, a scenario involving high degree of hazard and probability presents the highest risk.

3.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Reduction in the magnitude of transient overvoltage by m eans of grounding m itigates insulation dam age which
improves overall equipment reliability.

Grounding provides a path of low resistance to current which reduces the probability of current passing through
an individual's body if an accidental contact is made by the individual with live equipment.

Protective devices (circuit breakers, fuses) can operate faster on a grounded system as compared to an
ungrounded system which allows them to clear the fault and isolate faulty equipm ent quickly.

3.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 17mA - 99mA

C u rre n t as low as 1 7 m A - 9 9 m A can cau se d e ath d u e to e xtre m e pain, re sp ira to ry a rre st, se vere
m u scu la r co n tra ctio n s, and in a b ility o f th e v ictim to b re a k e le ctrica l co ntact.

3.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 4

N FPA 7 0 E® 'Sta n d a rd fo r E le ctrica l S a fe ty in th e W o rk p la c e ' 20 1 8 T a b le 1 3 0 .7 (C )(1 5 }(c) d ivid e s arc flash

PPE into 4 ca te g o rie s b ased on arc flash in cid e n t e n e rg y levels as sh ow n b elow :

C a te g o ry 1 = A rc -ra te d clo th in g , m in im u m arc ra tin g o f 4 c a l/ c m 2.

C a te g o ry 2 = A rc -ra te d clo th in g, m in im u m arc ra tin g o f 8 c a l/c m 2.

C a te g o ry 3 = A rc -ra te d clo th in g , m in im u m a rc ra tin g o f 25 c a l/ c m 2.

C a te g o ry 4 = A rc-ra te d clo th in g , m in im u m arc ratin g o f 4 0 c a l/ c m 2.

3.3 g) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - D

SDS must contain 16 sections in a set order as noted in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

212
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 4 - Engineering Economics
4.1 Time value of money - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 230 for reference

4.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER: $241,157

i % = 1 2 % P = $25,000, n = 20 years F =?

F = $2 5,0 00 x ( ~ , 1 2 % , 2 0 years'j = $2 5,0 00 x 9.6 463 = $241,157

Therefore, the future worth of given investm ent will be $241,157.

4.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER : $231,225

i % = 4 % F = $750,000, n — 30 years P =?

P = $7 50 ,0 0 0 x 4 % , 30 y e a r s )

P = $ 7 5 0 ,0 0 0 x 0.3083 = $2 31,225

Therefore, the present worth of retirem ent fund is $231,225.

4.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Uniform Series Compound Am ount factor converts an annuity to a future amount.

4.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Capital recovery factor converts a present value to an annuity.

4.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER: $17,440

i % = 6% P - $ 2 00,000 ?i — 20 years A —1

A = $ 2 00,000 x ^ , 6 % , 20 y e a r s )

A = $ 2 0 0 ,0 0 0 x 0.0 872 = $17,440

Therefore, expected yearly paym ent of given annuity is $17,440.

4.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER: $392,724

i % = 8% A = $40,000 n = 20 years P =1

P = $4 0 ,0 0 0 x 9.8181 = $ 3 9 2 ,7 2 4

Therefore, Am anda needs to have $3 92 ,7 2 4 saved today to purchase annuity described in the problem .

213
Copyrighted Material © 2020
4.1 g) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : $1,699 ,248

i % = 8% A = $15,000 n = 30 years F =?

F — $15,000 x , 8% , 30 years^j

F = $1 5,0 00 x 113.282 = $1,699,248

Therefore, the expected future worth of this investm ent is $1,699,248.

4.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 10.47%

r — 10 % m = 12 ie - ?

Therefore, the annual effective interest rate is 1 0 .4 7 % .

4.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER: $251,416

Cash flow presented in this problem can be expressed as the sum of uniform series present worth and uniform
gradient present worth shown below:

P = $4 0,0 00 x 2% , 6^ + $2000 x ( ^ , 2% , 6 ^

P = $4 0,0 00 x 5.6 014 + $2 000 x (1 3 .6 8 0 1 )

P = $2 51,416

4.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER: $4878

Cash flow presented in this problem can be expressed as the sum of uniform series present worth and uniform
gradient present worth as follows:

P = $600 x ( “ , 8% , 6^ + $200 x 8% , 6 ^

P = $600 x 4.6 2 2 9 + $200 x 10.5233

P = $4 878

214
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 4.2 Cost estimation - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 231 - 232 for reference

4.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Note that we are given inflation rate {/) in the problem statem ent hence it also needs to be taken into
consideration. Inflation adjusted interest rate per interest period ( d ) can be calculated as shown below.

d = i + / + i x / = 6 % + 4 % + ( 6% x 4 % ) = 1 0 .2 4 %

4.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - Straight line

Straight line depreciation method results in same value decline each year.

4.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER: $250,000

This problem falls under the category of capitalized costs.

Capitalized costs can be calculated using the form ula given below.

A $20,000 A
Capitalized Cost = P ~ ~ ~ — — — = $2 50,000
i 0.08

4.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER: $4,000

This problem falls under the category of depreciation analysis using straight line method.

We can calculate accum ulated depreciation using the form ula shown below.

C -S n
Dj = -------^
J n

$32,000 - $ 2 ,0 0 0
Dj = ------------ --- ------------ --- $1,000

Accum ulated depreciation in year 4 = 4 x $1,000 = $4,000

4.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER: $2,968

This problem falls under the category of depreciation analysis using MACRS.

As per problem details, we need to use 10-year recovery period and following formula.

Dj = (factor)C

Accum ulated depreciation in year 3 = £ ( / a c t o r ) C

Accum ulated depreciation in year 3 = 1 0 % x $7 ,00 0 -I-1 8 % x $7,000 -I-1 4 .4 % x $7,000

Therefore, accum ulated depreciation in year 3 — $ 2 9 6 8

Helpful tip - Salvage value is not relevant in MACRS depreciation.

215
Copyrighted Material © 2020
4.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER: $26,000

This problem falls under the category of depreciation analysis using MACRS.

As per problem details, we need to use 5-year recovery period with following formula:

Dj = ( f actor) C

Accum ulated depreciation in year 2 = ^ { f a c t o i ^ C

Accum ulated depreciation in year 2 = 2 0 % x $50,000 + 3 2 % x $50,000

Accum ulated depreciation in year 2 = $26,000

4.2 g) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : $24,000

This problem fails under the category of depreciation analysis using MACRS.

Book value ( BV ) of the truck in year 2 can be calculated using follow ing formula:

BV = C Dj

BV = $5 0,0 00 - $26,000 = $24,000

4.2 h) SOLUTION

According to MACRS factors for recovery period of 5 years given in NCEES FE Reference Handbook, MACRS
depreciation schedule can be developed as shown below.

Year Current Depreciation Accumulated Depreciation Book Value

0 $50,000
1 $50,000 x 20% = $10000 $10,000 $50,000 - $10,000 = $40,000
2 $50,000 x 32% = $16000 $26,000 $50,000 - $26,000 = $24,000
3 $50,000 x 19.2% = $9600 $35,600 $50,000 - $35,600 = $14,400
4 $50,000 x 11.52% = $5760 $41,360 $50,000 - $41,360 = $8640
5 $50,000 x 11.52% = $5760 $47,120 $50,000-$47,120 = $2880
6 $50,000 x 5.76% = $2880 $50,000 $50,000 - $50,000 = $0

216
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 4.3 Risk Identification and Analysis - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 231 - 232 for reference

4.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 20,000

This problem falls under the category of break-even analysis.

Cost structure of production line A = $ 1 0 0 ,0 0 0 + $ 5 x

Cost structure of production line B = $ 1 0 x

At break-even production point, the cost structure of both production lines will be same.

$100,000 + 5x = $10x -> Solving for x results in 20,000 items.

4.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B, C

This problem falls under the category of break-even analysis.

At x — 20 ,0 0 0 both lines are equally econom ical.

F o r x > 20 ,00 0, production line A is more econom ical because it has low er variable cost.

For x < 20 ,00 0, production line B is more econom ical because it has no fixed cost.

4.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 2000

This problem falls under the category of break-even analysis.

Cost price of a chair = $50,000 + $ 2 x

Selling price of a chair = $27*

At break-even production point, chair sales will cover cost of production.

$50,000 + 2x = $27x

Solving for x results in 2000. Therefore, at least 2000 chairs need to be sold before any profit is made.

4.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - Contractor A

This problem falls under the category of 'Benefit-Cost Analysis'.

We can com pare given options by looking at the present worth of their costs. The one with lower cost is better.

Pcontractor = $ 20,000 + $40,000 x ( ^ , 8% , 6^ = $ 20,000 + $40,000 x 0.6 302 = $45,208

^Contractor b = $1 0,0 00 x 8% , 6 ^ = $1 0,0 0 0 x 4.6 2 2 9 = $46,229

Therefore, contractor A is offering a better price.

217
Copyrighted Material © 2020
4.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - Investment Option C

This problem falls under the category of 'Benefit-Cost Analysis'.

We can compare given options by looking at their future worth.

Option resulting in highest future worth should be recommended.

O p tion A = $200,000

F
$100,000 x -,1 0 % , 10i) = $100,000 x 2.5937 = $259,370

It can be observed that Option C offers the best return on investment.

4.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - Project B

Project resulting in the highest expected value (EV) will be the best choice.

EV,Project a = 0-60 x 20% + 0.40 x 10% = 16%

project b = 0-20 x 10% + 0.70 x 20% -I- 0.10 x 5% = 16.5%

^project c = 0-30 x 25% + 0.60 x 10% + 0.10 x (-1 0 % ) = 12.5%

It can be observed that Project B results in the highest expected value.

218
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 5 - Properties of Electrical Materials
5.1 Electrical Properties - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 95, 355 - 357 for reference

5.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Resistivity is related to resistance, area, and length through following equation:

RA _ (2 m m \ 2 , ,
p= — A — nr = n ^—-—J = 3.141 x 10 m2 I = 100?n R —5ft.

RA (5H)(3.141 x 10“6m2)
p = — = -— ------------------ = 1.57 x 10_7a?n
I 100m
5.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Resistivity can be calculated using the equation p = RA/l

According to problem statement, pA —ApB. It implies that = 4 ^1 ^.

m h

ic 1
If lA =__ lB andAB = ~AA a then
/ _
1a 1 ______ A a A
4.1
—— =_ 4
rA R (. )/4 _
— -------=
b BAA
——
a a r
_

4 lA lA lA

Therefore, RA= RB if cable lengthsare equal and area of cable 'B' is one-fourth of cable 'A'.

5.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is given by equation C — £ A/d.

It can be observed that: Decreasing d st', increases C whereas increasing e increases C

Therefore, decreasing the distance between plates and increasing dielectric strength will increase capacitance.

5.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

By referring to 'Properties of Materials' table given in Materials Science/Structure of Matter section of NCEES®
Reference Handbook, it can be observed that low electrical resistivity typically corresponds to high heat
conductivity.

5.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 0. 015 H f m

Magnetic permeability can be calculated using following equation.

B I 2nrB
H = — = ------- > \i = — -—
[i 2 nr I

According to the problem statement, I — 1004 B = 0.57’ r = 50cm

2nrB 27r(50cm)(0.5T)
[i = -------= — ------ ----------- - = 0.015 Hfm
h / 1004 1

219
Copyrighted Material © 2020
5.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Photoelectric effect can take place in all forms of matter. This phenomenon results in emission of electrons from
material's surface when it is exposed to electromagnetic radiation (light).

5.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

d ( i) - d q ( t ) / d ( t ) -> d q ( t ) = i ( t ) x d ( t ) = 1mA x 5s — 5 mC

Electron charge = 1.6022 x 1 0 -1 9 C

Num ber of electrons = 5 m C / l.6022 x 1 0 “ 19C = 3.12 x 1 0 16

5.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Energy stored in a capacitor is given by the equation C V2/2

eA (8.85 x 1 0 ~ 12F / ? ? i) ( lm 2)
C = — = ---------------- ------------------------ = 8.85 x 10 F
d 0.1 m

C V2 (8.85 x 10-1 1 F ) ( 2 0 0 K ) 2
— ------------------ 2----------------= 177 X 10 J

5.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor can be calculated using following formula.

eA (8.85 x 10 ~12 F m _1) (0 .0 2 m 2)

C = Td = ---------------- 0.01
~ = 177
m x 10 F

V T4U0U0L[iC
IL . .
vc = ~ = T - r z -----r ~ T 7“ r = 2 2 .6 1 0 6 V
C 1.77 x lO " 11 F

5.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The current-voltage relationship of a capacitor is given by following equation.

1
vc(0 = vc(0) + - J ic(r)dr

r i/ i W O xt . (101/ —5 1 0 (1 0 0 X 1 0 ~ 6F )
101/ - SV + — —----- T ^ - r - -> i c (1 8 0 s ) - ---------------------------------------------
100 x 1 0 ~ 6F c 180s

ic(3min) = 2.7 \iA

5.1 k) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Energy stored in a capacitor is given by the equation ^ C v 2( t ) .

1 1
— C v 2( t ) = 2 ^200 x 1 0 “ 6 F )( 2 4 0 s m 3 7 7 t V ) 2

1
~ C v 2( t ) = 5 .7 6 s in 2 3 7 7t J

220
Copyrighted Material © 2020
5.11) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The current-voltage relationship of a capacitor is given by following equation.

1 1 rf
vc(t) = vc(0) + - ic(r) dr -> vc(t ) - i?c(0) = - ic{r)dT
L J0 t J0

1
101/ = ---------i(5s)(5s) -> i(5s) = 0.2?ni4
100/iF

5.1 m) C O R R EC T A N S W E R : 0. 5 \iF

1\iF branch capacitors are in parallel. They will result in l^iF + lyiF — 2\iF.

lj.tF, 2\iF, 2\xF will be in series with each other.

C,eqv

Helpful tip - Capacitors add differently in series and parallel when compared to resistors and inductors.

5.1 n) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - A

Inductance can be calculated using following formula.

N 2[iA
L=
I

1002 x An x 10 7Hm 1 x 0.1m2

L = --------------------------------------------= 1.25 mH
lm

5.1 o) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - B

Voltage-current relationship of an inductor is given by 'Faraday's Law' as shown below.

di
V —I —
dt

100mA
V - SmH x --------- = 0.2SV
2 ms

5.1 p) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - D

Energy stored in an inductor can be calculated using the formula given below.

Li2/2 where L —inductance and i —current passing through inductor.

According to the problem statement, i(t) — t 2 -> i ( 10) = 102 = 100 A,L = 100 mH

Li2 100 x 10~3H x (lOO^l)2

— -------- -------- — - 500/

221
Copyrighted Material © 2020
5.1 q) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - B

Energy stored in an inductor can be calculated as using following equation:

Energy storage capacity of an inductor = Li 2/2

Inductance I = N2[iA/l

Therefore, energy storage capacity = (N 2 [iAi2)/2l

It can be observed that, energy storage capacity of an inductor can be increased by:

• Increasing the number of turns 'N' in an inductor.

• Increasing the cross-sectional area 'A' of inductor.
• Increasing the current passing through inductor Y .
• Decreasing the length of inductor T .

5.1 r) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : 4H

The equivalent inductance of 2H branch inductors can be calculated as follows:

L2H = (2H + 2H)\\(2H + 2H)

L zw = ( 4 / / ) | | ( 4 / / )

L2H = 2H
It can be observed that the 1H inductors are in series with the equivalent inductance calculated above.

L e, = l / / + L 2H + 1 / /

Leq = 1H + 2H + 1H = 4- H

Helpful tip - Addition of inductance in series and parallel is like addition of resistance in series and parallel.

1H

222
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 5.2 Thermal Properties - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 104 -105 for reference

5.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Bimetallic strips are fabricated using metals with different coefficients of thermal expansion.

5.2 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

Thermalexpansion coefficient can be calculatedusing followingequation.

£ 3 x l 0 -3
a —-~z = — — — = 4.28 x 10“4 K- 1
AT 7K

Tinitial = 296 K,a = 4.28 x 10"4 K~\ £req = 3 x 10"3

zrpa 6 x l0 ~ 3
AT = = -------------------------- = 14 K
a 4.28 x lO ”4 K- 1
Treq = Tinitial + AT = 296 K + 14 K = 310 K

5.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Thermal expansion coefficient is given by following equation:

“ t = axAT = C1-2 x 10“5 0c_1) x (25 ° c) = 30 x io -

5.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.04 1

Resistance is related to temperature coefficient through following formula:

R = R0 [ 1 + a(T - T0) ]

According to the problem details:

2R0 = R0 [ 1 + a(25) ] a = ^ = 0.04 K~1

5.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

RA
P=— p = p0[ l + a(T - T0)]

Therefore, resistivity depends on resistance, area, length, and the temperature of given material.

5.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Heat capacity is directly proportional to the amount of material. Sample # 3 will have the highest heat capacity
because it contains the largest amount of substance being tested. Sample # 1 has the least amount of substance
therefore it will have the lowest heat capacity. Specific heat capacity of all three samples will be equal.

223
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 6 - Circuit Analysis
6.1 Kirchhoff s Laws - KCL, KVL - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 357 for reference

6.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Let us denote the voltage across lQktl resistor as V10kn {shown as V in the circuit).
KCL can be written at V10k^ as follows:

Viokfi 0 V10kfi 0 Vloi<0 0

+ -----— — + — r - r r — + 10mA = 0
io i<n 4 ka ' 3 fcfl 4kQ

Viokn
3kQ 10mA
<D
= - 1 0 m A -> V10kn = —14.631/
14630

6.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Let us denote the voltage across 2 kO resistor as V2kfi (shown as V in the circuit).
KCL can be written at V2ka as follows:

I' v2kft - 0
10m A = V + 3 + - ^ -

,, V2kn - 0 IV3
2 kn
. n A v2kn v2kn v2kn
V2kn = 12V
1 = 2k a 6 kO 6kO

!, _ V 2kn _ 1 2 V _
2k n 2k O n

6.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

4 fl
l 3Sl 1.25A = 0.6 25A
3 0 "I- 2 H||2 n -I- 4 0

V3fi = I3n X 3H = 0 .6 25A x 3 O = 1.875 V

224
Copyrighted Material © 2020
6.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D 200

We can use the principle of super-position to solve this circuit.

Let us first consider the 10A current source only.

Using the current divider rule:

rt ion
10A = 3.33A
1x1 “ r x -f- r t 11 ~ 2 oa + ion

Let us now consider the 50V voltage source only.

KVL can be written as follows:

-5 0 V = 30ft x \x2
50V
Ix2 = —1.66A

Ix = Ixi + 1x2 = 1-66A = 1.7A

6.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The given circuit can be solved using current divider rule as shown below:

Ry
Iy - I-
R x "I- R t

IT — 5 mA , Rx = 6 kfl (since 1 k£l and 5 fcfl are in series), Rr = 10 k il

io kn
likn 5 mA
6 kfi + 10 kn
l lkn = 3.125 mA

6.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER: 875 nA

We can solve this circuit using KCL.

Let us denote the voltage across 5 kfi resistor as V5kn (shown as V in the circuit diagram).

10 - V5kn 5 V5kn __________

V5kn - 0 mn V 2k<>

10 kO 2 kH ” 5kH
—— w v

Multiply the above equation with 10kQ. for simplification.

10V 5kQ 5V
t
10 - V5Ua + 5 (5 - V5kfi) = 2V5kn - V5kn = 4.3751/

_ Vskn _ 4.375 V
5kn 5 kO 5kH

hkn — 875 \iA

225
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 6.2 Series/Parallel Equivalent Circuits - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 357 for reference
10kft
6.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D
-V\/\— r
Rab = 5/eft||(10/eft + 2/eft||l ka)

2fcft||lfcft = 0.66 /eft 5kn (1.66kfl

10 Arn + 2 /cfi||l /cn = 10.66 ka

Rab = 5 ka\|10.66 ka = 3.4 ka

Therefore, RAB = 3.4 ka . 10.66kfl

6.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A 10KU

-w v
Rab = 5/eft||10A:ft||(2 /eft + 4/eftj|8/eft) 2kn 8M1
A “A AA r -i— W v — t-
4/eft||8/eft = 2.66 ka 1 vW — •
SMI
4kf!
2/e ft + 4 A:ft| |8 /eft = 2 /eft + 2.66 ka = 4.66 /eft B
10k(l
10 ka\\(2 /eft + 4 /eft||8 /eft) = 10 /eft||4.66 ka = 3.178 /eft -A/VV
2kfl
5 fcft| J10 fcft||(2 /eft + 4 /eft||8 ka) = 5 kfti|3.178 /eft s 2 /eft A -W v-
5kn J.PHkfl
Therefore, = 2 /eft.

6.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER *B ikn

A —V W
Rab = 1 /eft+ 4/eft||(5 A:ft + 2/eft|jl0/eft)

2 /eft 1110 /eft = 1.66 ka

5 ka + 2 /eft||10 /eft = 5 /eft 4-1.66 /eft = 6.66 /eft

4 /eft||(5 /eft + 2 /eft||10 /eft) = 4 A:ft||6.66 /eft = 2 .5 0 /eft

1kfi 5kfl
1/eft + 4/eft||(5/eft + 2/eftj|10/eft) = 1/eft + 2.5/eft = 3.50/eft —
a
AAAn
Therefore, = 3.50 /eft.

4kn 1.66Ml

226
Copyrighted Material © 2020
6.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Rab = lWl||(5fen||(2 ka + 4 fen) + 2 fen)

2 fen + 4 fen = 6 fen

6fen||5fen = 2.72 AriT.

5 /cHII(2 Ml + 4 fen) + 2 fen = 2.72kfl -I- 2/d) = 4.

= 1 fen||4.727 fen = 0.825 ka

Therefore, RAB = 0.825 fen.

6.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 6 ka 1kSi

A

Given circuit can be simplified as shown on the right.

2kQ 5k£2 lOhJl
r ab = i kn + [2 fen + (5 ka\\ska)]\\ioka + 2 ka -v w —
5k «
2fen + (5 fen||5fen) = 4.5 fen J
2ka
[2 fen + (5 W ill5 fen)]||10 fen = 4.5 fen||10 ka = 3.1 fen B

i fen + [2 fen + (5 win 5 fen)] 1110 fen + 2 fen = 3.1 fen + 1 fen + 2 fen = 6.1 fen
Therefore, RAB = 6 fen.

227
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 6.3 Thevenin & Norton Theorem - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 357 - 358 for reference

6.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Voc is the voltage drop between terminals 'a' and V as indicated in the problem description.
According to current divider rule, 5 mA current will be divided equally in each branch i.e. 2.5 mA

Voc = 2 fen x 2.5 mA = 5 V 2k£i 2ka

f— W v — w v ■Oa
6.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 1. 5 fcO

R th is calculated by looking into the terminals 'a' and 'b'.

2kn 2ka Rm
Current source is open-circuited as shown.

R th = 2 fen||(2 fen + 2 fen + 2 fen) - 1.5 fell -0 b

O a
6.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - A

RTh is calculated by looking into terminals 'a' and 'b\

Voltage sources need to be short-circuited.

r th = io fen||2 fen||5fen = 1.25 fen

6.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 7.5mA

Apply Norton Theorem by shorting RL with a wire to calculate Isc

KCL can be written at Vx as follows:

10V ~ V X - Vx y*
Vy = s v
2 fen 2 fen ifen
10 v iov-vx 10 V 1 0V- 5V
lsc = —
2 fen + 2 fen 2 fen + 2 fen
/5C = 7.5 mA
6.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 1 ktt
eq
R eq is calculated by looking into the circuit through RL.
If
Voltage source needs to be short-circuited as shown. AAAr ■AAAr
2kQ 2kQ
Req = (2 fen|jifen + 2fen)||2fen 1kfl 2kn
R eq = i.i42 fen ^ 1 fen

228
Copyrighted Material © 2020
6.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 2A

Short circuit the terminals a-b as shown in the circuit diagram.

It can be observed that Isc = lym .

Moreover, 12ft and 4ft resistors are in parallel arrangement 120f |4H.

Isc can be calculated using the current divider formula as shown below:

4n
I cr
12/2 + 4/2
8A 8A

Isc = 2A

6.3 g) C O R R EC T A N S W E R : 1 6 11

R eq is calculated by open-circuiting the current source and looking into a-b.

It can be observed that the equivalent resistance is simply series arrangement of 12ft and 412 resistors.

R eq — 12 ft + 4 ft
a
R eq = 16 ft

6.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 32 V

Using source transformation, Thevenin equivalent voltage can be calculated as shown below:

Vth = h e x R eq

Since lsc = 2A and R eq — 32V, we can substitute these values to calculate Thevenin equivalent voltage.

Vth = 2A x 16ft = 32V

229
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 6.4 Waveform Analysis - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 359 - 360 for reference

6.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

For a full wave rectified sinusoidal signal, maximum and effective values are related as shown below.

^eff = X max — V2 X %eff

Vmax = V2 X Veff = V 2 X 10 V = 14.14 V

6.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

V1 4- V2 = 10 cos(500t) + 15 cos(100t + 45°)

cos(or 4- /?) —cos (a) cos (/?) —sin(a:) sin (/?)

+ V2 ~ 10 cos (500t) -I- 15[cos (lOOt) cos (45) —sin (lOOt) sin(45)]
1
cos(45°) = sin(45°) = —
v2
15cos(100t) 15 sin (lOOt)
Vi 4- V2 = 10 cos (500t) 4--------- p -------------------~=----- -
v2 V2

V1 + V2 = 10 cos(500t) + 10.6cos(100t) - 10.6 sin (lOOt)

6.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

By comparing 100 cos(500t -I- 50°) with standard phasor representation A cos(o)t 4- #) we can observe that:

500
o> = 2tt/ = 500 -> / = — = 79.5 Hz
2n

6.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

For a half wave rectified sinusoidal signal, average value is given by following equation:

Xav. = ^ nr = vrt = 4'77

6.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 1A

Average value of the given periodic signal can be calculated as follows:

^ave

lave —T ( I ^ dt 4* J 2 dt 4* | 1 dt 4" | 0 dt ] —~ (1 4" 2 4" 1 4" 0) ——— 1A

230
Copyrighted Material © 2020
6.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Time period of a periodic waveform can be calculated by finding time difference between occurrence of same
points in the waveform. In the given problem, positive peak of sinusoidal waveform first appears at t — Os and
then at t = 5s. Therefore, time-period of the given waveform is 5s - Os = 5s.

6.4 g) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - B

Frequency of a periodic waveform can be calculated using following formula:

1
f - j

In the previous solution, time-period was calculated as 5s.

1
/ = - = 0.2 Hz
5
6.4 h) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the problem statement:

i(t) = 40V2 cos(377 1 + 30°) A

Standard form of a sinusoidal waveform is given below:

i ( 0 = l max COS ((O t + 0 )

hnax ~ 40V2 co — 377rad/s 6 = 30°

Therefore, peak current value = 4 0 a/ 2 A

6.4 i) C O R R E C T A N SW E R - C

As calculated earlier, co = 377rad/s.

a) 2nf = 377rad/s

377rad/s
f = -----— = 60 Hz
In

6.4 j) C O R R E C T A N SW E R - A

RMS value of a full-wave rectified sinusoidal function can be calculated using following formula.

, _ I m ax
Irms ~ I f

40V2 A
Irms — — 40/1

231
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 6.5 Phasors - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 360 - 361 for reference

6.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

v(t ) = 100 sin(37 7t + 60°) requires conversion to standard cosine form as shown below.

sin(i9) ~ cos(i9 —90°), Therefore, v(t) — 100 cos(377t + 60° —90°) = 100 cos(377t — 30°)

Vmax ---------
100 70 7 V
Vrms - ^
y WJV

Phase angle is 0 = —30°.

Therefore, voltage phasor is 7Q.7/-3Q0 V

XL = jail = j x 377 x 100 x 10“3a = ;37.7 fi = 37.7/90°Q

V
I = — = 1.875 A

Phase angle is 6 — —120°

Therefore, current phasor / = 1.875Al20°A.

6.5 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

v(t) - 212 cos(o>t + 50°) V

yKrm s — _^2 - 1501/

Phase angle is 6 = 50°.

Therefore, voltage phasor is 150/50° V.

6.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER - A

v(t ) = 212 sin(ait + 50°) requires conversion to standard cosine form as shown below.

sin(i9) = cos(i9 —90°).

Therefore, v(t) - 212 cos(377t + 50° - 90°)

v{t) - 212 cos(377t - 40°)

Vrms = ^ = 1501/

Phase angle is 6 = —40°.

Therefore, voltage phasor is 150/-4Q0 V.

232
Copyrighted Material © 2020
6.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

v(t) = 100 cos(377t - 0°)

v 1HX
uvrms — -V-77
- - - — 70
' u- 7
' V
v

Phase angle is 6 = 0°.

Therefore, voltage phasor is 70.7/0° V.

Z = 500 - y io o n = 509.9/-11.4°Q

V 70.7V
I =- = = 0.138/1
Z 510ft
Phase angle is 11.4°.

Therefore, the current phasor is / = 0.14/11.3°A.

6.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

v ( t ) — 100 sin(377t + 100°) requires conversion to standard cosine form as shown below.

sin($) — cos(i9 —90°)-

Therefore, v(t) = 100cos(377t + 100° —90°) — 100cos(377t + 10°)

Kms = Vmax/y[2 - 70.7 V

Phase angle is 6 = 10°.

Therefore, voltage phasor is 70.7/10° V.

= 1/jcoC = 0.0265/-9Q0 Q

V
/ = — = 2665 A

Phase angle 6 — 100°

Therefore, current phasor is / = 2665/100°A.

233
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 6.6 Impedance - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 361 for reference

6.6 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Zeq = 10 + ;2H 4- (10 ~ SjO)\\(2- 5JO)

5 4 0 - 770;
Zeq — 10 + J2Q. +
244

Zeq = 10 + j 2fi + (2 .2 1 -3 .1 5 ;'n )

Zeq = 12 —jil

Helpful tip - Learn how to calculate Y, G, B.

6.6 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

zeq = io - sj n ||2 - sj n
540 - 770j
244
Zeq = 2.21 - 3.15j£l

Zeq = 2 —3jO.

Helpful tip - Learn how to calculate Y, G, B.

6.6 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Z eq - R + XC

Xc jcoC 7*377 x 100 x 10-9

Zeq = 50 - ^26525 CL

Helpful tip - Learn how to calculate Y, G, B.

6.6 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Zeq = U + XlW c

XL = jojL = 7*377 x 2 x 10“3 = 7*0.754 n

1 1
Xr =
j(oC 7*377 x 100 x 10

Zeq = 10 + 70.754 n||-7*26.5(1

Helpful tip - Learn how to calculate Y, G, B.

234
Copyrighted Material © 2020
6.6 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 6.2 - 14/fl

z — (5n-yion) + (2on)||(-y5n)
looyft
z= (5 n - yio n) -
20ft — 5/17

[(100flr)(20ft + 5fty)]
z = (5ft- yio ft) -
[(2on-5fiy)(2on + 5ny)j
[2 0 0 0 ny-soon]
2 = (5 f t - y 10 a ) -
[400ft + 25ft]
[2 0 0 0 ny - sooft]
z = (5 f t -yio ft)-
[400ft + 25 ft]

500 2000 .
Z = ™ + 425^ “ ~ ~42SjCl

Z = 6 .1 7 6 - 14.47; ft

Z ~ 6.2 - 14yft

Helpful tip - Learn how to calculate Y - admittance, G - conductance, B - susceptance.

6.6 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Maximum power transfer occurs when Z ioad = Z*rhevenin.

To calculate Z Thevenin, open-circuit the current source and short-circuit the voltage source.

% Th even in ~ ^ ~ 5y + 2 + 6 j

Z T h e v e n in ~ J Q

Therefore, for maximum power transfer Zload = Z j hevenin = 12 ~yft.

6.6 g) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Maximum power transfer occurs when Zload = Z j hevenin.

To calculate Z Thevenint open-circuit the current source.

%Thevenin — 5 —y + 3j D

Z T h e v e n i n — 5 + 2J Q

Therefore, for maximum power transfer Z[oad = Z^hevenin = 5 —2;ft

235
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 7 - Linear Systems
7.1 Frequency / transient response - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 361 - 362 for reference

7.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Relevant formula for this problem is given below:

vc ( t ) — vc (0)e~RC + V ^1 - e~Rc ^ v c (0 ) = 20 V

After switch changes position, V = 0 (external voltage source is not present).

t — 5 x 60 s = 300 s

T = RC = 100s

f c (3 0 0 s ) = vc ( 0 ) e Rc + v ( \ - e r = i o o kCl C = 1 mF

_300
v c (3 0 0 s ) = 20e 100K = 0.995 V= 1 V
Helpful tip - Review and understand RC transient equations given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

7.1 b)CORRECT ANSWER - B

Relevant formula for this problem is given below.

vc ( t ) ~ vc (0)e~RC + v c (0 ) = 10 V

R = 10 ktl C = 200 [IF

RC = 2s

After switch changes position, V = 0 (external voltage source is not present).

vc ( t ) = i0 f? ~ t/2y

7.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D ikn

Relevant formula for this problem is given below.

_Rt_ V _Rt
i ( t ) = i(0)e l + -(1 - e l )

R
t(0 ) = 0, V = 10 V, R = 1 k n , L = 2 mH -> - = 5 0 0 0 0 0 s
tj

i ( t ) = 0.01 (1 - e-sooooot)^

Helpful tip - Review and understand RL transient equations given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

236
Copyrighted Material © 2020
7.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Relevant form ula for this problem is given below.

Rt y Rt
i(t) = i( 0 ) e l + - ( l - e l )

Inductor can be replaced with a short wire because switch has been closed for a long time.

Current provided by the pow er source before switch opens at t = 0 is calculated as follows:

10V 10 V
1 = = 0.75 A
io n + 5n|]ioa 10 ft+ 3.33 ft
Voltage across 5 ft j 110 ft before switch opens can be calculated as shown below:
50
v(0) = 0.75/4 x 5 ft||10 ft = 2.5V
ion

Current through inductor at t — 0 can be calculated using current divider rule.

1H
25 V
i(0 ) = — =0.5 A

According to the problem statement:

Circuit after switch opens
t = 10r L — 1H R = 15ft

L
t - — — 66.66 ms
R

Note that 7 = 0 after switch opens.

Rt
i(10r) = i(0)e l + 0 = 22.6 \jlA

7.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Relevant formula for this problem is given below.

vc( t ) = vc(0 )e"RC+

yc(0) = 10V

t = 5r = SRC

After the switch changes position, V — 0 (external voltage source is not present).
/ _ 5 RC \
pc(5r) = + 0 f1 — e rc \ = 1 0 e -5 + 0

r c(5r) = 67.3 mV

237
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 7.2 Resonance - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 362 for reference

7.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The given circuit is an example of series resonance circuit for which relevant formula is given below.

1
C0n =
\[LC

1
a)0 = , = 2236 rad/s
yj20mH x 10(iF

7.2 b)CORRECT ANSWER - 5000 rad/s

Bandwidth of a series resonance circuit can be calculated using formula given below.
(l)0
BW = -

r ioon
BW = — = —-----= 5000 rad/s
L 20 mH 1

7.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Maximum current occurs at resonant frequency because circuit impedance is lowest i.e. Z = R

120 V
I max ~ T T T T T = 1 2/4
max 10 ft
7.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 3 162 rad/s

Resonant frequency can be calculated using following formula:

1
a)0 =
V ic
1
oj0 = , = 3162 rad/s
yJlOmHx 10 \iF

7.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 316,1 rad/s

For a parallel resonant circuit, quality factor 'Q' can be calculated as shown below:

Q = co0RC

1 1
0)o — ~ = = — .................... — = 316 rad/s
V/X V100 x 10~3H x 100 x 10-6F

Q = 316 rad/s x 10/cft x lOOfiF — 316

BW = ^ = 1 rad/s

238
Copyrighted Material © 2020
7.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 3.16 X 10"3, 100000 rad/s

For a series resonant circuit, quality factor'Qcan be calculated as shown below:

Q = R
1
con =
V lc

o)0 = ____ ________ — — 316 rad/s

V 100 x 10 3// x 100 x 10"6/'
316 rad/s x lOOmft
° = ---------- 10*5---------- = 3.16 x 10

w0 316
BW = — = -----------— = 100,000 rad/s
Q 3.16 x 10“3 7

Helpful tip - It can be observed that high Q results in low BW and vice versa.

7.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

For a parallel resonant circuit, quality factor 'Q' can be calculated as shown below:

R
Q = -77-
a)0L

1
co0 — —= = 707 rad/s
yLC

10ft
= 0.707
* (20m/y)(707 rad. s -1)

Helpful tip - Q can be calculated using two different formulas.

7.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 1000 rad/s

Bandwidth of parallel resonance circuits can be calculated using formula given below.
(x)0
BW = ~
Q
707
BW = ------- rad/s
0.707 '

BW = 1000 rad/s

239
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 7.3 Laplace Transform - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 56 for reference

7.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the Laplace transform pairs provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

l [ e ~ at} = “ J - - £ [ / ( 0 ] - TTT
s -F (i s b

7.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

f i t ) = e~at — = e~a^t~1^e~a — e ~ ^ [e ~ a^t~1'^uit ~ 1)]

According to the Laplace transform pairs provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:
1
L [ f { t - r )u (t - r)] = e TSF(s) L[e at] ——j-—

It can be observed that in given case, r = 1.

«-(s) p-(5+a)
£ [/(()] = «r
s -F ci s -F a.
7.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

f i t ) = (£ - 1 + l) e " a(t- 1+1)u(t - 1) = [(t - l) e - a(t^1)u(t - 1) + e'^'-^uC t - l)]e “a

According to the Laplace transform pairs provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

L [ f { t - r)u(t - r)] = e~TSF{s) L(te~at) = ■ *

It can be observed that in the given case, r = 1.

£ [ / « ] = F (S) = e- ( « . ) ( _ L _ + _ l _ )

7.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

f i t ) = [ e~^~3^- e_3(^ 3)]u(t —3) = e~^~3\t{t —3) —e“3(-f“3^u(t - 3)

As explained in previous solutions, Laplace transform of this function will be as follows:

£ [ / ( t ) ] = e " 35 f — 1- r - —
J Vs + 1 s + 3/

7.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

f ( t ) = te’ atS(t - 2)

According to the sifting property of delta function / f i t ) Sit - T)dt = f{T).

F{s) — i 2 ) e ~ ^ a e ~ ^ s = 2e~2^ai~s^

240
Copyrighted Material © 2020
7.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

f ( t ) = tu(t) * sin 4t

According to the Laplace transform table, convolution in time domain is equal to multiplication in s-domain.

X[x(t) * h(t)] = X(s)H(s)

Let us assume that x(t) = tu(t) and h{t) — sin 41.

According to the Laplace transform table:

4
sin4t = (1) sin4t = e ots in 4 t-> £[e otsin4t] =
[(5 + 0)2 + 42] (s2 + 16)

1 4
£[tu(t) * sin4t] = X(s)H(s) =
s 2 s2 + 16
7.3 g) CORRECT AN SW ER - D

5 5 5 5 1
(s + 3) + (s + 5) (2s + 8) 2(s + 4) 2 s+4

According to the Laplace transform pairs provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

1
L[e~at] =
s+ a
7.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

F(S) (s + l) ( s + 7)
s+ 8 j4 B
7--------7T7--------=
-------------- 7 + ------
(s + l)(s + 7) s+ 1 s+ 7

Multiply the entire equation by denominators (s + l) ( s + 7).

s + 8 = A(s + 7) + B(s + 1)

1
Lets = -7 , 1 = B ( —6 ) , B = —— Lets = -1 , 7 = 4(6), 4 = 7/6
6

According to the Laplace transform pairs provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

£ [ e at] _ _ J_ ------ » / ( t ) = ^-(7e 1 - e 7t)

s+a 6

241
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 7.3 i) CORRECT ANSWER - A

s 2 + 2s + 1
-r& r
(s + 2)(s + 3)(s)

s 2 + 2s + 1 A B C
+ ------ +
(s + 2)(s + 3)(s) s + 2 5+ 3 s

s2 + 2s + 1 —/4(s + 3)(s) + £?(s + 2)(s) + C(s + 2)(s + 3)

1
Lets = 0, 1 = C (2 )(3 ), C = -
6

1
Lets = - 2, 4 —4 + 1 = i4 (l)(—2), 4 = --

4
Lets = - 3, 9 —6 + 1 = B (—1)(—3), B = -

_1 4 1
F(S) “ 2(s + 2) + 3(s + 3) + 6s

According to the Laplace transform pairs provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

1 1 1 2^ 4 e—^
£ ie~at] ~ -s T+ Ta £ [“ (0 ] = “s “» f i t ) = 76 « (0 - 2 + —— 3
7.3 j) CORRECT ANSWER - C

s+4
F(s)
(s2)(s + 5)

s+4 A B C
I T+
(s2)(s + 5) s s2 s + 5

s + 4 = 4 (s)(s + 5) + B(s + 5) + C (s2)

4
L e ts 2 = 0, 4 = B (5 ),B = -

1
Lets = -5 , - 1 = C(25), C - - —

? 1
Comparing the coefficients of s z -» 4 + C = 0, 4 = —C, A = —

1 4 1
25(s) 5(s2) 25(s + 5)

1 1 u(t) 41 e~st
s+a 5 z5 5 z5
Helpful tip - Review partial fraction expansion for calculating inverse Laplace transforms.

242
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 7.4 Transfer Functions - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 56, 361 - 362 for reference

7.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER: B, D

Transfer function is the ratio of an LTI system's output to its input in Laplace domain i.e. H(s) = Y(s)/X(s)

Initial conditions of the LTI system are assumed to be zero because in an LTI systems, output = 0 when input = 0.
If initial conditions are non-zero, it is possible for output to be non-zero even when input is zero. Such a system
can no longer be considered LTI.

7.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 2s + -s - e 25

Transfer function H( 5) of given function can be calculated as follows:

H& = X(s) Y(s') = *00 = £[x(t)]

y(s) = ZsA'(s) 4- ~X(s) — e 2sA"(s)

1
Y (s ) — X(s) ( 22ss H------ e 2s)
25 -> — 2s H------ e 25 -» H ( s ) = 2s H------- e 2s
\ s ) X(s) ss

7.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 3e~f - 2e~2t

Impulse response h(t ) can be calculated by taking inverse Laplace transform h(t) = £ 1/7(s)

s 2 + 3s + 2 (s + l ) ( s + 2) s+ 1 s + 2

s + 4 — ,<4(s + 2) + Z?(s + 1) A — 3, B — —2

3 2
H(s) =
s+ 1 s+ 2

h(t ) = 3e 1 —2e 2t

243
Copyrighted Material © 2020
7.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D
R
Output impedance can be calculated as shown below:
—w v

Z 0 = (R + s/,)|| ( ^ )

Vi
Total impedance can be calculated as shown below:

ZT = R + (R + s i ) 11( - j )

Voltage transfer function can be calculated as shown below:

V -^ Q - (R + sL)^ 0 c )
V‘ Z’ R + (R + sL) | | ( i )

7.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Output impedance can be calculated as shown below: R

pVW

z° = R + i Ln n m
L
Total impedance can be calculated as shown below: Vi

Z T = (K | | s L ) + ( r + ^ )

Voltage transfer function can be calculated as shown below:

Vq _ Z q r + ^c
V< ZT (fills / ,) + ( r + J ^ )

7.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Output im pedance can be calculated as shown below:

—Ay\A/

1
Z„ = R\sL\ Vi
7c

Total im pedance can be calculated as shown below:

1
ZT = R + R\\sL\\
sC

Voltage transfer function can be calculated as shown below:

vo _ *o
Vt ~ ZT R + R\\sL\\j£

244
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 8 - Signal Processing
8.1 Sampling - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 225 and 376 for reference

8.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to Nyquist Theorem, signal needs to be sampled at or above Nyquist rate for perfect reconstruction.

8.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 2000 Hz

The given signal is a summation of two sine functions smc(10007zt) and sinc(2000nt).

sinc{2000nt ) = sinc[2 n (1000)t] carries the highest frequency component.

According to Nyquist Theory, perfect reconstruction requires sampling rate to be > 2 x highest frequency.

Therefore, required sampling rate shall be > 2 x 1000 Hz — 2000 Hz.

8.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to the problem statement x(t) = cos(27r(1500)t + 6 ).

Signal frequency = 1500 Hz and sampling frequency ~ 2000 Hz.

Aliasing will occur because sampling frequency < 2 x signal frequency.

8.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Alias frequency = [signal frequency - n x sampling frequency |

'n' is an integer that brings n x sampling frequency closest to signal frequency. In our case, n = 1 as shown below.

Alias frequency = [1500Hz- 1 x 2000Hz|= |-500Hz| = 500 Hz.

Reconstructed signal frequency will be 500Hz with a negative phase angle (due to negative sign inside mod
operator) as shown below.

x'(t) — cos(27r(500)t —6 )

x'(t) — COs(10007Tt —6)

8.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to the problem statement x(t ) = cos(27r(250)t + 6).

Signal frequency = 250 Hz and sampling frequency = 500 Hz.

Aliasing will not occur because sampling frequency = 2 x 250 Hz = 500 Hz.

245
Copyrighted Material © 2020
8.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Alias frequency = |signal frequency - n x sampling frequency |.

'n' is an integer that brings n x sampling frequency closest to signal frequency.

In our case, n = 1 as shown below.

Alias frequency = |250Hz - 1 x 200Hz|= j-50Hz| = 50 Hz.

Reconstructed signal frequency will be 50Hz with a negative phase angle (due to negative sign inside mod
operator) as shown below.

x'{t) = cos(2 7 r(5 0 )t — 9 )

x'{t ) = cos(100/rt — 9)

8.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to the problem statement x(t) —cos(27r(200)t + 6).

Signal frequency = 200 Hz and sampling frequency = 300 Hz.

Aliasing will occur because sampling frequency < 2 x 200 Hz.

Alias frequency = [signal frequency - n x sampling frequency |.

'n' is an integer that brings n x sampling frequency closest to signal frequency. In our case, n = 1 as shown below.

Alias frequency = |signal frequency - n x sampling frequency |= 1200 Hz - 1 x 300 Hz |= 100 Hz.

8.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Alias frequency = [signal frequency - n x sampling frequency [.

'n' is an integer that brings n x sampling frequency closest to signal frequency.

In our case, n = 1 as shown below.

Alias frequency = [200Hz - 1 x 150Hz|= | 50Hz|=50Hz.

Reconstructed signal frequency will be 50Hz with a positive phase angle (due to positive sign inside mod
operator) as shown below.

x ' ( t ) = cos(27r(50)t + 8).

x'(t) = cos(1007zt 4* 9).

246
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 8.2 Analog Filters - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 379 - 380 for reference

8.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Comparing the given transfer function to band-reject filter's transfer function given in NCEES® FE Reference
Handbook confirms that it is an analog implementation of band-reject filter.

8.2 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

Series RL circuit acts as a first-order low-pass filter and its cut-off frequency can be calculated as shown below:

Rs 2/c/2
cjc = — = ——- = 1000 rad/s
L ZH

8.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

As noted above, series RL circuit acts as a first-order low-pass filter.

8.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Series RC circuit acts as a first-order high-pass filter and its cut-off frequency can be calculated as shown below:

1
(j)r = -----
c RSC
1
(Or —------------------— 10 rad Is
c (2kQ)(S0fiF) 1

8.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

As noted above, series RC circuit acts as a first-order high-pass filter.

8.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER: 1000 rad/s

Series RLC circuit acts as a second-order band-pass filter and its bandwidth can be calculated as shown below:

Rs 2kfl
BW = ~ = — - = 1000 rad/s
L 2n

8.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER - Band-pass filter

As noted above, series RLC circuit acts as a second-order band-pass filter.

8.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER: B

Bandwidth of a second-order bandpass filter is given by following formula:

B W = a)fj ~ ojl

coL = tou - B W

coL — 1500 rad/s — 1000 rad/s = 500 rad/s

247
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 8.3 Digital Filter, Z-transforms, Difference Equations - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 369 - 371 for reference

8.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Z-transform is the equivalent of Laplace transform in difference equations. Laplace transforms solve differential
equations. Discrete convolution provides zero state solution of a discrete linear time invariant system.

8.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

u ( n ) - n(n-n)
x[?i] = u[n] — u[n —5]
k~ 4

X[z] = ^ (u[k] — u[k —5)z k = 'y'

k- 0 k-0 1 2 3 4 n

8.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

x[?i] = 0.2nu[n)
k-oo k=<x> k=co

X[z] = 0.2 ku[k]z k = ^ 0.2 kz k = ^ (0 .2 z 1) fe

k=o k-o k-u

According to the geometric series convergence formula:

oo = oo

' Z r" = r b f o r |r| < 1 " x[z] = X 02kz~k = i _ o.2z~j

n=0 k=0

Note: This problem can also be solved used Z Transform table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

8.3 d)CORRECT ANSWER - A

x[n]= [2 3 1 0 5] x [0 ] = 2 ,* [1 ] — 3 ,x [2 ] = l , x [ 3 ] = 0,;c[4] = 5

fc = CO k=4
X[z] - x[k]z k — ^ x[k]z k = x[0]z ° + x [l]z 1 + x[2]z 2 + x[3\z 3 + x[4\z -4
k = -co k=0

X[z] = 2z “° + 3z " 1 + z~2 + 5z -4 = 2 + 3z " 1 + z~2 4- 5z~4

8.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

x[?i]= [2 3 1 0 5] x [—2j = 2, jc[“ 1] = 3,x[0] = l,x [ l] = 0,x[2] = 5

k -o o k —2

X[z\ = ^ x[k]z~k — ^ x[k]z~k = x [-2 ]z ~ (~2) + x [ —l]z~(~^ + x[0]zQ+ x[l\z~l + x[2]z -2

/ (--d o k ~ -2

X[z] — 2z 2 + 3z 1 4- z° + 5z~2 = 2z2 + 3z + 1 + 5z~2

248
Copyrighted Material © 2020
8.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

x[n] = 5(0,75)7lu[?i]
k -oo k -o o

X[z] = £ 5(0.75) ku[k\z-k = 5 ^ {0.75z~')k = l

k- 0 fc=o
8.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

X{z ) = 4 4- 2 z_1 + 3z ~ 3 + z -5 = 4z° 4- 2 z_1 4- 0z -2 + 3 z-3 + Oz-4 + z -5

k = co k= 5

X|z] = x[/c]z~fc = ^ x[/c]z~fe = x[0]z° 4- x[\ ]z ~ ^ + x|2]z~(2) + x[3]z~3 + x[4]j 4 4- x[5]z 5

k = -m k~ 0

x[?i] = {x[0],x[l],x[2],x[3],x[4],x[5]} = {4,2,0,3,0,11

8.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

z z 1
X (z) =
z —0.5 z ( l - O.Sz"1) 1 —0.5z-1

According to the z-transform pairs given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

1
1 —pz 1

x[n] = (0.5)n

8.3 i) CORRECT ANSWER - D

5z + 2
X(z) -
(z - l) ( z - 4)

Inverse z-transform can be calculated using partial fraction expansion as shown below.

X (z) 5z + 2 + + C3
z z(z — l) ( z —4) z z — 1 z —4

5z + 2 - Ca(z - l) (z - 4) 4- C2(z)(z - 4) 4- C3(z)(z - 1)

Letz - 1, 7 = C2(-3 )-> C2 =

11
Let z = 4, 22 = C3 (12) -> C-s = - ~
6
1
Letz = 0, 2 = C1( - l ) ( - 4 ) -> ^ = -

X (z) 1 7 11
z 2z 3(z - 1) 6(z - 4)

249
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 1 7z llz
X(z) = - ——----- — +
2 3(z —1) 6(z —4)
1 7z llz
^ ( z) - 2T _ 3 z(l------“ PC +
—z -1) 6 z(l —4z_1)

r n Sin] 7(1") i ( l l ) ( 4 n)
---------3 6
8.3 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

(z - 2)(z + 1)
* (z) = (z —0.1)(z —0.2)

X (z) (z - 2)(z + 1) C, C2 C3
— 1------- -- r +
z z(z — 0.1)(z —0.2) z z —0.1 z —0.2

(z - 2)(z + 1) = Cx(z - 0.1)(z - 0.2) + C2(z)(z - 0.2) + C3(z)(z - 0.1)

Letz = 0.1, -2.09 = C2(-0.01) -> C2 = 209

Let z = 0, -2 = (0 —0.1)(0 - 0.2) -> Cx = -100

Let z = 0.2, -2.16 = C3(0.2)(0.1) -> C3 = -1 0 8

X(z) -100 209 108 209z 108z

------= -------- , ------ _ _ _ _ _ ----- _> X(z) — —100 +
(z ~ 0.1) (z —0.2) (z —0.1) 6(z —0.2)
209z 108z
X(z) = - 100 +
(1 - O .lz-1) z ( l - 0.2Z-1)

x[n] = -1005[n] + 209(0.1n) - (108)(0.2n)

8.3 k) CORRECT ANSWER - A

(z + 0.5)
X(z) =
(z - 0.1)(z + 0.4)

X(z) = (z + 0.5) = Ci C2 C3
z z(z - 0.1)(z + 0.4) z z - 0 . 1 + z + 0.4

(z + 0.5) = Cx{z —0.1)(z + 0.4) + C2(z)(z + 0. 4) + C3( z ) ( z - 0.1)

Letz = 0.1, 0.6 = C2(0.1)(0.5)-> C2 = 12

1
Let z = -0.4, 0.1 = C3 ( —0.4)(—0.5) -» C3 = -

-2 5
Letz = 0, 0.5 = C!(-0.1)(0.4) -* Cx = - y -

X(z) -2 5 12 1 —25 12z

7 n ------- n a\ > X ( z ) — —n------------------------ ^ 7----------- A 1 •+
2z (z - 0.1) 2(z + 0.4) w 2 (z - 0.1) 2(z + 0.4)

250
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Helpful tip - Review partial fraction expansion for calculation of inverse Z-Transform.

8.3 I) CORRECT ANSWER: 4n

y[n\ + y[n - 1] + 2 y[n - 2 } = x[n] + x[n - 1] + 2 x[n - 2]

Z[y[?i] + y[n — 1] + 2y[n — 2]] = Z[x[n ] + x[n — 1] + 2x[n — 2]]

Z[ y[ n] ] + Z [ y[ n - 1 ] ] + 2 Z[ y[ n - 2 ]] = Z[ x [ n] ] + Z [ x [ n - 1 ]] + 2 Z[x[n - 2 ]]

Y(z) + z _ 1 Y(z) + 2z~1 Y(z) = X ( z ) + z~1X{ z) + 2z~xX{z)

K ( z ) ( l + z _1 + 2z~1) = X ( z ) ( 1 + z ” 1 + 2z -1 )

7 (z ) = * ( z ) y[n] = x[n] = 4n

8.3 m) CORRECT ANSWER: (1 + 3 z_1) / ( l + 2 z -1 )

y[n] + 2y\n — 1] = x[n] + 3x[n — 1]

Z[y[n ] + 2y[n — 1]] = Z[x[n ] + 3x[n — 1]]

Z[y[n]\ + 2Z [ y[ n - 1]] = Z [ x [ n ]] + 3Z [ x [ n - 1]]

r ( z ) + 2z~1Y(z) = X(z) + 3z~1X(z)

y (z )( 1 + 2 z_1) = X(z)(1 + 3z_1)

M/ N K (z) 1 + 3 Z -1
H (z ) = ? ( i ) = T T ^

8.3 n) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Finite Impulse Response Filter (FIR) is non-recursive because it does not have a feedback loop (unity feedback).

8.3 o) CORRECT ANSWER - 8

Infinite Impulse Response Filter (HR) is recursive because it has a feedback loop.

8.3 p) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Sampling, A/D conversion and D/A conversion are important processes involved in digital filtering whereas
phase modulation only applies to analog domain.

251
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 8.4 Continuous Time Convolution - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 370 for reference

8.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

y(t) = x(t) * h(t )

It is easier to flip h(t) into h(—r).

Region # 1 y(t) = 0 f o r t < 0 no overlap

Region # 2 y(t) = j|o 8dr = 81 f o r 0 < t < 2 partial overlap

Region # 3 y(t) = [ 8dr — 8 t —8(t —2) = 16 /or 2 < t < 4, partial overlap
A-2

Region # 4 y (t) = j 8 d x — 8(4 — t + 2) = 48 —8t / o r 4 < £ < 6,partial overal

Region # 5 y(t) = 0 f o r 6 < t , no overlap

8.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

y(t) = f ( t ) * /i(t)

It is easier to flip f ( t ) into / ( —r).

J 3eu;
Region = —-— f o r t < 0
o ^

Region # 2 y ( t ) = I e T^3e^ = for 0 < t

8.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

/ (0 = X(t)*y{t)

It is easier to flip y(t) into y (—t ).

Region #1 f { t ) — 0 f o r t < 0 no overlap

Region # 2 f (i t ) = f si
sin ( r ) d r = 1 —cos (t) f o r 0 < t < n partial overlap
Jo

Region # 3 sin(r) dr — 1 —cos (t) f o r n < t < 2n, partial overlap

Region # 4 /'(t) = 0 f o r n < t ,no overlap

252
Copyrighted Material © 2020
8.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Let f ( t ) - x(t) *y(t)

It is easier to flip y ( t ) into y ( —t ).

Region # 1 / (t) = 0 /or t < —1 ?io overlap

f
Region (2)(3)dr = 6(t + 4 —3) = 6(t + 1) /or - 1 < t < 1 partial overh
3

Region # 3 / (t) = f 6dr = 6(5 - t - 2) = 6(3 ~ t) /o r 1 < t < 3 partial overlap

Region # 4 / (t) = 0 f o r 3 < t ,no overlap

8.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Let f ( t ) = x(t) * y(t )

It is easier to flip y ( t ) into y ( —r).

Region # 1 / (t) = 0 /or f < 0 no overlap

Region # 2 /(t) = f 2 e Tdr — 2 —2 e 1 f o r 0 < t < 2 partial overlap

Jo

Region #3 / (t) = f 2e~Tdr = 2(e~t+2 —e~c) f o r t > 2

h ~2

253
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 8.5 Discrete Time Convolution - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 370 for reference

8.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

f[n\ = x[n] *y[n J = x[k]y[n - k\.

It is easier to flip y[n\ into y [—k\.

For n < 0 , there is no overlap

For n = 0, f [ 0] = 2.0 = 0

Forn = 1, / [ I] = 2.2 + 2.0 = 4

For n = 2, f [ 2] = 2.3 + 2.2 + 2.0 = 4 + 6 = 10

Forn = 3, f[3] = 2.2 + 2.3 + 2.2 = 14

Forn = 4, / [ 4] = 2.3 + 2.2 = 10

For n = 5,/[5] = 2.2 = 4

For n — 6, f [ 6] = 0

Therefore,/[n] = [0 4 10 14 10 4 0]

8.5 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

f [ n ] = x[n] * y[n] = Zk'-ooxlkjyln - k].

It is easier to flip y[n] into y[ —k].

For n < 0 there is no overlap

For n = o, m = 0

Forn - 1, / [ i] = 1.1 + 2.0 = 1

For n = 2, /[ 2] = 1.2 + 2.1 + 1.0 = 4

For n - 3, /[3] = 1.3 + 2.2 + 1.1 = 8

For n = 4, m = 1.0 + 2.3 + 1.2 = 8

For n - 5, /[5] := 1.3 : 3

For n = 6, m = 0

Therefore,/[n] = [0 1 4 8 8 3 0]

254
Copyrighted Material © 2020
8.5 C) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Zero input solution is found using characteristic polynomial roots.

Zero state response is the output of a system to a specific input when system has zero initial conditions and it is
found using D-T convolution.

8.5 d) SOLUTION

x[?i] — u [ n ] — u [n — 5]

y[?i] — 0.2 nu[n]

k=oo

k - ~ co

k = DO

x[?i] * y[rc] = ^ ( u [ k ] - u[ k - 5 ])(0 .2 n ku[n - k ] )

k--o o

k =oo k-oo

* [ « ] * y ln i = X “ W t 0 -2 " ' * " ! " - * ] ) - Z U [ f c “ 5 K 0 .2 " - * « [ n - * ] )

k = -o o k = - oo

k=n k=n

:[?i] * y[ n] — 0.2n k — 0.2n k

fc=o fc=5
fk ~ n k=n

:[n] * y [ n ] = 0.2" ( ^ 0.2“ * - ^ 0.2

u
fe= 0 fc = 5

8.5 e) SOLUTION

x[ n] ~ u[n — 2]

y [ n ] — 0.4nu jn ]

k =oo

:[?i] * y [n ] == I x [/c jy [n — fc]

k - ~ oo

fc= co
:[n] * y [n ] = x[ k - 2 ]0 .4 n fcu [n - k]
A:=“Co

x [n ] * y [n ] — ^ 0.4n ~ k

k=2

k=n

x [?i] * y[ n] = 0.4n ^ u ~t~k

0.4
k~2

255
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 9 - Electronics
9.1 Semiconductor materials - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 382 - 383 for reference

9.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the periodic table found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, Antimony is a group V element.
Members of this group have 5 valance electrons which makes them suitable for n-type doping.

9.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to the periodic table found in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, Boron is a group III element. Members
of this group have 3 valance electrons which makes them suitable for p-type doping.

9.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, conductivity of a semiconductor is given by:

a - q (nn„ + pnp)

rii = n = p — 2 x 10lom~3, q — 1.6 x 10-19C, nn = Q.20m2V~1 s~1, = 0.10m2l/-1s -1

(7 = (1.6 x 10~19)((2 x 10lo)(0,20) + ( 2 x 101G)(0.10)) = 9.61 x 10” 10 S.m' 1

9.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.634V

According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, built-in potential of p-n junction is given by:

fkT\ ( NaNd\ ( (2 x 1015)(2 x 1015)\

^ = ( y ) ( ln - i r ) = ( 0026) r ( i x io » )^ J = °-634 17

9.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Insulators have large gap between valence and conduction bands which prevents free movement of electrons.

9.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The average velocity at which electrons move under the influence of an electrical field is called the drift velocity.
Drift velocity results in drift current. It is directly proportional to the applied electrical field.

9.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Diffusion current is caused by the difference in charge concentration between different regions. This forms the
basis of semiconductor doping.

9.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - Group III

Group III elements of periodic table have 3 electrons in their outer orbit which allows them to form 3 covalent
bonds with Si or Ge atoms. It creates a hole which makes them p-type doping agents. Boron and Aluminum are
examples of p-type doping agents.

256
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.2 Diodes and Thyristors - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 385 for reference

9.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A tkfl

Let us first assume that both D l and D2 are ON

SV-1V
lD1 — = 3 mA
1/cO

(1 V)
i-D1 + *D2 = 0.5 mA
2 ka

iD2 = 0.5 mA — i01 — 0.5 mA — 3 mA = —2.5 mA

iD2<0, result is not consistent with the assum ption.

Let us now assum e that D l is ON and D2 is OFF.

5V
= 1.66 mA
3m

vD2 = 1 V — 1.66 mA x 2 kQ.

vD2 = - 2 .3 3 V < 0

Since i D1>0 and vD2<0, the results are consistent with the assumptions.

9.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.66mA

The given circuit can be rearranged into a Thevenin equivalent circuit as shown below.

Rtlll = i /can 2 k n = o.66 ka

'2 '
V,oc 1 33 V 0.66kn 1.33ka

Sim ilarly, Rth2 = 4 fcft||2 kfl — 1.33 k£l

D
,4n 1.33V 2.66V
V,oc2 66 V

Let us assum e that diode is "ON" i.e. forward biased.

2.66 V - 1.33 V
In — = 0,66 mA
1.33 /cfl + 0.66 k£l

Since iD > 0, Diode is ON.

Therefore, diode Q point is (0V, 0.66 mA)

Note that voltage drop across diode is assum ed 0V since ideal diode model is being considered.

257
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.13 mA

Let us assume that diode is "ON" i.e. forward biased.

D
10 V —SV —0.71/
In —
10 ka A A A r^ H I
10V m n 8V
0.7V
iD = 0.13 mA

Since diode is ON (because i0 > 0), our assumption is correct.

9.2 d) SOLUTION

Let us first assume that both D1 and D2 are ON.

(5 - 0.7) V - (10 -0.7)1/

lD1 —
2 ka

iD1 = —2.5 mA

Since iD1 < 0, this result is not consistent with the assumption.

Let us now assume that D1 is OFF and D2 is ON.

(10K —0.7K) —( —3 V)
102 ~ sm

iD2 — 2.46 mA

VD1 = 5 V - (101/ - 0.710

VD1 = -4.3 V < 0

Since iD2 > 0 and VD1 < 0.7V this result is consistent with assumptions.

*D1 2kfi 5kil

o— ^-l|— V W A /W -O
5V -3V
0.7V 0.7V
D1 and D2 ON jD2 / V
O 10V

2kfi 5kQ
D1
— vw — w v -O
5V -3V
0.7V
D1 OFF and D2 ON »D2 / V
o 10V

258
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 400/2

Zener diode will maintain Vz — 2V across it if current passing through the diode Iz > 15mA

KCL can be written at the node connecting Zener diode, SOOfi resistor and R as follows:

12V - V z V7 12V —2V 2V

— ly H------- *
500ft z R soon “ T ' /z
Since we require lz > 15mA for Zener diode to maintain 2V across R.

21/
0.02------ > 15mA -> /? > 400/2
R
R
Therefore, Rmin = 400/2 for Zener diode to maintain 2V across it.

9.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER: 2mA

It can be observed that Zener diodes are connected in series. Both diodes will be operating in reverse biased
mode with Vz = 41/ across each one of them.
2kfl
16V - Vz - Vz
I =
2 /cfi + 6kfi\\3kf2
VZ=4V
l e v ~4V - 4 V
I = - = 2mA 16V
2 /cH + 2 kfl 6kO 3kO
Therefore, / = 2mA will flow through this circuit.

Note - Voltage drop across diodes adds in series.

9.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 1.4V

According to Shockley's equation given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

Vp
er]VT - 1

VD = iiVT \ n ( l +

VT * 0-026V @ T = 300K”

50 x 10"6\
Vd = 2 x 0.026 X In 1 + 10-ie ) = 1AV

9.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 114V

Average DC output voltage of a single-phase half-wave controlled rectifier can be calculated as follows:

Vmax 480
Vavg = (1 + cos a) = — (1 + cos 60°) = 1141/

Note: This formula is not provided in NCEE® FE Reference Handbook but it is commonly used for rectifiers.
259
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.2 i) CORRECT ANSWER: 152V

Average DC output voltage of a single-phase full-wave controlled rectifier can be calculated as follows:

2 Vmax, , 2x480
K v g = ----------- (c o s a ) = --------------- (cos 60°) = 152V
n n

Note: This formula is not provided in NCEE® FE Reference Handbook but it is commonly used for rectifiers.

9.2 j) SOLUTION

BJTs and MOSFETs can be used as fully controllable switches by means of biasing.

Thyristors are semi-controllable switches whereas diodes are uncontrollable.

Semiconductor Devices Controllability

1 - Thyristor ( S C R ) ^ ^ ^ controllable

2 - Di ode ■— ® ~ Semi-controllable

3 - BJT C - Uncontrollable

4 -M O SFE T

Helpful tip - Review basic design, theory, and application of abovementioned semiconductor devices.

9.2 k) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the problem statement, we have a single-phase half-wave rectifier circuit with a resistive load of
50 and firing angle 45° as shown below. Thyristor is an electronic switch and works as explained below.

Cathode

- i f - Cate
/
Anode

• It turns ON/starts conducting if gate current (pulse) is applied when Anode-Cathode is forward biased.
• It turns OFF when Anode-Cathode becomes reverse biased or anode current falls below threshold.

Vout
OV OFF ON OFF

________ c x
45" t

Thyristor will turn on at 45° firing angle and it will stay on until voltage polarity changes as shown above.

260
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.3 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs) - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 386 for reference

9.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

To analyze a BJT circuit we must assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that transistor is operating in the active region.

In active region: Vbe = 0.7 V lb > 0mA Vce > 0.7V a 10V

Base-emitter KVL can be written as shown below:

5K - (5 k n )(lb) - Vbe - (2 fefi)(/e) - 0

SV - (5 k n )(lb) - 0.7V - (2fcfi)(101/b) = 0

O -------- A oo
Ih = 20.77 \jlA lc - (3Ib = (100)(20.77 \jlA) = 2.07 mA

KCL can be written at the collector as shown below

Vc - 1 0 V - ( 2 kfi)(2.07 mA) = 5.86 V ~

KCL can be written at the emitter as shown below:

Ve - o
~2~kn ~ ie

Ve = (2 kft)(2.09 m A ) = 4.18 V

Vce = K - ve = 5.86 V - 4.18 V = 1.68 V

Our assumptions are correct because Vce > 0.7 V, Ib > 0mA.

Therefore, transistor is operating in active mode.

9.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

To analyze a BJT circuit we must assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that transistor is operating in the active region.

In the active region: Vbe = 0.7 V Ib > 0mA Vce > 0.7V

Base-emitter KVL can be written as shown below:

3V — 0.7V
31/ - Vbe - (2fcn)(/e) - 0 -> le = — 1.15 mA

261
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Ic = f31b = 1.138 mA
KCL can be written at collector as shown below:

7V-Vr 3kii
3ka lc
3V
VC = 7V - (3 Wl)(1.138 mA) = 3.58 V
o- >
Vbe = Vb - V e = 3 V - V e = 0.7V -» Ve = 2.3V

Ke = K ~ K = 3-6 7 - 2.3 V = 1.3 V 2ka

Our assumptions are correct because Vce > 0.7 V, Ib > 0mA.

Therefore, transistor is operating in the active region, ~

9.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - Cut-off

To analyze a BJT circuit we must assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that transistor is operating in the active region.

In active region: Vbe = 0.7 V Ib > 0mA Vce > 0.7V

Base-emitter KVL can be written as shown below:

0 - Vbe - (3fcn)(/e) = 0
0 - 0.7K
L = ———— = -0.233 mA
e 3ka

h = (/? + 1 Vb

L
Ih = = —0.0023 mA
(0 + 1)
Transistor is operating in the cut-off region because Ib < 0.

Ib = Ic — le — 0.

9.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The given circuit can be simplified using Thevenin theorem.

R th = 20 fcn||10 k£i = 6.66 fefi

Vth can be calculated using the voltage divider rule as shown below.

/iofcn\
= 10V (s o S ii) = 3 3 3 K

Let us assume that transistor is operating in the active region.

In active region: Vbe = 0.7 V lb > 0mA Vce > 0.7V

262
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Base*emitter KVL can be written as shown below:

3.3K - (6.6WI)(/fr) - Vbe - (1 fcfl)(/e) = 0

3.3K - (6.6/cH)(/b) - 0.7V - (lfcn)(101 Ib) = 0

Ib = 2.44 x 10 5^1

lc = pib = (100)(2.44 x 10_!M) = 2.44 mA

Ie = 101 lb = 2 A 6 m A

KCL can be written at the collector as shown below:

10V-VC
2 kSl = /c

Vc = 10 1/ - (2 fea)(2.44 mi4) = 5.12 V

KCL can be written at the emitter as shown below:

Ve —0
~ Ie

Ve = (1 ka)Ue) = 2.46K

Ke = VC- V e = 5.12 V - 2.46 V = 2.66 V > 0.7 V

Our assumptions are correct because Vce > 0.7 V, lb > 0mA.

Therefore, transistor is operating in the active region.

9.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 3. 23 mA, 5 . 11V

Let us assume that transistor is operating in the active region.

•5V
In active region: Veb = 0.7 V Ib > 0mA Vec > 0.7V

Emitter - base KVL can be written as shown below:

5K - (1 «!)(/*) - Veb - (2kfl)(/b) — IV = 0

4V - (lk0)(\011b) - 0.7V ~ (2kCi)(Ib) = 0

Ib = 32.03 \iA

Ic = j31b = 3.2 mA

le = 3.23 mA

KCL can be written at the emitter as shown below:

SV ~Ve
~ T k n ~ ~ ,e

263
Copyrighted Material © 2020
Ve = 5 V - (1 kQ.)(3.23mA) = 1.77 V
KCL can be written at the collector as shown below:

Vc - (-5 V )
= l c = 3.2 m/4
500 n 6

Vc - (3.2m/l)(500 0) - 5K = -3.4K

^ - Vc = I-77 ^ - (-3-4 V) = 5.17K > 0.7 V

Our assumptions are correct because Vec > 0.7 V, Ib > 0?nA

Therefore, transistor is operating in active mode.

9.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER: 1. 51 mA, 2V

To analyze a BJT circuit we must assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that the transistor is operating in the active region.

In the active region: Veb = 0.7 V lb > 0mA Vec > 0.7V

Emitter - base KVL can be written as shown below: /\ I

5^ - Veb - (20 ka)(Ib) - 4V = 0
2kQ
IV - 0.7V ~ (20kn)(/b) = 0

0.3V
= 1.5 x 10~SA 4V 20k£>
20 ka
O- p=100
Ic = filb = 1.5 mA I.
le = 1.51 mA

KCL can be written at the collector as shown below:

5V
Vc - (OK)
------ — ' = / = 1.50 mA
2kD. c

Vc = (lc) ( 2 kH) = 3V

Vec = Ve - V c = 5 V - (3 V) = 2 V > 0.7 V

Our assumptions are correct because Vec > 0.7 V, Ib > 0mA

Therefore, transistor is operating in the active region.

264
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 2.83 mA, 3 .057

To analyze a BJT circuit we assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that the transistor is operating in the active region.

►10 V
In active region: Veb = 0.7 V Ib > 0mA Vec > 0.7V

Emitter - Base KVL can be written as shown below:

5 ka
10V = (5/cfl)(/e) + Veb + (5fcfl)(/ft) - 57 = 0
5kft
/* = (/? + 1)/* - 101/ft
-5 V O - p=100
14.3V = (Sk0)1011b + (5 k n ) { Ib)

14.3V
1* = = 28.03M
5/cfl + 505kCl
1kft
Ic = /?/b = 2.803 m/l

lc = a/e
-1 0 V O
lc (/? + 1)
e a c B

(100 + 1)
Ie = 2.803m/4 ----------- - = 2.83?n4
e 100

Emitter - Collector KVL can be written as shown below:

107 = Ska x le + 7ec + 1/cft x lc - 107

Vec = 3.057 > 0.7 7

Our assumptions are correct because Vec > 0.7 7, Ib > 0m4

Therefore, transistor is operating in the active region.

265
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.4 Junction Field Effect Transistors (JFETs) - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 387 for reference

9.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 110ft

Let us assum e that the transistor is operating in the saturation region.

Gate-Source KVL can be written as show n below:

I DSS V
vgs
id

In saturation region, drain current is given as follows:

2
i _
*d - AD S S
Vn

id 5mA
1_ - = 0.816
'DSS 7.5mA

vgs = (1 - 0 .8 1 6 )(V p) = (0 .1 8 3 5 ) ( —3 V ) = - 0 .5 5 V

— ( —0 .5 5 V )
Rs = = 110ft
5 mA

9.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER: lmS

Transconductance of a JFET in saturation region can be calculated using following formula:

^4bssh>
9m

M axim um value of transconductance is reached when iDSS — lD.

Zyjlpsslpss __ 2 7 Qpss)2 _ 2Ipss

9m
\vp \Vv Wr,

According to the problem statem ent:

IDSS = 2mA Vp = - A V

\Vp \ = |—4 1 / 1 = 4V

21oss (2 ) (2 mA)
9m — lm S
\Vn 4V

266
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The given circuit can be simplified using Thevenin theorem .

Rth = 300 Wl|| 100 ktt = 75 k£l

100 ka \
Vth = 16V = 4V
aoofen + 3oo/cn>
V

Let us assum e that the transistor is operating in the saturation region.

vg ~ 4 V t ig ^ O A

Gate-Source KVL can be written as follows:

4V — ig x 75 /cO — vgs — 1 fcfi x iD = 0

9S
id
ika

In saturation region, drain current can be calculated as follows:

'd = w | i - ^ r

4V — vgs
i ka ~ /dss11~ k

(4V-vt/s) = l k n x l 0 m A ^ l - ^ j = l o ( l - & J = lo ( l+ ^ ) '

10
4 ^ ~ vgs = r z ( 5 + vgs) -> 1001/ - 25vgs = 10 (25 + + 10v55) = 250 + 10VgS -I- 100i^as
25

10 V g s + 125 V g s + 150 = 0

Dividing entire equation by 5 results in: 2vgs + 25vgs + 30 = 0

Quadratic form ula can be used to solve this equation as shown below:

•25 + V 2 5 2 - 4 ( 2 ) ( 3 0 ) -2 5 + V385 - 2 5 + 19.62

Vgs ~ = - 1 1 .2 7 ,- 1 .3 5 1 /
2x2 4 4

vgs must be > VP for saturation. Therefore, vqs — —1.35K.

4V - vas 4V + 1.35K
lD ~ 3 - = 535mA
1 k£l 1/cH
16V — vD
= 5 .3 5m 4 -> v D - 10.651/
i ka

v g d — Vg — vd = 4V — 10.651/ = — 6.65V < VP. Therefore, the transistor is operating in saturation region.
267
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 2.92mS

Transconductance of a JFET in saturation region can be calculated using following formula:

/"r 2a/____
-- „_" loSS^D
___

According to the problem statement, lDSS = 10mA, Vv = —SV -> \VP\= |-5/| = SV.

Drain current was calculated in last problem as iD = S.35mA.

2^ (10mA) (S.3SmA)
9m ~~ 5

9m ~~ 2.92 mS

268
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.5 MOSFETs - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 388 for reference

9.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

To analyze a MOSFET circuit we assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that the transistor is operating in the saturation region.

10V
Gate-Source KVL can be written as shown below:
o
10V - vas \ / /D
0 - vgs - (ZM )(i„ ) + 10V = 0 - * i a = 2 ka B

Drain-Source KVL can be written as shown below:

10K - ( 2 - vds - (2fcfi)(/d) + 10K = 0 -> vds = 20V - (4fcn)(id)

According to MOSFET's mathematical relationships: id — K(vgs —Kt)

Solving above given quadratic equations results in following values:

vgs ~ 3.54 V or vgs — "2.54 V

S
Since we assumed saturation, vgs should be 3.54 V -» vgs > Vt
-10V

vds = 20V - (4fcft)(id) = 7.08 V

vgs = 3.54 V > Vt vds = 7.08 V > vgs - Vt or vqd < Vt

Our assum ptions are correct because vgs > and vgd < Vt.
Therefore, the transistor is operating in saturation region.

9.5 b)CORRECT ANSWER - Triode

According to the details provided in problem statement:

vg = l V vs = 6V vd = SV ig = 0 Vt = - I V ^ \Vt \= IV

. (5K ~ 0)
— sfcli— lm ^
Vs<t = vs - v a = 6V -5V = IV vsg = ps - Vg = 6V - IV = 5V -> vsg > \Vt\

= vd - v s = S V - I V = AV > V t

Since, vsg > 1 ^ 1 and vdg > 1 ^ 1 transistor is operating in triode region.

269
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The given circuit can be simplified using Thevenin theorem as shown below.

Rth = 60/cU||40 ka = 24 ktt

/ 40kn \
Vth = 4 V \ ~ - ~~) = 1.6 V
tn vioo kn)
Let us assume that transistor is operating in the saturation region.

vg = 1.6 V, ig — 0 A, vs = 0 V 24kfl
<i— V W “
id = K{vgs - Vt) 2 = 0.2mAV~2(1.6V - I V ) 2 = 72 \iA

(<4V
\ V ~~ V
vd'
d\
{— ■■■ “ = 0.072 mA
\ 10/cH / © '■
vd = 3.28 V, vds = 3.28V - 0V = 3.28V _L
vgs = 1.6V > Vt

vgd = 1.6K - 3.28V = -1.68 1/ < t/c

Our assumptions are correct because vgs > Vt and vgd < Vt.

Therefore, transistor is operating in the saturation region.

9.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The given circuit can be simplified using Thevenin theorem as shown below.

R tfl = 20 k0.\\20 kn = 10 kCl

/20 kn\

Let us assume that transistor is operating in the saturation region.

iokn
= Vth = 2 V, ig = 0, vsg = 4 V - 2 V = 2V <* ^ —

id = K{vsg - \V,P\)2 = 0.1mAV~2(2V - \- 1K|)2 = 0.1 mA

Source-Drain KVL can be written as follows: © 2V

4V - - id x 10 kn = 0 -> vsd = 4V - id x 10 kn - 3V
_L 0 4V

Vsg - 21/ > |l/fp|

Vdg ~ vsg ~ vsd = 2 V ~ 3 V = - 1 V < \Vtp\

Our assumptions are correct because vsg > Vt and vdg < \Vtp\.

Therefore, transistor is operating in the saturation region.

270
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.44mA

The given circuit can be simplified using Thevenin theorem as shown below.

Rth = 10 /cftj|20 k£l = 6.6 k£l

Vth - 41/

To analyze a MOSFET circuit must assume a state of operation, enforce conditions, and then verify assumptions.

Let us assume that the transistor is operating in the saturation region. —

= Vth = 2.6 V

For MOSFETs igs = 0 (always).

Gate-Source KVL can be written as shown below:

Solving the above given quadratic equations results in following values:

vgs = 3.12 V or vgs = -2.1 V

Since we assumed the saturation region of operation in which vgs > Vf

This means that only vgs = 3.12 V is the applicable solution.

id = 0.1m/4V'_2(3.12Vr —IK )2

id — 0.44 mA

vd = 10K- (10fen)(£d) = 5.6 V

vgs = 3.12 V > Vt

vgd = 2.61/ - 5.6 V = -3V < Vt

Our assumptions are correct because vgs > Vt and vgd < Vt .

Therefore, the transistor is operating in the saturation region.

271
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.5 f) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - Sa tu ra tio n

It can be observed that i d — 25/M due to constant current source and = OK because source is grounded.

Vgs = vG - vs = vG - OV = vG

Let us assume that the transistor is operating in saturation region.

In saturation, drain current can be given by following equation:

id = ~ Vt ) 2

25nA = ( 0.25mA/V2) ( v G - l ) 2

0 G - l ) z = 0.1

vG = 1.31V -> vcs = 1.31V —0V = 1.31V

Since gate and drain are connected vG = vD

v cd ~ v g ~ v d = OV < VT. Therefore, the transistor is operating in the saturation region.

9.5 g) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : 5 kSl, 3kQ

Drain current can be calculated using following equation:

6V - vD
lD — 1mA 6V

6 V - 1.2V
/?! = -------- -— = 5kfi R
1mA

Let us assume that the transistor is operating in saturation region.

In saturation, drain current can be calculated by following equation:

id — K ( vcs ~ V'i')z

1mA = (0.2SmA/V2) ( v GS - l ) 2

Solving for vGS results in vGS = 3V.

-6V
Since gate current ic = 0 -» vG — OV -> = -3V .

Following equation can be we written at the source node.

*s - (-6 K )
In — — 1mA
r2

6V - 3V
r2 = = 3 kH
1mA
Helpful tip - As an exercise, verify that the transistor is operating in the saturation region.

272
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.6 Operational Amplifier - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 381 - 382 for reference

9.6 a) CORRECT ANSWER: -5 V

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, inverting am plifier gain is given by:

R2 lO k ft
v° = ~ i v' = - m i W = - sv

9.6 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 5 fcfi

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, non-inverting am plifier gain is given by:

R?\ ( R

9.6 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 2.5 V

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, non-inverting am plifier gain is given by:

R2 ( R 2\ 6/cH / 6 k £ l\
v'> = - i va + { 1 + i h = - m w + (1+m } lsv = zsv

9.6 d) CORRECT ANSWER: -35 V

We can solve this problem using principle of superposition as shown below:

Shorting the 6V power source results in following output.

3K-0 0 — v 01
-----------= ---------------- > pen ~ —15 V
io kn so kn 01

Shorting the 3V power source results in following output.

6V — 0 0 — v02
-------------- ----------— -* v [)9 = - 2 0 V
is kn soka 02

v o - v oi + v 02 - - 1 5 V - 2 0 V

v0 = -3 5 V

9.6 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.5 V

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, non-inverting am plifier gain is given by:

R2 ( R
v o = - - j f v a + { l + i r ) vb

SkD. ( 5k tl \
v» = - i o f c a 2^ + ( 1 + i o ^ ) 1K
v0 = 0.5 V
273
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.6 f) CORRECT ANSWER: 4.3 V

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, differential amplifier's operation is given by following equation:

hi e{vb'~v^
_ — - iE1 + iE2 = lE_total
i E2 vT

According to the problem statement:

b :i ~ e 2 = ^ v bi ~ 5K

B2
2iE2 e^5~Vb2^
iE 2 1

2 = e(5-vb2)

Taking the natural logarithm on both sides of the equation:

In 2 = In e^~Vb2^ = 5 —vb2

Rearranging this equation in terms of vb2.

vb2 = 5 - In 2 = 5 - 0.69 = 4.3V

9.6 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.5 V

According to the problem statement:

/ = 6mA VT = IV vbl = SV vb2 = 4.37

Emitter currents of BJT differential amplifiers can be calculated using the formulas provided in the NCEES® FE
Reference Handbook as shown below.

/
lE1 gOfo2~vbl)
1+— VT~

6mA
1e i — e (4 .3 - 5 )
= 4mA
1+

Similarly, we can calculate iE2 as shown below:

I 6mA
= 2mA
^ g(.vbi vb2) 4.3)
1 + — r T— 1+— T ~

It can be observed that, iFA + iE2 = 4mA + 2mA = 6mA — Ie~total

274
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.7 Power Electronics - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 384 for reference

9.7 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Chopper converts DC to DC i.e. constant DC to variable DC or variable DC to constant DC.

Inverter converts DC to AC with desired voltage and frequency.

Rectifier converts AC to DC.

Cyclo-converter changes given AC to AC with desired frequency and amplitude.

9.7 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

Voltage conversion equation of a boost converter is given as follows:

According to the problem statement:

Vout = 600VDC, Vin = 1501/DC, t0N = 10fis, t0FF =? D =?

10[is
topp — 3.33fj.s
10/^s H- t(jpp

T = t0N + t0FF = 10(as + 3.33 fis = 13.33[is

1 1
ing = 75 kHz

9.7 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Voltage conversion equation of a buck converter is given as follows:

1 1
Vout ~ Vin X D — l/^n X X t()N —Vin X "y X t()N — Vin X f X ^ON

According to the problem statement:

Vin = 60 VDC, f = 500Hz, t0N = 1.5ms, lout = ?

Vout = 60 VDC x 500Hz x 1.5ms = 457

275
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.7 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Voltage conversion equation of a buck-boost converter is given as follows:

According to the problem statement: Vin = 60 VDC, f = 500Hz, t0N = 1.5ms Vout =? D=?

( D \ / 0.75 \
^ ^ x ( - T T o ) = 60 x ( - t T o t s ) =

9.7 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Average DC output voltage of a 6-pulse rectifier can be calculated using following equation:

According to the problem statement: Vrms ~ 600V\ n = 6.

6V2 7z
Vdc = Vrmsx ---- s i n - -810 VDC
n 6
9.7 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Average DC output voltage of a 6-pulse rectifier can be calculated using following equation:

According to the problem statement: Krms = 600K, n = 12.

12V2 7T
Vdc - Vrms x ------- s in - r - 839VDC
n 11

9.7 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 183V

Average line-line RMS output voltage of a 3-phase VSI can be calculated using following equation:

276
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 9.8 Instrumentation - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 220 - 224 for reference

9.8 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Transducer converts a physical quantity/value into electrical signal. Microphone (voice), thermocouple (heat)
and photodiode (light) convert different physical quantities into electrical signals.

9.8 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Resistance at a given temperature can be calculated using formula given below:

R t = R0[ 1 + a (T - T0)] = 2 0 0 ft [l + 0.0 039°C,- 1(1 5 ° C )] —2 1 1 0

9.8 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 5000 ft

According to the problem statement, Wheatstone bridge is balanced. Therefore, unknown resistance can be
calculated as shown below:

R, R, R2 1 0 0 0 ft
~ = — ^Rx = ----------- 500 ft = 50 0 0 ft
R 2 Rx x Rx 3 100 ft

9.8 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 200 ft

AR of Wheatstone bridge can be calculated using formula given below:

A/?
~ W ) Vi"
k V X 4R 0.5 V X 4000 n
AR = ---------------= ---------- ---------= 200 ft
Vin 101/

9.8 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Gauge Factor (GF) is given by the following equation which is provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

GF mT-.— = ------
ur ——
AL £
(f)
L

Rearranging this equation in terms of AR results in the following:

AR = GF x s x R = 1.5 x 0.10 X 100i2 = 15 12

9.8 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Voltage across 10 /eft can be calculated as shown below:

10 fcftjllO O /eft
Vioicn = --------r--------------- ----- n---------------— 10 V
10 /eft11100 kn + 25 /cftj|50 kn + 20/eft

V W n = 1-986 V
277
Copyrighted Material © 2020
9.8 g) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Voltage across 10 k£l can be calculated as shown below:

10kn||500/ca
y = ------- --------------- Li----- ------------------- 10V
10 /cfi||500 ka + 25 ka\|50 ka + 20ka

V1Qka = 2.10 V

9.8 h) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Actual current without ammeter can be calculated as shown below:

10V 10V
actual ~ = 4 mA
2 ka + i wi||i ka 2 ka + 0 . 5 ka
Current measured by ammeter is shown below:

m easured — 3.92 mA
2ka + i ka\\i ka + o.o5ka

4 mA —3.92 mA
% error =

278
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 10 - Power Systems
10.1 Power Theory/Single-Phase Power - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 for reference

10.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER : 592 W

Sitp = VlipIlip = P + j Q .

V = 120V Zline = 2 + 2j a Zload = 20 + 5jQ.

V 120 V
^line + Zload (2 + 2j£l) + (20 + SjfL)

I = 5.19/-17.650 A

Sir = V1(pri(p = (120/0°) (5.19/17.65°)VA

P = ScosG = 622 cosl7.65° = 592 W

10.1 b)CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the problem statement:

V = 10/80°V and Z = 5 + ; H = 5.09/11.3° fl.

\ - V jZ - 1.96/68.7° A

10.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

$i(p ~ ^i<ph(p

z = (5 +_/m||r~2/n>
)=2A67.30n
Vi<p = /ly X Z —10/0 A x 2/-67.30n =20/-67.3° V

= V,l y/ry = 200/-67.30VA

10.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 9.19 W

Sup = ^ + ./(?•

Z = 10 -f 5y —2jfl = 10 + 3yn = 10.4/16.7°fl V=10/10°V

/ = - = 0.96/ —6.7 /I

~ = 9.6/147° VA

p = 5 cos 0 = 9.57 cos 16.69° = 9.19 W

279
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

It can be observed that the voltage across 5Q resistor is 5/0° V. Power absorbed by 5 0 resistor can be
calculated as shown below.

10.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Real power delivered by the source can be calculated using following formula:

P = V.
1 sI
vrmsl\ cos 0

According to the problem statement:

v(t) = 120V2 cos(377t + 0°)

120V2
Vphasar = ~ j = ~ V = 120/CT V

Vrms = 120V

Ip fia s o r = ( 1 2 0 / 0 ^ l / ) / 2 0 f i = 6 / 0 ^ A

Irms — 6/4 COS 6 = COS 0 = 1

P = 120V x 6 A x l = 72014/

10.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Real power delivered by the source can be calculated using following formula:

P —VrmsIrms cos 9

According to the problem statement:

v(t) = 120V2 cos(377t + 0°)

Vpliasor = V = 120 / 0^V

K™ - 1201/

XL = jwL = 7 (377)(20 x 1 0 '3) - 7.54/90° a

Iphasor = (120/0° 10/7.54/90° a - 15.9/ —90° A

lrms = 15.94 cos(—90°) = 0

P = 120V x 15.9/4 x 0 = 014/

Inductors do not absorb real power.

280
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Real power delivered by the source can be calculated using following formula:

P — Vrms^rms COS6

According to the problem statement:

v(t) = 120V2 cos(377£ + 0°)

120V2
VphaSo r = — j = - / F V = 120/0^7

Vrms = 1207

Xc ~ ~ ~ (377)(300 x 10“6) ” 8-84/~90 a

Iphasor = (120/0° 7)/8.84/-90°q = 13.5/90° /4

/rms = 13.5/1 cos(90°) = 0

P = 120K x 13.5/1 x 0 = OW.

Capacitors do not absorb real power.

281
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 10.2 Transmission and Distribution/3-Phase Power - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook —Pages 363 - 368 for reference

10.2 a) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - C

According to the problem statement, Van = 120/30° V.

In the given scenario, Vbn — 120/30o-120° V and Vcn = 120/30°+120° V

Line voltages lead phase voltages by 30° and they are also greater by a factor of a/3.

Vab = V3 X 120/30°+300 V= 208/60° V

Vbc = 208/-60°V and Vca = 208/180° V

10.2 b) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - B

In a balanced 3<j>-Y network, phase current can be calculated as shown below.

/
*an y

= l 20/30^ V

Z (p = 20 + 5j O —20.6/14° H

Ian = 5.82/16^ A

10.2 c) C O R R EC T A N S W E R -C

In a balanced 3cJ)-Y network, phase current equals line current.

/ Km
an z 9 + Zz

277 + 0j V
_ (5 + 5)0) + (1 + jO)

lan = 1, = 3 2 .6 / ^ 5 °A

10.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

In a balanced 3<J>-Y network, phase current and load voltage can be calculated as shown below.

Kin- 120/60° V and Z u ne — 2 + jQ. Z ioad — 10 + 10jCl

Ian = 7.4/18! A

Vl0ad = lanXZl0ad= 104/63? V

282
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

In a balanced 3cj)-Y network, line current, voltage and impedance are related as shown below.
v
van
Inn
an rr 17
•lo a d ”r t ' l i n e

v
7 A~ 7
t'load ~ ^line — j a n
‘ an

Zioa,l = f*an1- Ziine = 23.4 + 1.75; fi = 23.5/57° fi

10.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

It is important to note that given network is A-Y.

/
*an y

According to the problem statement:

Vab = 208/30°]/ and Z r = 10 + 5/ O

Van lags Vab by 30° and it is smaller by a factor of V3.

Therefore, Van = 120/0°K

lan = 10.7/-26.5°A

10.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

It is important to note that impedance is connected in a A arrangement and source is Y connected.

Va„ = 120/W

This problem can be solved easily by converting ZA to ZY as shown below:

ZA = 10 + 2j O

ZA = 3 x Zy

10 -I- 2j O
—

Zy = 3.4/11.3°Q

V
i ~ a?i
*an ~
Ly

Inr, —35.3/-11.30 A

283
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER - A

It is important to note that the first load networks is V-connected and the second load network is A-connected.

ZY~\ = 10 + SjO

Z A_2 “ 6 + 9jO

Z& — 3 x Zy

ZY-2 —~ 3 ^ = 2 + 3/0

Z eq-Y = ZY-i\\ZY-2 = (10 + 57)11(2 + 3/)H

Z eq-Y = 2.8/48°Q

10.2 i) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Equivalent delta load can be calculated using this formula:

= 3 x Zeq- Y = 3 x 2.8 - 8.4 0

10.2 j) CORRECT ANSWER - D

3-cf> complex power of a balanced system can be calculated using following formula.

$3p —

i _ ^an
‘ an y
/'lo ad

VU = 120j W Z ioad = 20/0^0

lan- 6/0^ A

S3p = 37p/* = 2160 /O^VA

10.2 k
)CORRECT ANSWER - C
Real power is related to voltage, current and power factor as shown below.

P 200 kW
P = VI cosd -> V = ------ - = >„ ■ = 602K
Icosd (400/i)(0.83)

10.2 I) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Line losses are equal to the difference between power supplied by source and power consumed by load.

P toad = 100 kW

Psource = Vl cos$ = 600V x 200/1 x 0.85 = 102 kW

Pioss = Psource ~ Pload = 102kW - 100 k W = 2 k W

284
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.2 m) CORRECT ANSWER - B

3-4) real power is related to voltage, current and power factor as shown below.

^3tf) COSl9

|A = — 3*
^ 31^ cosd

According to the problem statement:

P34) = \2SkW, 1$ = IL = 300A pf = 0.694

125 kW
^ “ 3 x 300A x 0.694
= 2 00 /

10.2 n) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Voltage between phase A and phase B can be calculated as shown below;

VAb = Va ~V b

VAB = 208/0°/ - 208/120°!/

VAB - 2 0 8 K - (208 cos 120°+7208sin 120°)

VAB = 36Q/-3Q 0/ = 2Q8V3/-3Q 0/

It can be observed that VA - VB is sim ply the line-line voltage of Y-network.

10.2 o) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Voltage between C and N can be calculated as shown below:

Vcn ~ ~~ VN

VCN = 208/120°/ - 0/0°/

VCN = 208/120°/

It can be observed that Vc —VN is sim ply the line-neutral voltage of Y-network.

Helpful tip - Calculate other phase and line voltages of given network.

285
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 10.3 Power Factor - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 for reference

10.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Capacitance required to improve power factor angle from to 02 can be calculated as follows.

P(tand1 —tand2)
C=

Although this formula is not provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, it can be derived from power triangle.

cosdj = 0.75, 0! = 41.4°

cosd2 - 0.90, d2 = 25.8°

200kW(tan4-lA° - tcm25.8°)
C~ (2tt)(60Wz)(6007)2 ~ 586 ^

10.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Reactive power required to improve power factor angle from to 92 can be calculated as follows.

Qc = P(tan61 —tantf2)

cos-61 = 0.60, = 53.1°

cosd2 = 1.00, d2 = 0°

Qc = 100(tan53.1° - tanO°) = 133.1 kVAR

10.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.98 lag

Capacitance required to improve power factor angle from 91 to 02 can be calculated as follows.

P(tand1 - tand2)
C=
/vjy
\Vrm
^s

cosdl = 0.8, d1 = 36.86°

CooVf^ns = P(tand1 —tan$2)

Power factor angle d2 can be calculated as follows:

,(
d2 = tan tantf'L--------— J = 8.33°
P

New power factor = c o s ( i 92) = 0.989

It can be observed that the addition of a capacitor bank helped improve power factor from 0.80 to 0.989.

286
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.82 lag

Sa = 75/dM/cos iQ.85

P1 = 75kVA x Vf\ = 7SkVA x 0.85 = 63.75kW

Q1 = 75kVA x sin (co s'1 0.85) = 39SkVAR

S2 - 3SkVA/cos10.75

P2 - 3SkVA x pf2 = 3SkVA x 0.75 = 26.2SkW

Q2 = 35kVA x sin (co s'10.75) = 23.1kVAR

S tota i = + 52 = 90/cH/ + j62,6SkVAR = 109.67kVA! 34.84°

Ptotal 90kW
Vftntni —------- —----------- ” 0.82 laqqinq
S tota i 109kVA y

10.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Capacitance required to improve power factor angle from 61 to 02 can be calculated as follows.

P(tand1 - tand2)
C=
(xiV1
UJVr m s

cos d1 — 0.85

dl = co s'1 0.85 = 31.78°

cos #2 = 0.95

d2 = cos-1 0.95 = 18.19°

P3$ = 375 kW

P34) 375 kW
_____
PH = ~ ~ = — — - 125 W -

125W (tan 31.87 ° - t a n 18.19°)

Cl(|) (2tt)(60/j
(2 tt)(60//z )(120102

C1(j, — 6.7 mF = 7 rnF

287
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 10.4 Voltage Regulation/Voltage Drop - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 for reference

10.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Voltage regulation can be calculated using formula given below.

Vsm -Vsf i 650 V - 600 V

VsJi 600 V

10.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Ideal transformers are lossless. Therefore, for an ideal transformer the no-load voltage is equal to full load
voltage and voltage regulation is zero.

10.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER : 7%

Voltage regulation can be calculated using formula given below,

V R - ^s,nl ~ ^s’f l - a ^s'*1

Vsji VSlfi

10 kVA
Is,rated — /inn./ = 25 4 pf = 0.85 {d = 31.78 ) phase angle = -31.78
400V

= Vs + ls,rated ( #eq + }Xeq) = 427.8 V

VP ./
a ~ vs,f\ 427.81/ -4001/
V.R = -;------- = ------- T7T7- ------ x 100% = 6.98% = 7%
Vsj i 400V

10.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

No-load voltage rating can be calculated using voltage regulation formula given below.

Vs.nl ~ Vs Jl
V.R —
Vs.fl

Vsnl —240 V
0.05 ------------
240 V

VSlni = 240V + 240 V x 0.05 - 252 V

10.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Voltage regulation can be calculated using formula given below,

Ks.ni ~~ V5jl
V.R =
Vs.fl

In the case of leading power factor Vsj [ > Vsni .Therefore, V.R < 0 .
288
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Voltage drop on feeder and branch circuits occur due to effective impedance of the cable which consists of
resistance and reactance as shown below:

Zeff = R c o s d + X sin d

Note - Zeff also depends on phase angle. Unity power factor will resultin Zeff —R.

Helpful tip - All voltage drop formulas are based on Ohm's law V = IRbutdepending on accuracy requirements
and circuit configuration, they can get complicated. Some of the commonly used voltage drop formulas are
given below:

^drop,approx ^R COS 0 + IX sin 0

^(/rop-l<p “ 21une {R COS 0 + X sill 6) 2 X Vdrop,approx

Vdrop—3<p ^^hine(.R COS 0 -(- X sill 0) y[3 X Vdrop,approx

Vd r o p , exact = Vs + htneiR COS 0 + X Sill 0) - J[VS2 - Iline(R COS 0+ jX Sin 0) 2

These formulas can be found in IEEE® Std 141™ (Red Book).

10.4 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Total voltage drop (2-way) in a single-phase system can be calculated using following formula.

Vdrop-l<p = 2 l lin e (R COS 0 + X sin 0)

According to the problem statement:

XL = 0.0630/1000/t R = 1.20/1000f t Iline = 20A

0 = cos"1 0.85 = 31.7°

One-way circuit length is 500 ft.

Therefore, XL - 0.0630/2 = 0.03150 and R - 1.20/2 - 0.60

Vch-op-Kp = 2 x 204 x (0.60 cos 31.7° + 0.0315 sin 31.7°) = 40 x 0.52 = 21 V

Note: XL ~ 0.0630/1000f t and R = 1.2ft/1000/£ could have been used directly because the total (2-way)
circuit length is 500/t x 2 = 1000/t. With this approach, the voltage drop equation would have to be modified
as follows: VdroPi,approx ~ IR cos 0-1-IX sin 0.

289
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 10.5 Transformers - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 for reference

10.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - 8

Vs = Is x RS = 1A x 12ft - 1 2 V

Vv 50 Vv 50
= a = _ -* j j y = Y - * VP = 12VX50 = 600 v

10.5 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Secondary current can be calculated using the formula given below:

S<p = Sp ^ S s = Vsl s -> 15 kVA = Vs Is

ISkVA
Is = - — — = 125 A
s 120 V

10.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER: 4.16 A

Secondary current can be calculated using the formula given below:

S«, 5 kVA Is 10 L L
1207= 4164 Tp = a = T - ' r = a = ^ i l 6 A
10.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 25000 ft

Transformer primary and secondary impedances are related by formula shown below.

Zv = a2Zs = 502 x lOH = 25000H

10.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 50 ft

Zp - a Zs -* Zs - —2

Zp = 10kn \|10 kD. = 5 /eft a = 10

Zp Z„ 5 ka
zs = - ^ ~ =— = son
s a2 102 100
10.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The transformer connection shown in the problem statement represents a 'Wye-Wye' configuration.

10.5 g) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The transformer connection shown in the problem statement represents a 'Delta-Delta' configuration.

10.5 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The transformer connection shown in the problem statement represents a 'Wye-Delta' configuration.
290
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 10.6 Motors & Generators - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 363 - 368 for reference

10.6 a) CORRECT ANSWER: C

AC motor poles can be calculated using the formula given below.

120/ 120/ (120)(60 Hz)

n = --------- > p = ------ —-----------------— = 4
p ns (1800 rpm)

10.6 b) CORRECT ANSWER: C

Synchronous speed of AC motor can be calculated using the formula given below.

120/ (120X60 Hz)

n.. = ------ = ------------------- — 3600 rpm
p 2 w

10.6 c) CORRECT ANSWER: B

120 /
P

120/ (120)(50 Hz) _

ns,50Hz = - y - = ---------------------------------- 4- 1500 rpm

120/ (120 I/)(60 Hz)

ns,60Hz = -------= -----------o----------= 3600 rpm
V 2

ns,60Hz “ ns,50Hz “ 3600 rpm - 1500 rpm = 2100 rpm

10.6 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 5.5%

120/ (120)(60)
ns = ------ = ------- -------= 3600 rpm n — 3400 rpm
p 2

nr - n
s = _J--------= --------
3600 - 3400
-------= 5 ,5 %
ns 3600

10.6 e) CORRECT ANSWER: D

120/ (120)(60)
nq —------- = -------------- 1800 rpm
p 4

ns
1800 —n
0 . 1 = ------------------ —
1800
n - 1800 - 0.1 x 1800 = 1620 rpm

291
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.6 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Synchronous speed and slip of AC motor are given by following formula.

120 / ( 120 )( 60 ) _
ns —------ —------- -------= 3600 rpm
p 2

Ur —nt71 3600 —nm

s = ------------- > 1.5 = — — —------- > nm —ns —ns x 1.5 = —1800 rpm
ns 3600 m s s r

Since the direction of motor's rotation is opposite to the synchronous speed, motor is 'braking'.

10.6 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

In the given scenario, slip is -0.5.

n. —nm 3600 —nm

s = ------------- > -0.5 - — ———------- >nm = ns - ns x (-0 .5 ) = 1.5?is = 5400 rpm
ns 3600

Induction motor operates as generator when its slip becomes negative. In the given case, rotor is turning in the
same direction as synchronous rotation at a higher speed, therefore motor is 'generating'.

10.6 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

An induction motor acts as a generator when rotor is mechanically turned at speed greater than synchronous
speed. As noted in the previous solution, slip also becomes negative in such scenarios.

10.6 i) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Armature voltage (Ea) of a generator can be calculated using following equation.

£« = VT + la(Ra + ; X L) = VT + Ia( 0 + j X L) = VT + jXLIa (since R = 0)

According to problem statement, line-line voltage is 480V.

480K
VT = — — = 211V/0°V
v3
100kVA
Ia = — ---------- 120.28A
V3 x 480V

pf = cos_1(0.90) = 25.84°

la - 120.28/ —25.84° A

xL = iyn = i/90°n

Ea = 211V/0°V + ;(120.28/—25.84° y4)(l/90°n) - 329.42 + ;108.25 V

Ea = 3471//phase

292
Copyrighted Material © 2020
10.6 j) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Synchronous generator's armature voltage is given by following equation:

Ea = VT + la{Ra + ) X L)

In case of constant power factor, increasing armature current (/a) will increase the voltage drop across jXsIa
but Ea will remain unchanged because VT will also reduce proportionately.

10.6 k) CORRECT ANSWER: 41.4kW

Efficiency of a machine is given by following equation:

Pout
n=
p.
'in

Pout (50 x 746)W

P in = _2“* = 1 = 41.4 kW
m 7] 0.90

10.6 I) CORRECT ANSWER: 4.94Nm

Mechanical torque developed by machine can be calculated using following equation:

Pm = Tcom = T x 2 x 7r x 1200

Pm (5 0 X 746)14/ AnAti
j —----------------- —-------------------— 4,94jVj7i
2X7TX 1200 7540 radfs

10.6 m) CORRECT ANSWER: 173A

Electrical input power to DC m otor's armature circuit is given by following equation:

Pin = V r i a

Arm ature current !a can be calculated using following equation:

Pin 4-lAkW
' « = v ; = - i m r = 17U

10.6 n) CORRECT ANSWER: 215V

Internal voltage Va of DC motor can be calculated using following equation:

P
rm = V
va ‘Ia

Pm (50 x 746)W
V„ = — = ------------- -— = 2157
fl la 1737

10.6 o) CORRECT ANSWER: 0.14/2

Vr
vI - V + I’aiya
ya ~ R

VT - V a 2407 - 2157
Ra = ... P. = ------ ------------= 0.14/3
Ia 173A
293
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 11 - Electromagnetics
11.1 Electrostatics - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 355 - 356 for reference

11.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Electrostatic force between point charges can be calculated using the formula given below.

P _ Q\Q2
4 nsr2

(5 n C )(1 0 n C )
p ------------------------------------------- -
4/r x 8.85 x 10" ^ F m " 1 x ( V s )

F - 90 nN

11.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Electrostatic force between point charges can be calculated using formula given below.

p — ^ 1^ 2
4nr2e
(10 x 10~6C )(1 0 0 x 10” 6C )
F ~ 47r(0.01m )2 x (8.85 x l O ^ F m ” 1)

F ~ 90 kN

11.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Electric field intensity can be calculated as shown below.

• , ®2 (
4ner21 4ner2 1
— Qi . 0.2 ^
47is r 2 Aner2
-g _ / Qi__ Q2 \ .
\4ner2 4ner2)

50nC —50nC \

\47Tf(V T) 47r£(VT) /

\E\ = 900 V/m

Note that if both charges were of same polarity, the total electric field intensity would have been zero.

Electric field lines diverge from positive charges and the converge on to negative charges.

294
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.1 d) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - B

Electric field intensity of a sheet charge with density p s can be calculated as shown below.

—
E =
Ps
— k
,
2e

We can use the principle of superposition as shown below.

! = £ * -£ (-* )

E = —k
8

Note: If both electric plates were of same polarity, the total electric field intensity would have been zero.

11.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Electric field intensity of a line charge with density p can be calculated as shown below.

E=^ -a r
2 nsr

We can use the principle of superposition as shown below.

~
E = 2 ^ h -^ + 2 ^ k ) ^ = 1-07 *

Helpful tip - Pay special attention to the direction of vectors while performing addition and subtraction.

11.1 f) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - D

It is important to understand the difference between work, energy, and force.

Work done on a point charge in moving it from pi to p2 in the presence of an electrical field is given by:

Wl2 = -Q
f PzE.M
j pi = - ft
f p2 Q i Q 'i fP2 Q2

1^ 21= r 21 = V ( 2 - 0 ) 2 + ( 0 - 0 ) 2 + ( 0 - 0 ) 2 = 2 m

w 12 = 9 x i o ~ 3y

11.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Work and energy have same units of measurements.

Potential energy of given system is equal to the amount of work required to keep charges apart as shown below.

W, 2 = T ^ ~ >12 = V(1 - 0 )2 + (0 - I ) 2 + (0 - 0)2 = 1/2

47r£Ti2

W12 = 31.9 m;
295
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Potential energy of system 'A' can be calculated as W12 = Q1 Q2/4nzr 12 = 45/

Potential energy of system 'B' can be calculated as Ws4 — Q^Qt/^nerw ~ 45J

It can be observed that potential energies of both systems are equal.

11.11) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The amount of work required to reduce spacing will be equal to the difference in system energy at lm and 1cm.

System energy at lm charge spacing can be calculated as W12 = QiQ2/4ne(lm) = l . 215 x 1C)~6J

System energy at 1cm charge spacing can be calculated as WA2 - Q1Q2/4ns(lcni) ~ 1.215 x 10_4y

The amount of work required is equal to energy difference between two systems.

A = (1.215 x 1CT4;) - (1.215 x 10“6/) = 1.202 x 10“4y

11.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Work done by an external agent in moving a charge Qfrom PI to P2 in an electric field is given by:

pi

Note that charge is moved along y-axis and electric field is along x-axis.

pi

Dot product of perpendicular vectors is always 0 ax. ay = 0

Therefore, the work done on point charge is 0. W = 0

11.1 k) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Potential difference (V) can be calculated using the formula given below.

V
E = —- * V - E x d
d

1/ = 20001/771” 1 x lm = 20007

11.11) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Potential difference (V) can be calculated using formula given below.

V = E x d = 10001/m-1 x 200??i = 200 kV

296
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 11.2 Magnetostatics - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 355 - 356 for reference

11.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Force on a current carrying conductor in uniform magnetic field can be calculated using following equation.

F = l l xB

Since we are only interested in the magnitude of force, we can take modulus as shown below.

\F\ = ILBsinO

|F| = 2A x 2m x 0.57si?i30° = 1 N

11.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER : 5/j/

Energy stored (£) in a magnetic field can be calculated using following equation.

\iH2
E= x Vol
2

E = 5nJ

11.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER : 11.5°

Force on a current-carrying conductor can be calculated using following formula:

F = IL x B = ILBsina

11.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to Faraday's Law, voltage induced in a coil can be calculated as shown below.

1.4 Wb
v --- —20— -----

v = -141/

Helpful tip - Review vector and integral form of Faraday's Law given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

297
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.15 \iV

According to Faraday's Law, voltage induced in a coil can be calculated as shown below.

di N 2\i A di (50)2 x 4n x 10_7Wm_1 x 2cm2 100mA —50?n4

v ^ L — ^ — r— — = -— ------------ —----------------------- x ---------- -----------= 0.15 \iV
dt I dt 20cm Is

11.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 500 jxT

Magnetic flux density can be calculated using Ampere's Law as shown below.

B Bf
H= — —<vdl = L nc
H \i J

!enc = n i = (50)(1 A) = 50 A

f d l = 2nr = 2n{2 cm) circumference of torus

B=— — = 500 \iT

2n x 2 cm

11.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER : 0. 4 \iT

This problem can be solved using Ampere's Law and principle of superposition.

Magnetic flux density at point A due to first wire is given as:

Bx = ~ ~ = 0.2 \iT
2nr

Magnetic flux density at point A due to second wire is given as:

/|J
B2 —~~~ = 0.2 \xT
2nr

Adding the two magnetic fields result in Bnet = B1 + B2 = 0.4 \iT

Note: In this case magnetic fields add due to current direction. If current were flowing in opposite direction,
magnetic fields would have cancelled each other. Apply right hand rule to determine magnetic field direction.

11.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 100 kA

Current passing through wire can be calculated using Ampere's Law.

B=
2nr
2nrB
I =

(27r)(0.2m)(0.1T)
I = - , = 100 kA
4n x 10 7Hfm

Helpful tip - Review vector and integral form of Ampere's Law given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

298
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 11.3 Electrodynamics - Maxwell's Equations - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 59 - 60, 368 for reference

11.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Divergence of an electric field can be calculated using Del (F) operator as shown below.

div E - V.E

— ( d d d \
div E = — i + + ~ r k ) ■(3;d + 2y2j + xk )
\dx dy dz )

— d d ~ d
div E = — 3x + — 2y + ~—x
dx dy dz

div E = 3 + 4y

Helpful tip - Review vector operators i.e. gradient, curl and divergence given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

11.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

__
— _ _ — /a ( d ad ad\ ,
iv D = 17. D = I -=—i + —/H—
div ( xyi + yzj + xz2k )
\dx dy dz )
d*y

— d d d
div D = — xy + ~~yz + —~xz —y + z + 2xz
dx dy dz

11.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to Gauss' Law, electric flux over a closed surface can be calculated as shown below.

Qenc
(p = (p E. ds =
£

+1 nC —2 nC + 3 nC + 1 nC
V = 8.85 X 1 0 -« C/Vm = 339 Vm

Helpful tip - Review vector and integral form of Gauss' Law given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

11.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Qenc Ql C?2
(p = 9 E. ds =
£ 8.85 x 10~12C/Vm
2

Q l= 3 ^ X47r( i ) = 3.76xlO -C

<?2 = - 5 M^ x 4 „ ( 4 ) 2 = - 5 6 . 5 X 1 0 - ^

(p - -5963 Vm

299
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

We can calculate the value of "a" by taking divergence of magnetic field B.

divB = V.B

— ( a d da d a \
div ” = i — i + ~~~j +
iv B k) (3 axi + 2vi - 2zk)
\dx dydy dz)

_ d d d
div B = — 3ax + —~2y — —2z
dx dy dz

div B = 3a + 2 —2 = 3a

In order for B to qualify as a magnetic field, 3a = 0 -> a — 0

Helpful tip - Divergence of a magnetic field isalwaysequal to zero.

11.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to Maxwell's equations, divergence of a magnetic field is always equal to zero.

d i v A = V.A

— d _ d d ,
div A — - —2x2 + ~ y + — 3z 2 = 4x + 1 + 6z
dx dy dz

div B = V.B

— d _ d d
div B - — 2y + — 3x—— 2xy — 0
dx dy dz

Divergence of B is zero. Therefore, B can be a magnetic field vector.

11.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The rate of change of magnetic field B is equal to the curl of electric field strength vector E.

d_
V x E = ~—B
dt

E = 2yzi + 3x2yj + x2y2k

d— /dEz dEy\ # /dEx dEz\ /dEy dEx\

dt ^ \ dy dz J* V dz dx)* V dx dy/

— B = ~2 x2yi - (2 y - 2xy2)j —(6 xy - 2z)k

300
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The rate of change of magnetic field B is equal to the curl of electric field strength vector E.

— d—
V x E = — -B
dt

B — —cos2(3 t) k

d_
V x E ——— B
dt

- d
V x E = -—cos2 31 k
dt

V x E = - 6 cos (3t) sin (3t)fc

11.3 i) SOLUTION

Column A Column B

Gauss' Law for Electric Fields jiE .d l = —ffs f t .dS

Gauss' Law for Magnetic Fields § H .d l = Ienc + ffs ™ .dS

Faraday's Law $ svD.dS = fffv pdv

Ampere's Law § svB.dS = 0

11.3 j) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to Maxwell's equation, divergence of a magnetic field is zero i.e. V. B = 0. Therefore, the total
magnetic flux emitting from a closed surface is also equal to zero. This is in contrast with the electric field. In the
case of an electric field, net flux is directly proportional to the electric charge contained inside the object.

301
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 11.4 Electrodynamics - Wave Propagation - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 369 for reference

11.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

2n 2n n
^ “ T “ 20 ~ 10

V(d) = V +ejPd + V-e-Wd

1/(100) = K V 107r + v - e - i W T i

Helpful tip - Review transmission line voltage equation given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

11.4 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

2n 2n n
^ ’ T " 20 "To

I{d) = l +eWd + r e - W d

+ _ v+ __ V~
z0 Zo

1(100) = j ~ ( V+eJW7r ~ V~e-i10n)

Helpful tip - Review transmission line current equation given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

11.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Comparing the given sinusoidal equation of magnetic field strength H = 10 cos(108t — 4 z ) a x A/m with the
general equation of magnetic field H = H0 cos(&>t —fiz)axA/m shows that co - 10Qrad/s and /? = 4.

co = 2 nf -> f —co/2tt Hz

108

11.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

As observed in the previous solution, /? = 4 for given electromagnetic wave.

According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

(3 — 2n/A -> X — 2n/fi

2n 7i

302
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Comparing the given sinusoidal equation of electric field intensity E = 12 cos(2 x 109t — fiz)ax A/m with
the general equation of electric field E = E0 cos(cot —j3z)axA/m shows that co — 2 X 10 rad/s.

co = 2 n f

f = co/2tcHz

2 x 109 109
f ----- = ----- Hz
2n n

Time period is related to frequency through following equation:

1 71
r = 7 “ To95
In one time-period, electromagnetic wave will cover a distance equal to its one complete wavelength A.

50% of A will be covered in T/2 time i.e. tt/(2 x 109) s

11.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

U
X = 1

As calculated in previous problem, / = 109/7r Hz and U = 3 x 108m/s (speed of light).

3 x 108m/s
A - — 7^9--------= 0.37T m
— Hz
n

303
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 11.5 Transmission Lines - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 369 for reference

11.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 0. 5 /6.91Q

Reflection coefficient can be calculated using following formula.

p- ^ ~
Z{ + Z0

n _ ((300 + 50; ft) — 100 ft)

F (300 + 50; ft) + 100 ft

r = 0.5 phase 6.91°

Helpful tip - Review transmission line reflection coefficient equation given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

11.5 b)CORRECT ANSWER - C

Reflection coefficient can be calculated using following formula.

^ _ Z t- Z 0_ (5 0 0 + 25j ft) - 50 ft
r - z ~i ~ ji _ Z o ~ (500 + 25; ft ) + 50 ft

T — 0.818 phase 0.57°

1 + iri 1 + 0.818
SWR = ----- — = -------------= 10
l-\r\ 1 - 0 .8 1 8

Helpful tip - Review transmission line standing wave ratio equation given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

11.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Reflection coefficient is given by following formula.

Zt + Z0

Characteristic impedance can be calculated using following formula.

L
Z0 - - = 100 ft

According to the problem statement, f = 0.5

Z, - Z 0 Z , ~ 100
0.5 = - ------- = - ---------
Zt + ZG Z, + 100

Zz = 300 ft

304
Copyrighted Material © 2020
11.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Z0 = 2000 Z{ = 5000

500 + y'200 tan(/? x 100)

Zl?l(100) = 200
200 + y'500 tan(/? x 100)

tan

5000\
Zfn(lOO) = 200 0

11.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Standing wave ratio can be calculated using following equation.

Reflection coefficient can be calculated using following formula.

1 Z{ - 250 O
3 “ zT+ 250 0

Z{ = 5000

11.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Standing wave ratio can be calculated using following equation.

1 + |r|
SWR = ^ i n

_5 —i _5 —1 __ 4 __2
~ S+7~~ 5 + 1 ~ 6 ~ 3

305
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 12 - Control Systems
12.1 Block Diagrams - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 226 - 227 for reference

12.1 a)
'
CORRECT ANSWER----- —
l+ H (s)G i(s)G 2(s)

Let us define error E(s) as E(s) = R(s) —H(s)Y(s )

KCs) = E{ s )G1(s )G2(s ) = (fi(s) - H(s)Y(s))G1(s)G2(s) = R(s)G1(s)G2(s) - H(s)Y(s)G1(s)G2(s)

Y(s) + H(s)Y(s)G1(s)G2(s) = R(s)G1(s)C2(s) -> Y (s)( 1 + H(s)G1(s)G2(s)) = R(s)G1(s)G2(s)

Y(s) G1( s)G2( s)

R(s) 1 + tf(s)G1(s)G2(s)

Note: Closed-loop transfer function can also be calculated using the classical negative feedback control system
model relations given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

12.1 b)CORRECT ANSWER - H(s)G1(s)G2(s)

As mentioned above, closed-loop transfer function of given control system can be given as follows.

Y(s) Gl (s)G2(s)
R(s) 1 + tf(s)G1(s)G2(s)

The open-loop transfer function of this control system is H(s)G!(s)G2(s).

25+4
12.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - ------ r
' s (s + 4 )

Equivalent transfer function of control blocks arranged in parallel configuration can be calculated as follows:

T = (7](s) + £ 2(s)

1 S -b 3
r = - + —TT
5 S+ 4
(5+ 4) + 5 2s H" 4
^ s(s + 4) s(s + 4)

s+3
12.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - ------ -
' s (s + 4 )

Equivalent transfer function of control blocks arranged in series configuration can be calculated as follows:

T = Gi(s)G2(is)

T = ( - \(s + _ 5+ 3
V 5 /^ +4j s(s + 4)

306
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Let us define error £(s) as E(s) —R(s) —H(s)Y(s)

Y(s) = fe£(5)G1(s)

K(s) = k(R(s) - K ( s )/ / ( s )) C 1(s) -> y^s) = fc/?(s)G1(s ) —kY(s)H(s')G1(s')

r ( s ) + /cK(s)//(s)G 1(s ) = /c/?(s)G1(s ) -> K ( s ) ( l 4- /c//(s)G1( s ) ) = fc/?(s)G1(s)

kG1(s)
K(s) = fi(s)
1 + fcG1(s)//(5)

R(s)G1(s)G2(s)~N(s)G1(s)G2(s)+L(s)G2(s)
12.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - 7(s) =
l+GiC^CzCs)

Let us define error E(s) as E(s) = /?(s) —( Y(s) 4- N ( 5))

Y(s) = (£ (s)C 1(s) + L ( s ) ) G 2( s ) = [fi(s) - (KCs) + A/(s ) ) ] G 1 ( s ) G 2 ( s ) + i( s ) C 2(s)

y(s) = fl(s)Ga(s)G2(s) - Y(s)G1(s)G2(s) - N(s)G1(s)G2(s) + L(s)G2(s)

Y(s) + Y(s)G1(s)G2(s) = R( s)G1Cs)G2( s) - N(s)Gt (s)G2(s) + L(s)G2(s)

l?(5)G1C5)C2(5) - N(s)G1(s)G2(s) + L(s)G2(s)

Y(s) =
1 4- GuCs^Cs)

12.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER -

Let us define error E(s) as E(s) = R(s) —K(s)

Y(s) = E(s)(G1(s) - C2(s) + G3( s))G4( s)

Y(s) = ( R(s) - J'(s))(G 1(s) - G2(s) + G3(s))G4(s)

r(s ) + Y(s) (g4(s)(C 1(s) - G2(s) + G3(s))) = fi(s)G4(s)(G1(s) - G2(s) + C3(s))

^(s) ( l + G4( s )(G 1( s ) —G2( s ) + G3(s ) )) = fi(s)G4(s)(G1(s) —G2( s ) + G3(s))

yfs) = r f - l G4Q )(G i (s ) - G 2( s ) + G3Q ))

( l + G4( s )(G1( s ) - G2( s ) + G3( s )))

I^ f) , G4(5)(G1( s ) - C2(s) + G3(s))

fi(s) {S> l + G4(s)(Ga( s ) - G 2(s) + G3(s))

307
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER--------------------------------
' 1 + (7 1 (6 )G 2 ( 5 ) - W ( s ) + G 1 (5 )G 2 ( 5 )C 3 ( s )

Let us define error E(s) as £(s) = R(s) —/(s)

Y(s) = E W G & W z i s ) + H ( s ) n s ) + £ ( s ) G 1( s ) C 2( s ) G 3 ( s )

Y(s) = (R(s) - Y ( s ) ) G 1(s )G 2(s ) + H ( s ) Y ( s ) + (fi(s) - i'(s))G 1(s)G2(s)G3(s)

r(s ) = R(s)Gj (s)G2(s) - K( s )G1( s )G2( s ) + H (s)K(s) + K(s)G a(s)G2(s)G3(s) - K(s)G1(s)G2(s)G.,(s)

y(s) + Y(s)Gj (s)G2(s) - H(s)Y(s) + r(s)G 1(s)G2(s)G3(s) = /?(s)(Gx(s)G2(s) + G1(s)G2(s)G3(s))

y ( s ) ( l + G1( s )G 2( s ) - H (s ) + G1( s )G 2( s )G 3( s ) ) = f i ( s ) ( G 1(s )G 2( s ) + Ga(s )G 2(s )G 3( s ) )

. . _ , G1(5 )G 2(5 ) + G1(5 )G 2(S)G 3(5 )

W 1 + C ^ G . O ) - W (s) + G1( s )G 2( s )G 3( s )

y(s) = G1(5)G2(5) + G1(5)G2(5)G3(5)

R (s) t'SJ 1 + Ga (s)G2(5) - H (s) + Gt (s)G2 (s)G3 (5)

308
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 12.2 Bode Plot - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 373 - 374 for reference

12.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Slope of given Bode plot changes from 0 dB/decade to -20 dB/decade at a) — 10 rad/s.

Therefore, a pole must exist at oj — 10 rad/s.

Open-loop transfer function can be expressed as follows:

K is ;
G(s) = --- ------ r
(to+1)
Constant term can be calculated as shown below:

| G O ) L = i = 14 dB.

20 log(AT) = 14 -> K = 5

K
G(s) =

5 50
G(s) =
( t o + 1) 5 + 10

12.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Slope (S) of given Bode plot can be calculated as shown below:

-20dB-20dB
S = ----------- -------- = “ 40 db/dec

This implies that there must be a second order pole at origin.

Open-loop transfer function can be expressed as follows:

s*

Constant term can be calculated as shown below:

\G(j<o)L=i =20dB.

20 log(K) - 20 ^ K - 10

10
sz

309
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Slope of given Bode plot changes from 0 dB/decade to +20 dB/decade at w = 10 rad/s.

Therefore, zero exists at co — 10 rad/s.

Slope of given Bode plot changes from +20 dB/decade to 0 dB/decade at oj = 100 rad/s.

Therefore, a pole must exist at co = 100 rad/s.

Open-loop transfer function can be expressed as follows:

C (M d B
G (s) =

Constant term can be calculated as shown below:

20
|G (/")L= i = 0dB.

201og(/O = 0 -> K = 1

s + 10
0
0.001 10 100 1000
G (s) =

Slope of given Bode plot changes from 0 dB/decade to +40 dB/decade at co = 0.1 rad/s.

Therefore, two zeros must exist at o> = 0.1 rad/s.

Slope of given Bode plot changes from +40 dB/decade to +20 dB/decade at od = 10 rad/s.

Therefore, a pole must exist at a) = 10 rad/s.

Slope of given Bode plot changes from +20 dB/decade to 0 dB/decade at 6J = 100 rad/s.

Therefore, a pole must exist at co — 100 rad/s.

Open-loop transfer function can be expressed as follows:

Constant term can be calculated as: 20 log(AT) — 20 -» K = 10

310
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Transfer function can be rearranged into standard form as shown below:

G(s)= 1 - 1 - ^
( 4 s + 100) 100( _ 4 | + 1 ) ^ +1

It can be observed that there is no phase shift at 2.5 rad/s, -45-degree phase angle at 25 rad/s and -90-degree
phase angle at 250 rad/s. Poles that are not located at origin impact Bode log phase plot in this manner.

12.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER: -6 0 dB

Transfer function can be rearranged into standard form as shown below:

50(5 + 2) = (50)(2)(s/2 + 1) = / 1 \ (f+l)

ls) (s + 100 )(s -I- 1000) 100(s/100 -I- l ) 1000 (s /1000 + 1 ) Vioooj (_^L_ + ^ (__L_ + i )

Transfer function has poles at s — —100, s = —1000 and a zero at s ~ —2.

Gain = 20 log(l/1000) = -6 0 dB

12.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER : 20 d B

, , 100(5 + 1) 100(s -I-1) , s (s + 1)

fl(s) = , = 77—7 .j ^ = ( 10 )'
5 (5 + 1 0 ) 1 0 5 (5 /1 0 +1 ) )

Gain = 201og(10) = 20 dB

Transfer function has poles at 5 = 0, s = —10 and a zero at 5 = —1.

12.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER : -3 3 .9 d B

Transfer function can be rearranged in standard form as shown below:

1005 100s 100s

H(s) =
(s2 + 150s + 5000) (s + 50)(s + 100) 50(s/50 + l)100(s/100 + 1)

1 s
H(s) =
5 0 (50 + 1){400 + 1)

Gain = 20 log = —33.9 dB. Transfer function has poles at s = -50, s = —100 and a zero at s — 0.

311
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 12.3 System Stability/Frequency Response - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 226 - 227 for reference

12.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The stability of a control system depends on the location of its poles.

12.3 b) CORRECT ANSWERS - A, C

Control system is considered stable if bounded-input results in bounded-output (BIBO). Control system is also
considered stable if its poles are in the left half of s-plane.

12.3 c) CORRECT ANSWERS - C

A control system with non-repeated roots on imaginary axis is considered marginally stable. As poles approach
origin, the stability of control system decreases.

12.3 d) CORRECT ANSWERS - B

A control system with repeated roots on imaginary axis is considered unstable.

12.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

PM — 180° + £G(jtoodB) o)odB's ^ e frequency at which |G(/to)| = 1.

■ (* W + 1) ' 1 " " odB ■ 0

*-G(jo>odii) = -2 ta n 1 ( i) 0dB = -2 (0 ) = 0

PM = 18 0° + £G(ja)0dB) = 18 0 ° + 0° = 180'

12.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

GM — —20 log|G(/w180)|

1
G ( s ) — --------------T-r - > t - G U t d ) — — 4 tan w
(s + l ) 4 v

/.G(j (o180) — —18 0 ° -> a G( j m 180) — —4 tan 1 <^iao ~ —18 0° -» o)180 = 1

1 1 1

312
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER - s 2 + 3s + 2 + ks = 0

According to classical negative feedback control system diagram given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

= fl(5)/t( ( > + !)(* + 2 ) )

(s + l) (s + 2)

R(s)ks
s 2 + 3s + 2 + /cs
The closed loop characteristic equation is s2 + 3s + 2 + fts = 0

12.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER: -8 / 3

The closed-loop characteristic equation is 2s5 + 3s4 + 7s2 + 5 + 10 = 0

Routh Array can be developed using formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook (version 9.5 and older).

s5 2 2
s4 3 7
s3 3 x 2 -2 x 7 8
b, =
1 3 3

The given system is unstable because b1 is negative.

Note - Although Routh-Array formulas are not provided in latest NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, it is an
important technique in the context of control system stability.

12.3 i) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The closed loop characteristic equation of given system is 2s4 + 3s3 + s2 + s + l = 0

Routh Array can be developed using formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook (version 9.5 and older).

s4 2 1 1
s3 3 1 0
s2 h —3 - 2 _ 1 h —
3-2x0
11 -
1 3 3 D2 ~ ^
i —3 x 1
s ci - ! - 8 -
_______3

The given system is unstable because is negative.

Note - Although Routh-Array formulas are not provided in latest NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, it is an
important technique in the context of control system stability.

313
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.3 j) CORRECT ANSWER : 0 < k < 5

The closed loop characteristic equation of given system is 3s3 + 5s2 + (/c + 10)s + Sk = 0

Routh Array can be developed using formula given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook (version 9.5 and older).

s3 3 k+10
s2 5 5k
s 5(fc + 10) —3 x Sk
b' = 5
s° Sk

For the system to remain stable all entries in first column should have same sign (positive).

S(k + 10) ~ 3 x 5/c

—--------- >0-+ k< 5
5
5/c > 0 -> /c > 0

By combining both conditions we obtain stability range as 0 < k < 5

Note - Although Routh-Array formulas are not provided in latest NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, it is an
important technique in the context of control system stability.

314
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 12.4 Controller performance - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 227 - 229 for reference

12.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER : 20 ( l -

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, output y(t) of a 1st order system can be expressed as follows:

y(£) ~ + KM ^1 —e ~rj

According to the problem statement: K = 4, t — 2, M = 5, y0 = 0.

y(t) = y0e“f/T + K M ( l - = (0)e~f + (4)(5) ( l - e~§) = 20 ( l - e ~ ^

( (f~3n
12.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER : 4 ( l - e 2 J

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, output y(t) of 1st order system with delay is expressed as follows:

/ (t-0)\
y ( 0 —yoe + KM ( 1 —e r J

According to the problem statement: 6 = 3, K = 4, r = 2, M — 1, y 0 — 0.

/ (t-0 )\ (t-3 ) / (t-3 )\ / (t-3 )\

y (t) = y0e~(t~8y T + K M l l - e r J=(0)e 2 + (4 )(l)fl~ e 2~J = 4 ( l - e 2J

12.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER : 2

By comparing the given transfer function with standard second-order control system model provided in NCEES®
FE Reference Handbook (as shown below), we can observe following details:

Y(s) _ 32 Y(s) _ Kafr

R(s) s2 + 4s + 16 R(s) s2 + 2^cjns 4- cofi

o ) n - 16 -> (On = 4

K(x)2 = 32 -> K(16) = 32 K = 2

Therefore, steady-state gain K = 2.

12.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 0. 50

Damping ratio can be calculated by observing that 2(ojns — 4 s-> £a)n = 2

Since con — 4 -» ( = 0.50. Therefore, damping ratio is 0.50.

12.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Since ( < 1, given control system is considered underdamped.

315
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.905

Peak-time can be calculated using following equation:

n n
tp = ----- , ------ = — = = = = = = 0.905
4 ^1 - (0.50)2

12.4 g ) CORRECT ANSWER : 1.16

Peak-output can be calculated using following equation:

7t(0.5)
Mp = 1 + e = 1 + e VI^os7 = 1.16

12.4 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 16.3%

The peak-overshoot ( %OS ) response can be calculated using following equation:

77< 7t (0 .5 )
% OS = lOOe = lOOe = 16.3%

12.4 i) CORRECT ANSWER : 3.46 r a d / s

The damped natural frequency o)d can be calculated using following equation:

cod — conyJl — C2 = 4^1 — (0.50)2 = 3.46 rad/s

12.4 j) CORRECT ANSWER : 2. 82 ra rf/s

The damped resonant frequency a)r can be calculated using following equation:

0)r = co „V l - 2 f2 = Asj 1 - 2 ( 0 . 5 0 ) 2 = 2 .8 2 r a d / s

12.4 k) CORRECT ANSWER : 3.62

The logarithmic decrement 8 can be calculated using following equation:

S = 2 ^ / V l - < 2 = 2 t t ( 0 .5 ) / V i- ( 0 .5 ) 2 = 3.62

12.4 I) CORRECT ANSWER : 2s

2% settling time can be calculated using following equation:

Ts = 4/<<On = 4/(0.5 x 4) = 2s

316
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.4 m) CORRECT ANSWER - 0.24

For a unity feedback system, steady-state error can be calculated using final value theorem as shown below:

sR(s)
e(oo) = UmsE(s) -- lim----- ——
5^0 w 5^0 1 + G(s)

10
r {t ) = 10ii(t) -» R(s) = —
5
(50) (s + 4)
G(s) =
(s -I- l)(s + 5)
10
s
e(oo) — lim s
s^° i + (5°)fe + 4)
(s + l ) ( s + 5)

10 10
e(oo) = I*“o (50)(s + 4) = (50)(0 + 4 T “ °'24
(s + l)(x + 5) (0 + 1)(0 + 5)

Helpful tip - Understand steady-state error calculation formula and learn how to use it for different inputs.

12.4 n) CORRECT ANSWER - oo

For a unity feedback system, steady-state error can be calculated using final value theorem as shown below:

sR(s)
e(oo) = lim sE(s) = lim ----- ——-
s-o w s-*o 1 + G (s)

5
r(t) = 5t u (t ) -> /?(s) = —r
s^

1005
G(s) =
s2 + 11s + 30

s -r
e(oo) = lim
100s
s2 + 11s + 30

5
e(co) = lim ------------ TfTnT
^ o 1+ 100s
s 2 -I- 11s + 30
5
n
e(oo) - -----
1, 100 0 ()
0 + 11(0)+ 30

Helpful tip - Refer to Laplace transform table for different r ( t ) R(s) pairs.

317
Copyrighted Material © 2020
12.4 o) CORRECT ANSWER - oo

For a unity feedback system, steady state-error can be calculated using final value theorem as shown below:

sR(s )
e(oo) — lim s E ( s ) ~ lim -----
K J s —»o v J s -o l + G {s)

20
r ( t ) = 1 0 t2 n(t ) -> R(s) = —r-
s*

G (s ) —
s 2 + 100s + 10

20 20 20
^ o3 c2 n
e (o 6 ) = lim ----------------~----------— lim ----------------- ?---------- ---------------------n-----------= 00
s-*o 1 j _________ f ________ s->o 1 j _________ i ________ 1 ____________ 0________
s 2 + 100s + 1 0 s 2 + 100s + 10 + 0 + 100(0) + 10

12.4 p
)CORRECT ANSWER - 00
For a unity feedback system, steady-state error can be calculated using final value theorem as shown below:

„ s s/?(s)
e (o o ) = lim sE(s) —lim ---------—
v 0 w s->o 1 + G (s)

2
r ( t ) — 2 1 u (t ) /?(s) = —
s^

G(s) = 1
(s + 2 )(s + 3)

s— 2 2
e(oo) = lim ------------- — 5---------- = lim ---------------— -----------= ---------------—
s->0 „ . 1 s->0
(s + 2 )(s + 3) ' (s + 2) (s + 3) 1 (0 + 2)(0 + 3)

12.4 q) CORRECT ANSWER - 0.11

For a unity feedback system, steady-state error can be calculated using final value theorem as shown below:

sR(s)
= lim s E ( s ) = lim ------ ------
e (co )
v ' w s - > o 1 + G (s)

3
r(t) = 3u(t) -» R(s) = -
s

_ 1 0 (s + 5)
G (s) =
(s + l ) ( s + 2)

3
st 3 3
e(oo) = lim --------- -7-7— — — — lim --------- 7777— — ^ n — — 0.115
s-> o . 10 (s + 5) 5-^0. 1 0 (s + 5) 10(0 + 5)
(s + l ) ( s + 2) (s + l ) ( s + 2) (0 + 1)(0 + 2)

318
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 13 - Communications
13.1 - Communication Theory - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 372 for reference

13.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Unit step function starting at t = t0 (time shifting) with amplitude = A (amplitude scaling) is Au(t —t0).

Therefore, given unit step function can be represented as 2u(t —4).

13.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER: u ( t - 3)

u(3t —9) - u(3(t — 3))

Time scaling does not affect unit step function because u(ct) = i*(t) where c is a constant.

Therefore, u(3(t —3)) —u(t - 3).

13.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Rectangular pulse centered at t ~ t0 (time shifting) with amplitude = A (amplitude scaling) and time period x is
given as . Therefore, the rectangular pulse given in problem statement can be represented as follows:

13.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER * B

Triangular pulse centered at t = t0 (time shifting) with amplitude = A (amplitude scaling) and r = 2 is given as
AA Therefore, the triangular pulse given in problem statement can be represented as follows

13.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER : - S(t)

Time scaling property of unit impulse function can be expressed as follows:

1
S(ct) = — 5 (0
\c\

In the given case, constant c = —3.

319
Copyrighted Material © 2020
13.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER : D

/(4 t) will compress the time-period of f i t ) by a factor of 4. Conversely, f( t/ 4) will expand the time-period of
f i t ) by a factor of 4.

13.1 g ) CORRECT ANSWER - A

A given function is considered even if x ( —t) = x(t).

f { t ) = t s sin 3 1

f i ~ t ) = ( —t ) 5 s in (- 3 t )

f { —t) — ( —15) ( —sin 3t)

f i ~ t ) = t s sin 3 1

Since f i t ) = t s sin 3t = / ( —t), t s sin 3 1 is considered an even function.

13.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - B

A given function is considered odd if x i ~ t ) — —xit).

f i t ) — sin 3 1

f i ~ t ) = sin (—3 1)

f i ~ t ) = — sin 3t

Since f i t ) = sin 3t — —f i t ) , sin 3 1 is considered an odd function.

Helpful tip - Validate that t 2 + sin 3 1 is neither even nor odd.

13.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER: 18J

According to Parseval's Theorem, the total energy contained in a finite signal xit) can be calculated as follows:

In the given scenario, x i t ) is a rectangular pulse which has an amplitude of 3, centered at 2 and a time-
period of 2. Therefore, it is a finite signal which exists from t = 1 to t = 3 as shown below.

E = 9£]? = 9(3 - 1)

E = 18 Joules

Helpful tip - Sketch the given rectangular pulse to confirm its limits of integration.

320
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 13.2 Amplitude Modulation - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 375 for reference

13.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER : 7V

According to the problem statement, maximum amplitude of AM wave is 12V and minimum amplitude is 2V.

Ac + Am = 12V

Ac - A m = 2V

In the above equations, Ac represents carrier wave amplitude and Am represents message wave amplitude.

Adding both equations result in 2AC = 14V -> Ac = 7V.

13.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER : 5V

As shown in the previous solution, Ac ~ I V . We can substitute this value in following equation to calculate A

Ac + i4m - 12V -^Am = 12V - Ac

Am = 12V - 7 V = 5V

13.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.71

Modulation index (m) of given AM wave can be calculated as shown below:

An 5K
m —— = — = 0.71
Ac IV

13.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 0.80

According to the problem statement AM wave is given by following equation:

x (t ) = 50(1 + 0.8 cos 4007rt) cos(1000007rt)

We can compare this equation with standard form of AM wave to extract useful details:

x ( t ) = A'c( 1 + am n(t)) cos(27r/ct) where a = modulation index, f c = carrier frequency.

Therefore, modulation index of given AM wave is 0.80.

13.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 200Hz

x ( t ) = 50(1 + 0.8 cos 4007zt) cos(100000;rt) = 50(1 + 0.8 cos 2(200)7rt) cos(2(50000)7rt)

f m = message/modulating frequency = 200Hz.

13.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 50,000Hz

x ( t ) = 50(1 + 0.8 cos 4007rt) cos(1000007rt) = 50(1 4- 0.8 cos 2(200)77t) cos(2(50000)7Tt)

fc = carrier frequency = 50,000 Hz.

321
Copyrighted Material © 2020
13.2 g) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - D

As per NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, Costas loop can be used for detecting Double-Side Modulation (DSB).

13.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Modulation index can be calculated using following formula: m = Am/Ac

Message signal m(t) = 5sin27r(1000t)

Carrier signal c(t) = 50sin27r(4000t)

Am = 5, Ac - 50

5
m = — = 0.1 = 10 %

13.2 I) CORRECT ANSWER: 15.2%

Efficiency of an amplitude modulated wave can be calculated using following formula:

a 2 < m2(t) >

^ 1-1- a2 < m£(t) >

According to the problem statement:

a ~ 0.60 < m£(t) > = 0.5

a2 < m£(t) >

^ I + a2 < m2(t) >

0.62 x 0.5
71 ~ 1 -I- 0.62 x 0.5

ri = 0.152 = 15.2%

13.2 j) CORRECT ANSWER: 84.7%

Based on the efficiency calculations in previous problem, 15.2% transmitted power contains message whereas
the remaining 84.7% contains the carrier

13.2 k) C O R R EC T AN SW ER -A

Amplitude modulation results in variation of carrier wave's amplitude by signal wave.

Helpful tip - Learn how to identify different forms of modulation graphically.

322
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 13.3 Angle Modulation - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 375 - 376 for reference

13.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 3.18

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, frequency-deviation ratio can be calculated as follows:

D = —------ ^
2 nW
According to the problem statement, kF max|m(t)| = 100kHz, W — 5kHz -> 2nW — 10nkHz

100kHz
D = ---------- = 3.18
10ttkHz
13.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 41.8kHz

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, 98% power bandwidth of a FM wave with D > 1 can be
calculated using following formula:

B — 2(0 + 1)W . As calculated in previous problem, D = 3.18 > 1 and W = 5kHz.

Therefore, B = 2(3.18 + 1)(5 kHz) = 41.8kHz

13.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to the problem statement, analog modulated wave is given by following equation:

x { t ) = 20 cos(20007rt + 5 sin(207it)) and original message signal is 107rcos(207zt).

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, the general form of frequency modulated (FM) wave is as follows:

xFM( t) = Ac cos (2nfct + j

It can be observed that given wave contains a sine term within brackets which is an integral of cosine, and
the original message is a cosine function.

Therefore, x ( t ) is frequency modulated i.e. message signal is modulating the frequency.

13.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 1000Hz, 10Hz

According to the problem statement, analog modulated wave is given by following equation:

x ( t ) = 20 cos(27r(1000)t + 5 sin (27 r(1 0)t)) and original message signal is 107r cos(207Zt).

It can be observed that fc — 1000Hz and fm = 10Hz.

323
Copyrighted Material © 2020
13.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER: C

According to the problem statement, analog modulated wave is given by following equation:

x ( t ) — 2 0 c o s(2 0 0 0 7 Z t + 107T cos(207it)) and original message signal is 10n cos(207Zt)-

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, the general form of phase modulated (PM) wave is as follows:

It can be observed that x ( t ) contains a cosine term within brackets which is same as the original message.

Therefore, x ( t ) is phase modulated i.e. message signal is modulating the phase.

13.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER: 2 0 0 0 n t + 107T cos(207Tt)

According to the problem statement, analog modulated wave is given by following equation:

x ( t ) = 20 cos(2 0 0 07it + 10rr cos(207Tt)) and original message signal is lOzr cos(207Tt).

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, the general form of frequency modulated (FM) wave is as follows:

* fm (0 - Ac cos(2nfct + (pit ))

It can be observed that cp(t) = lOn cos(20nt).

Instantaneous phase = 2nfct + (p(t) — 2000/rt + IOtt cos(207Tt).

Therefore, x (t) is phase modulated i.e. message signal is modulating the phase.

13.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 20007T - 2007T2 sin 207Tt

Instantaneous frequency can be calculated as shown below:

d
dt dt

ti)j = 20007T - (107t)(207 t) sin 207rt = 20007T — 200 tt2 sin 207Tt

13.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER: - 2 0 0 t t 2 sin 207rt

Frequency deviation can be calculated as shown below:

dt

324
Copyrighted Material © 2020
13.3 i) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - D

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, 98% power bandwidth can be calculated using following formula

B = 2(D + 1)W

According to the problem statement:

D = 1.25 > 1 W - 10kHz

B = 2(D + 1)W

B = 2(1.25 + 1) x 10000/Zz

B - 45000 Hz

Helpful tip - Review angle modulation formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

13.3 j) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - B

As per NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, phase-lock loop can be used to demodulate angle modulated signals.

13.3 k) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - B

Frequency modulation results in variation of carrier wave's frequency by signal wave.

13.3 I) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - C

Phase modulation results in variation of carrier wave's phase by signal wave. Note that phase and frequency
modulation are very similar. They are collectively called as angle modulation.

13.3 m) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - D

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, 98% power bandwidth can be calculated using following formula

B = 2W

According to the problem statement:

D = 0.1 < 1 W = 10kHz

B = 2W

B = 2 x 1 0 kHz

B = 20 kHz

325
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 13.4 Fourier Transform - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 52 - 55, 372 - 373 for reference

13.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 40 sinc(8/)

The given function is a rectangular pulse centered at t = 0, amplitude of 5 and duration of 8 i.e. 511Q )

Fourier transform can be calculated using pairs given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook as shown below.

(
t \ F o u rier T ra n sfo rm
- j <--------------------> 5(8sinc(8/)) = 40sinc(8/)

13.4 b)CORRECT ANSWER: 12 sin c(4/)e ~iJnf

The given function is a rectangular pulse centered at t = 2, amplitude of 3 and duration of 4 i.e. 311 (“ “ )

Fourier transform time shifting property needs to be used as shown below.

f tt ~— Z2\\ Fourier
F o u r i e r TTransform
ra n sfo rm ^ .
3n (_ _ _ — ---------------------> 3 (4 s in c (4 / ))e ) 2nf ( 2} - 1 2 s in c (4 / )e 4jnf

13.4 c) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - C

Fourier transform's modulation property needs to be used in the given case as shown below.
/t\ F o u rier T ra n sfo rm
FI <--------------------» 6sinc(6/)

{ 1\ Fo u rier T ra n sfo rm ,N
cos(27r(300)t) n <-------------------> 3 sinc(6(/ —300)) +3 sinc(6(/ 4- 300))

13.4 d) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - D

Fourier transform can be calculated using pairs given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook as shown below.

Fo u rier T ra n sfo rm 1
e~stu(t)< ----------------
5 + j2nf
Fo u rier T r a n s fo rm 1
cos (2n(20)t)e~5tu(t) <-------------------->
2 V 5 + j 2 n ( J + 20) 5 + j 2 n ( f ~ 20),

13.4 e) C O R R EC T A N SW ER : 8 s i n c ( 2 / ) e (47r7/)

Fourier transform can be calculated using pairs given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook as shown below.

t —2\ F o u r i e r T r a n s f o r m
( — ---------------------> 4 (2 sin c(2 /))e “ (47r^

Helpful tip - Learn how to use Fourier transform table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

326
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 13.5 Digital Communications - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 377 and 379 for reference

13.5 a) C O R R EC T A N SW E R : 128

Quantization levels can be calculated using following formula.

q = 2n where 'q' is the quantization levels and 'n' is the number of bits.

According to the problem statement: n — 1

q = 27 - 128 levels

Helpful tip - Review PCM and PAM formulas given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

13.5 b) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - D

Minimum bandwidth for PCM message transmission can be calculated using following formula.

B = 2W log2 q

q = 2" = 28 = 256

B = (2) (100Hz) log2 256

B = 1600 Hz

13.5 c) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - B

According to the Nyquist sampling theorem, f s > 2W

f
Js,min = 2
^ W
vv

fs.min 2 x 1 5 kHz

fs,min 30 kHz

13.5 d) CO R R EC T A N SW E R - C

Time spacing between adjacent samples can be calculated using following formula.

1
Ts ~ 30 kHz

Ts = 33.3 \is

327
Copyrighted Material © 2020
13.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER : 34. 5 kbps

According to the 'Shannon Channel Capacity' formula provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

C = fW lo g 2 ( l + £ )

As noted under 'Decibels and Bode Plots' heading of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, dB equation for ratio
between two powers (such as signal and noise) is dB — 10 log10 P^/P2.

According to the problem statement:

5
— = 10 dB
N

101oglo 5/W = 1 0 - > £ = 1 0

C = BW Iog2 ( l + ^ ) = 10,000 logz( l + 10) = 10,000 x 3.459 = 34.5kbps

13.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 11. 7dB

According to the 'Shannon Channel Capacity' formula provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

C = BW log2 ( l + ~> 100,000 = 25,000 log2 ( l +

log2(l + £) = 4 - l + £ = 2*

_S =: 24 - 1 = 15
N

10 log 10 5/A/ = 101og10 15 = 11.7 dB

13.5 g) CORRECT ANSWER : 11

According to the Cyclical Redundancy Code (CRC) equation provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook:

T(x) 101011
EW = ^ = -m -

It is important to note that this division is performed using modulo-2 arithmetic with XOR operation.

Refer to 'Logic Operators and Boolean Algebra' section of NCEES® FE Reference Handbook for XOR truth table.

XOR operation is performed at each step instead of subtraction as shown on next page.

Moreover, since the length of generator code is 3, we need to append 3 - 1 = 2 zeroes at the end of data frame.

This will result in 10101100.

328
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 10101100

ffilll

01001100

m ill

0111100

ffllll

000100

m il
O il

Therefore, remainder E = 11 needs to be appended in place of the two zeroes that we added to T earlier.

13.5 h) CORRECT ANSWER : 10101111

According to the Cyclical Redundancy Code (CRC) equation provided in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, the
transmitted code is T(x) + E(x).

As noted in previous solution, E{x) = 11 shall be appended in place of the two zeros that were added to T(x).

Therefore, transmitted code is 10101111.

Helpful tip - Confirm that 10101111/11 = 0 using modulo-2 arithmetic. This will imply an error-free transmission.

13.5 i) SOLUTION

Odd-parity bit is added to the data frame to ensure that total number of Is in the data frame remain odd.

Data Frame Odd Parity Bit (0/1)

0000 1 (# of Is after adding odd parity bit = 1 which is odd)
1000 0 {# of Is after adding odd parity bit = 1 which is odd)
0111 0 (# of Is after adding odd parity bit = 3 which is odd)

13.5 j) SOLUTION

Even-parity bit is added to the data frame to ensure that total number of Is in the data frame remain odd.

Data Frame Even Parity Bit (0/1)

0000 0 (# of Is after adding even parity bit = 0 which is even)
1000 1 (# of Is after adding even parity bit = 2 which is even)
0111 1 (# of Is after adding even parity bit = 4 which is even)

329
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 13.6 Multiplexing - Solutions
13.6 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) is an example of digital multiplexing.

13.6 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

N channels require at least N-l guard bands. Therefore 3 channels will require at least 2 guard bands.

BWmin = BWcfn + Guard Band + BWChz + Guard Band + BWch 3

BWmin = 50 kHz + 5kHz + 100 kHz + 5kHz + 50 kHz

BWmin = 210 kHz

13.6 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Each frame carries 1 byte per channel. There are 5 channels. Therefore, frame size will be:

5 x 1 byte = 5 bytes

13.6 d) CORRECT ANSWER : 400 bps

Each channel is sending 10 bytes/second and each frame carries 1 byte/channel.

Frame rate = 10 frames/second. Frame size = 5 bytes.

10 framefsecond x 5 bytes/frame = 50 bytes /second = 400 bits } second = 400 bps.

13.6 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Each frame carries 1 bit. There are 50000 frames per second and 3 bits per frame.

Therefore, total number of bits/second is 150000.

13.6 f) CORRECT ANSWER : 20 \is

There are 50000 frames per second. Frame duration = 1/50000. Frame duration = 20 |is

13.6 g ) CORRECT ANSWER : 15kHz

Nyquist sampling rate of x 1( t ) = f sl = 2x BW1 = 2 x 4 kHz = 8kHz

Nyquist sampling rate of x 2{t) = f s2 = 2 x BW2— 2 x 2 kHz = 4 kHz

Nyquist sampling rate of x 3 (t) = / s3 = 2 x BW-$= 2 x 1kHz = 2kHz

Nyquist sampling rate of ^ ( t ) = / s4 = 2 x = 2 x 0.5 kHz = 1 kHz

Overall sampling rate required for perfect reconstruction = f sl + fs2 + fs-$ + f s4 — 15 kHz

330
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 14 - Computer Networks
14.1 Routing & Switching - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 392 - 407 for reference

14.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - Routing

Routing is the process of finding efficient paths between nodes based on their addresses.

14.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Router maintains routing table and forwarding table.

14.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - Network

Network layer performs node management functions such as routing, addressing and traffic control.

Helpful tip - Review OSI Model and TCP/IP Model layers given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

14.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - Data Link

Network switch typically operates in data link layer.

It can also perform routing functionality in the network layer, if upgraded.

14.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Network Interface Card (NIC) establishes computer's unique hardware media access control (MAC) address.

14.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Router has access to IP datagram and can use IP address for optimal routing of data packets.

14.1 g) SOLUTION

It can be observed that only two nodes are directly connected to A and this results in two branches.

Therefore, to visit the first branch (nodes B, D and F), the next hop from A must be to node B.

Similarly, to visit the second branch (nodes C, E, H and I), the next hop from A must be to node C.

Destination Node Next Hop

B B
C C
D B
E C
F B

331
Copyrighted Materia! © 2020
 14.2 Network Topologies / Types / Models - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 392 - 407 for reference

14.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - Application layer

Application layer will run http and email.

Helpful tip - Review OSI Model and TCP/IP Model layers given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

14.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Session layer is responsible for managing user interactions only.

14.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

A single break in connection can disrupt an entire network in the implementation of ring topology.

14.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Local Area Networks (LAN) can be implemented using any one of the suggested implementations.

14.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) LAN is an example of star topology.

14.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Local Area Network (LAN) can cover small areas (office, hospital etc.).

Wide Area Network (WAN) can cover large geographical regions (states, countries etc.).

Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) can cover municipalities.

Personal Area Network (PAN) can cover distance within range of a person (typically few feet).

14.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 406

Number of links required in a full mesh network is equal to n(n — l)/2 where n = number of nodes.

In the given case, n = 29 n(n —l)/2 = (29)(28)/2 = 406.

Therefore, 406 links are required to implement a fully-connected mesh network of 29 nodes.

14.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 28

Number of input/output ports required on each node in a fully-connected mesh network can be found using
(n — 1) where n = number of nodes.

In the given case, n = 29 -» (?i — 1) = 28

Therefore, 28 ports are required on each node to implement a fully-connected mesh network of 29 nodes.

332
Copyrighted Material © 2020
14.2 i) CORRECT ANSWER: C

Tree topology is also known as hierarchical topology. It is a hybrid of star and bus topologies and share many of
their features. For example, each layer in tree topology acts like a bus topology and tree topology also contains a
central node like star topology.

Helpful tip - Understand advantages and disadvantages of bus, star, ring, tree and mesh topologies.

14.2 j) CORRECT ANSWER: D

Mesh topology is the most complicated network configuration to implement due to large amount of cabling. As
noted earlier, n(n —l)/2 links are required to implement a fully connected mesh network. The number of links
grow exponentially.

In comparison, number of links required for implementation of a star network are equal to n and the number of
links required for implementation of a bus network are equal to n — 1.

14.2 k) CORRECT ANSWER: B

Ring topology is generally used to create a wide area network (WAN) which spans large geographical regions
extending up to countries and continents. Bus topology is rarely used in modern computer networks. Star
topology is primarily used for high speed LAN. Mesh topology is used to interconnect LANs in a WAN.

14.2 I) CORRECT ANSWER: D

OSI Model's presentation layer is responsible for managing the syntax and semantics of message which includes
encryption/decryption (security), compression/decompression, encoding/decoding (translation) etc.

14.2 m) CORRECT ANSWER: C

Data link layer performs physical addressing by adding header to packet frames which defines the address of
next node in the route. Some of the other responsibilities of data link layer include framing, flow control, error
control and media access control.

Helpful tip - Review functions and features of all OSI Model Layers and TCP/IP Layers.

14.2 n) CORRECT ANSWER: C

Encapsulation is the process of building protocol data unit as the data passes from upper layer (application) to
lower layer (physical). Headers (and sometimes trailers) are added by different protocols during this process.

The reverse process of encapsulation is called decapsulation.

333
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 14.3 Internet Protocol Addressing: IPv4/IPv6 - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 394 - 400 for reference

14.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Identification, flag, and fragment offset fields of IPv4 header are responsible for fragmentation of IPv4
datagram. Fragmentation is the process of dividing an IP datagram into smaller chunks called fragments during
its transmission. Identification field makes sure that whenever an IP packet is fragmented during transmission,
all fragments will contain same identification number to identify the original IP datagram. Flag field tells the
network device (router) if an IP packet needs to be fragmented or not. Fragment offset helps in determining the
correct position of the fragment in the original IP packet.

14.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Least significant bit of 'Flags' field corresponds to bit # 2 which is called More Fragments (MF). It is set (=1) for all
fragments except the last fragment because the IP datagram must end after the last fragment and more
fragments are not required after it.

14.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

IPv4's 'Time To Live' (TTL) field is also known as 'Hop Limit' or 'Hop Counter' in IPv6. It tells the network how
many routers this packet can visit before being discarded. If TTL ~ 20, it means that given IP datagram can visit
20 routers before being dropped. Every time an IP datagram visits a router, TTL is decremented. This is done by
design to prevent the packet from indefinitely looping in a network.

14.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Internet Header Length (IHL) field is used to specify the size of IPv4 header, It is multiplied by 32 bits to
determine the actual header length.

According to the problem statement: 10002 ~ 810

256
8 x 32 bits = 256 bits = —g—= 32 bytes

Therefore, header length of this IPv4 datagram is 32 bytes.

14.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

In the previous problem, header length was calculated as 32 bytes. Minimum header size of IPv4 datagram is 20
bytes (0 bytes used for Options field). This means that the given IPv4 header uses 12 bytes for Options field.

14.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Fragment offset field identifies the exact position of fragment in the original IPv4 datagram. It is measured in 8-
byte blocks. In the given case, 200 x 8 = 1600 Bytes. It means that 1600 Bytes of data has already arrived ahead
of this fragment.

334
Copyrighted Material © 2020
14.3 g) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - D

IPv6 header length is of fixed size i.e. 40 bytes. IPv6 header length has a minimum size of 20 bytes and maximum
length of 60 bytes (options can range from 0 - 4 0 bytes).

14.3 h) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - C

IPv6's 'Hop Limit' field is the same as IPv4's 'Time To Live' field.

14.3 i) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - C

According to the problem statement, IPv6 address in expanded form is given below:

2A1F:0000:0000:0011:0000:0000:0000:2100

We can use following provisions to abbreviate IPv6 address:

1. Leading zeroes can be dropped. This is applicable to 0011 -*11.

2. Consecutive groups of zeroes can be replaced with double colon :: We have the choice of converting two
groups of 0000s or three groups of 0000s. Converting two groups of zeroes to :: will result in
2A1F::11:0:0:0:2100. Converting three groups of 0000s to :: will result in 2A1F:0:0:11::2100 which is a
more abbreviated form.

Therefore, the most abbreviated form of given IPv6 address is 2A1F:0:0;11::2100.

Note: Option C is not valid because we can use double colon :: only once.

14.3 j) C O R R EC T A N SW E R - C

According to the problem statement, IPv6 address in abbreviated form is given below:

B:C8::15:0:AC

IPv6 address must contain 8 groups of 4 hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Double colons can be expanded
into sets of zeroes (to complete 8 groups) and leading zeroes can be added for address expansion.

B -» 000B, C8 -> 0 0 C 8 , » 0000:0000:0000,0 -+ 0000, AC -> 00AC

Therefore, the expanded form of given IPv6 address is OO0B:OOC8:0O0O:0OOO:OOOO:OO15:OOOO:OOAC.

335
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 14.4 Protocols: TCP/UDP/ICMP - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 400 - 404 for reference

14.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Protocol data unit is called a 'Segment' in TCP, 'Datagram' in UDP and IP, 'Frame' in Data Link Layer and 'Bit' in
Physical Layer.

14.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

UDP is a connectionless and unreliable protocol with a very low overhead. Unlike TCP, UDP does not use
acknowledgment mechanism.
Helpful tip - Understand the key features of TCP and UDP.

14.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

TCP header consists of minimum 20 bytes and maximum 60 bytes. Options field in TCP has 0 - 4 0 bytes range.
Helpful tip - Understand the TCP header fields and their applications.

14.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

TCP establishes connection between a client and a server through a three-way handshake as explained below:
Step # 1 - Client sends a request segment to server with SYN bit set to 1. This segment does not contain any
payload, it just contains the TCP header,
Step # 2 - After receiving the request segment, server responds by sending a reply segment. TCP header of reply
segment contains SYN and ACK bits that are set to 1.
Step # 3 - After receiving reply segment from server, client sends an acknowledgment with ACK bit set to 1.
Three-way acknowledgment forms an important part of TCP's reliability mechanism.
Helpful tip - Understand TCP's four-way handshake for termination of a full-duplex connection.

14.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Telnet (remote access), SMTP (email) and http (web browsing) require high degree of reliability offered by TCP.

14.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Internet control message protocol (ICMP) is designed to compensate for the lack of error-control and
management query mechanisms in Internet Protocol (IP). ICMP messages can be broadly categorized into error-
reporting and query messages.

14.4 g ) CORRECT ANSWER - C

ICMP error messages are only reported back to the source to reduce unnecessary traffic and avoid network
congestion. Sending such messages to intermediate routers would reduce overall network performance.

14.4 h) CORRECT ANSWER - D

According to partial list of iCMP type and code values for IPv4 given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, ICMP
'Type 3 = Destination Unreachable' and ICMP 'Code 4 = Fragmentation Needed and DF set' are most applicable.

336
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 14.5 Network Security: Intrusion Detection/Prevention and Encryption - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 413 - 416 for reference

14.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Encryption helps in keeping data secret while it is in transit, but it does not provide overall network security. To
make network more secure, an electronic security guard is required in the form of a firewall. Firewalls protect
network from unauthorized traffic by performing user authentication and implementing access control.

14.5 b) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - A

Packet filtering firewalls allow/block information packets by inspecting IP and TCP header fields which are
compared against a set of rules. These rules dictate whether traffic can be allowed in/out of certain IP
addresses, protocols, port numbers etc.

Helpful tip - Review stateful packet filters, stateless packet filters, application level gateway firewall, circuit level
gateway firewall.

14.5 c) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - A

Signature-based IDS works on the basis of previously known and documented list of malicious patterns
(signatures). Observed events are compared with signatures to respond to a threat.

14.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Anomaly-based IDS works by establishing a baseline of acceptable network activities. They continuously review
the current state of network traffic and devices to compare them against the baseline to detect patterns that
may be malicious. Baseline values can be established using parameters such as unusual traffic patterns {spikes or
sags), time-of-day usage of network devices, very high computer power consumption, activity level of a user
which does not match acceptable profile. The disadvantage of anomaly-based IDS is that they can be fooled by
an intruder who carefully blends in by increasing the activity level gradually.

14.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Nmap is a network mapper which is widely used for exploring a network and conducting security audits. The
given command nmap 192.1.2.3 will scan IP 192.1.2.3 and reveal its ports, services, and domain names.

Helpful tip - Develop familiarity with nmap commands.

14.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

F flag is used for conducting a fast scan.

Helpful tip - Develop familiarity with nmap flags.

14.5 g) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - B

RSA public-key cryptosystem based digital signatures allow senders to use private key in order to digitally sign a
message/document as s = md(mod n) that can be verified by receiver using sender's public key 'e\

337
Copyrighted Material © 2020
14.5 h) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to the problem statement: p — 7, q = 9, e = 11, d —1

n ~ p x q = 7 x 11 = 77 t = LCM(p ~ 1, q - 1) = LCM(6,10) = 30
e * d = 1 (mod t )

1+kxt
d = ------------
e
A: is a real number and it is chosen so that it will result in an integer value of d.

1+4x30 121
d- ~ ~ ~ v i ~ 11

Therefore, Alpha's private key must be 11.

14.5 i) CORRECT ANSWER - 8

In RSA public-key cryptosystem, cyphertext c can be calculated using following equation: c = me(inod n)

According to the problem statement and the results of previous solution:

m = 8, n = 77.

c = 8 11(mod 77 ) = 8

Helpful tip - Decrypt the cyphertext and retrieve original message using m = cd(mod ri)

14.5 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Public-key cryptosystems use public keys for encryption which allows anyone to encrypt and send messages.
However, messages can only be decoded by the intended recipient with correct secret/private key.

14.5 k) CORRECT ANSWER: 4

According to the problems statement: g = 3, p = 5.

Let ( X p r i v a t e - k e y — X — 1, fip riv a te -k e y ~ y ~ 2-

We can calculate public key of each party using following formula:

« public-key = g x(mod p) = 3 1(mod 5) = 3 Ppubiic-key = g y(mod p) = 32(mod 5) = 4

a and (3 will exchange their public keys. These keys will be used each other to establish a common private key.

Secret key obtained by a = fipU b iic - k e y X (mod p) = 41(mod 5) = 4

Secret key obtained by /? = apubUc-keyy(m°d p) = 32(mod 5) - 4

It can be observed that both parties have obtained a common secret key without exchanging it publicly.

Helpful tip - Decrypt the cyphertext and retrieve original message using m = cd(mod n)

338
Copyrighted Material © 2020
14.5 I) SOLUTION

To create a control flow diagram, we first need to identify code segments that qualify as nodes (i.e. statements)
and edges that demonstrate control flow from one node to another node.

Let us denote nodes alphabetically.

Control flow diagram can be created as shown below:

int sumCalculator (int x) {

*
int count = 0; // Node A ^
B
int sum = 0; // Node B

while (count < x) {// Node C

sum = sum + count; // Node D

count++;} // Node E

return sum;} // Node F

It can be observed that there are 6 nodes and 6 edges.

14.5 m) CORRECT ANSWER: B

McCabe's cyclomatic complexity number can be found using following formula:

c —e —n + 2

c —McCabe's cyclomatic complexity

n = # of nodes ~ 2

e - # of edges = 2

c = 6~-6 + 2 = 2

Therefore, McCabe's cyclomatic complexity number for given algorithm is 2.

Typically, algorithms/codes with c > 15 are considered very complex.

339
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 15 - Digital Systems
15.1 Number Systems - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 389 for reference

15.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 1000101011012

Number system conversion can be efficiently performed using calculators.

8ADHex= IOOOIOIOIIOI2

15.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 11110000112

Number system conversion can be efficiently performed using calculators.

963io= llllOO OOllz

15.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

2A10 = 2 x 161 + A x 16° = 2x 16 + 10 x 1 = 32 + 10 = 4210

IOIOIO 2 = l x 25 + 0 x 24+ l x 2 3 + 0 x 2 z + l x 21 + 0 x 2° = 32 + 0 + 8 + 0 + 2 + 0 = 4210

528 = 5 x 81 + 2 x 8° = 40 + 2 = 4210

15.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 01012

(+2) OOIO2

(+3) 0011?

(+5) OIOI2 Note that given numbers are unsigned (MSB of positive numbers is always 0).

15.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER: 10012

The given binary numbers are negative because MSB is 1.

I I O I 2 = - (0010)2 = - (2)io

I O I I 2 = - (0100)2 = - (4)io

IIO I2 (-2)io

+1011? (~4)io

1 1000

carry ___ 1

IOOI2 (-6)10 Note that carry is added in l's complement.

340
Copyrighted Material © 2020
15.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER: OOOOz

2's complement addition can be performed as shown below.

10112 (-5)

+0101? (-4-5)

1 0000 = OOOO2

Ignore carry Note that carry is ignored in 2's complement.

15.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 00112

2's complement addition can be performed as shown below.

IIIO 2 (-2)

+0101? (+5)

1 0011 (+3) = O O llz

Ignore carry Note that carry is ignored in 2's complement.

15.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - D

2's complement numbers can be converted into decimal numbers by flipping all the bits and adding 1. The
resulting binary number is converted into decimal and a negative sign is added to obtain the final answer.

Flipping all the bits results in: 10102 01012 and 1110102 -> 0001012

Adding 1 results in: 01012 + 00012 = 01102 = 610 and 1110102 + 0000012 = 0001102 — 610

Adding negative sign to the result obtained in last step confirms that given 2's complement numbers are —610.

15.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER - D

It can be observed that —1110 and 1011112 do not form a correct pair of decimal and 2's complement
representation. Flipping all the bits results in: 1011112 -> 0100002 . Adding 1 results in: 0100002 +
0000012 — 0100012 — 1710. Adding a negative sign to the result obtained in last step confirms that given 2's
complement number is —1710 which is not equal to —1110.

Helpful tip - Validate the remaining pairs by converting 2's complement numbers into decimal equivalents.

15.1 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

It can be observed that —1610 and 1100102 do not form a correct pair of decimal and 2's complement
representation. Flipping all the bits results in: 1100102 -» 0011012 = 13 . Adding a negative sign to the result
obtained in last step confirms that given l's complement number is —1310 which is not equal to —1610.

Helpful tip - Validate the remaining pairs by converting l's complement numbers into decimal equivalents.

341
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.2 Boolean Logic - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 390 for reference

15.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Applying De Morgan's theorem to given logical function results in:

A + BCD + (E 4- F) = ( a )(BCD) (E 4- F) = ( a )(B 4- C + D)(E)(F)
Helpful tip - Review De Morgan's theorem given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

15.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Applying De Morgan's theorem to given logical function results in:

(.ABC)(D + EF) = (ABC) + (D 4- EF) = A + B + C 4- D(E 4- F)

15.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Applying De Morgan's theorem to given logical function results in:

AB + A{BC) 4- B(A + C) ^AB + A(B + C) + BAC
AB 4- A(BC) + B(A + C) = AB + AB + AC +A CB
AB + A(BC) + B(A + C) = AB + A C + A C B
AB 4- A(BC) + B(A + C) —AB 4- C(A + AB)
According to Redundancy Law: A 4- AB —A + B
AB + A (BC) 4- B 04 4-C) = AB + C (A + B)

15.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

AB + B (A + C) + C (A + B) — AB + AB + BC + AC 4- BC
According to Idempotent Law: AB 4- AB = AB BC 4- BC = BC
AB 4- B (A + C) 4- C (A + B) = AB 4- BC 4- AC

15.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

(A + B) (A 4- B + C) = A 4- AB + AC + AB 4- B 4- BC
According to Idempotent Law: AB 4- AB — AB

(A + B) (A + B + C) = A + AB + AC + B + BC
(A + B) (A + B + C) = A (1 + B) + AC + B (1 + C)
According to Identity Law: (14 - B) = 1.
(A + B) (A + B + C ) = A + B + AC = A(1 + C) + B = A + B

15.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

AC + AC = A(AB + AB) + A(AB + AB) = A f ( i 4 B ) (Ib )1 + AAB + AAB

AC + AC = A(A + B)(A + B) + 0 + AB = A(AA + AB + AB + BB) + AB

AC + AC = A(0 + J B + AB + 0) + A B = AAB + AAB + AB = 0 + AB + AB = B ( l )

342
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.3 Logic gates and circuits - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 390 for reference

15.3 a) CO RR ECT A N SW ER - B

(AB)XOR ( CD) = AB (CD) + (AB) CD

(AB)XOR (CD) = AB (C + D) + CD (A + B)

(AB)XOR (CD) - ABC + ABD + ACD + BCD

Helpful tip - Review logical operations and gates given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

15.3 b) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - C

(AB)(AB) = (AB) + (AB)

(AB)(AB) = A + B + A + B = (A + A) + (B + B ) ^ 1 + 1 = 1

(ab)( ab) = 1

15.3 c) C O R R EC T A N SW ER - A

AB C + C = (^A + B + C) + C

According to Idempotent Law: C + C — C

AB C - \ - C = A - \ - B - \ - C

15.3 d) C O R R EC T A N SW E R -C

(I)(IT )(C ) = ABC

15.3 e) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - B

( A B ) ( A + B) = A A B + A B B

( A B ) ( A + B) = 0 + 0"

(AB)(A + B) = 1

15.3 f) C O R R EC T A N S W E R - C

It can be observed from the truth table of XOR function given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook that XOR
always results in a high output (1) whenever input contains odd number of ones. Therefore, XOR can be used to
detect odd number of Is.

Helpful tip - Create a truth table of XNOR and confirm that it can be used to detect even number of Is.

343
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.4 Logic minimization - K-Maps/SOP/POS - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 391 - 392 for reference

15.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B 15.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

C C
0 1 0 1
00 1 1
1 1 , 01 1 1
1 AB
11 /
1) 10

AB + BC + ABC

15.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C 15.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

CD CD
00 01 11 10 00 01 11 10

15.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C 15.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

CD
□

,—
r
1

A B C + AC

Helpful tip - Review rules related to logic minim ization and function simplification related to K-Maps.

344
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.5-Sequential Circuits - Flip Flops and Counters - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 391 for reference

15.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Input 101 to flip-flop # 1 appears as 010 at its complement output Q. This complement output Q of flip-flop # 1
acts as input for flip-flop # 2. This input 010 appears as output Q of flip-flop # 2.

15.5 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Comparing the input /output relationship of given circuit with SR flip-flop truth table shows that it is an
implementation of SR flip-flop. Refer to the truth table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

15.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Comparing the input/output relationship of given circuit with D flip-flop truth table shows that it is an
implementation of D flip-flop. Refer to the truth table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

15.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Comparing the input/output relationship of given circuit with JK flip-flop truth table shows that it is an
implementation of JK flip-flop. Refer to the truth table given in NCEES® FE Reference Handbook.

15.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

D flip-flop input 001 appears as 001 and 110 at its outputs and Q1 respectively.

D flip-flop's output serves as set input (S) for SR flip-flop.

D flip-flop's output serves as reset input (R) for SR flip-flop.

Following truth table summarizes input and output relationship between the two flip-flops.

D Flip-Flop SR Flip-Flop
Qi Qi S = Qi R = Qi Qi
0 l 0 1 0
0 l 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1

Therefore, SR flip-flop output Q2 will be 001.

Helpful tip - Refer to D flip-flop and SR flip-flop truth table to confirm above mentioned results.

345
Copyrighted Material © 2020
15.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The given logic circuit is an implementation of the Johnson counter. Note that clock is applied simultaneously to
all flip-flops. Initially, Q1 = Qz — Q3 = 0. It is important to keep track of inputs values residing at each flip-flop
before every clock cycle. Before the first clock cycle, Q3 = 1 will serve as input to flip-flop #1, Q1 = 0 will serve
as input to flip-flop # 2 and Q2 = 0 will be input to flip-flop # 3. Therefore, when the first clock cycle arrives,
Q3 ~ 1 will be loaded to flip-flop # 1 and its output will change from 0 to 1, Q1 = 0 will be loaded flip-flop # 2
and its output will remain 0. Similarly, Q2 ~ 0 will be loaded to flip-flop # 3 and its output will also remain
unchanged as 0. Using this approach, output transitions can be summarized as shown below.

Clock cycle Q3 Q2 Qi
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
2 0 1 1
3 1 1 1
15.5 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The given logic circuit is an implementation of a 4-bit asynchronous down counter. Flip-flops are 'positive edge
triggered' i.e. outputs will change on a rising clock edge only. Transition from 0 to 1 is considered a rising edge.
Initial output states are 1111. The rising edge of input clock pulse will cause the output Q0 to become 0, and the
next clock pulse will make Qq output return to logic 1. As Q0 becomes high, it makes = 0 low because Qx ~ 0
was sitting at second flip flop's input waiting for a positive edge trigger. The next (third) clock pulse will cause Q0
to become low (because Q0 = 0 was sitting at first flip flop's input waiting for the positive edge trigger), now
both Q0 and Q1 will be low. Using this approach, output transitions can be summarized as shown below.
Note - One transition in Qt is requiring two transitions in Q0.
Helpful tip - Investigate why Q2 and Q± have not changed states within 3 clock cycles?

Clock cycle Q3 Qi Qi Qo
0 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0
2 1 1 0 1
3 1 1 0 0
15.5 h) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The given logic circuit is an implementation of a 2-bit synchronous up counter. It is important to note that the
current value of Q0 serves as input for Jt) K1 in the next clock cycle. Initial states are QiQ0 = 00.
1st clock cycle - Flip-flop # 1 output Qx will not change because Q0 = = 0 (output does not toggle).
Flip-flop # 0 output Q0 will change from 0 to 1 because J0 = K0 = 1 (toggles the output).
2nd clock cycle - Flip-flop # 1 output Qx will change from 0 to 1 because Q0 = J± = = 1 (toggles the output).
Flip-flop # 0 output Qq will change from 1 to 0 because J0 = K0 = 1 (toggles the output).
3rdclock cycle - Flip-flop # 1 output Qt will not change because (?o —7i —^1 — 0.
Flip-flop # 0 output Q0 will change from 0 to 1 because J0 = K0 = 1 (toggles the output).

Clock cycle <2i <2o

Initial state 0 0
1 0 1
2 1 0
3 1 1

346
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.6 - Combinational circuits - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 391 for reference

15.6 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Decoder, encoder, and multiplexer are examples of combinational circuits. Flip-flops are sequential circuits.

15.6 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

A decoder with n inputs has 2n outputs. For example, a decoder with 2 inputs will have 4 outputs which results
in a 2-to-4 decoder. Similarly, a decoder with 3 inputs will have 8 outputs which results in a 3-to-8 decoder.

15.6 c) SOLUTION

Truth table of a 2~to-4 decoder is given below.

E A B ys yz y\ yo
0 X X 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 i
1 0 1 0 0 i 0
1 1 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 i 0 0 0

15.6 d) SOLUTION

y0 = ABE, y1 = ABE, y2 = ABE, y 3 = ABE

Column A Column B
yo \ 4 ABE
yi \ Z r ABE
yz j \ * ABE
ys ' * ABE
15.6 e) SOLUTION

Truth table of a 3-to-8 decoder is given below.

E A B C y7 ye ys y4 ya ya yi yo
0 X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

347
Copyrighted Material © 2020
15.6 f) SOLUTION

y0 = ABCE, y1 = ABCE, y2 = ABCE, y7 - ABCE

Column A Column B
yo n 4 ABCE
yi O s £ ABCE
_ y2 J^ABCE
yi / * abce

15.6 g ) CORRECT ANSWER: E ( A B C + A B C + ABC)

X = Y ?7i(l,3,4) = ABCE + ABCE + ABCE = E(ABC + ABC + ABC)

15.6 h) CORRECT ANSWER: E ( A B C + A B C + ABC)

Y= 7n(5,6,7) = ABCE + ABCE + ABCE = E(ABC + ABC + ABC)

15.6 i) CORRECT ANSWER - B

A multiplex (MUX) with n selection lines will have 1 output and 2n inputs. For example, MUX with 2 selection
lines will have 4 inputs and 1 output. Similarly, MUX with 3 selection lines has 8 inputs and 1 output.

15.6 j) CORRECT ANSWER - A

[24 x 1] MUX will have 16 inputs, 4 selection lines and one output.

15.6 k) SOLUTION

Truth table of a [4 x 1] MUX is given below. j 0 __

E Si So X !i —
0 X X 0 12 —
1 0 0 /o
1 0 1 13 ----
k
1 1 0 h
1 1 1 h
Si So

15.6 I) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The output X can be represented in terms of inputs, selection lines and enable as follows:

X - A) + h + h + ^3

X = E[S i SqI0 4- Si SqI x + q!2 + .S^Sq/s]

348
Copyrighted Material © 2020
15.6 m) SOLUTION

Truth table of a [8 X 1] MUX is given below.

E S2 Si So
0 X X X 0
1 0 0 0 /o
1 0 0 1 h
1 0 1 0 h
1 0 1 1 h
1 1 0 0 u
1 1 0 1 h
1 1 1 0 h
1 1 1 1 h

15.6 n) CORRECT ANSWER - C

/ — A) + h + h + h

f = £ [W o + W i + W 2 + W sl

Substitute E = 1, = X, S0 — Y, I0 = Z, It = I2 = I3 ~ 1

f = XYZ + XY{ 1) + X ? { 1) 4- XY{ 1)

/ = ^ ( ? z + y') + ^ ( ? + y )

According to Boolean algebra's redundancy (aw: YZ + Y - Y + Z

According to Boolean algebra's complement law: Y + Y = 1

f = X(Y + Z ) + X { ! )

f = XY + XZ + X

f = XY + X + XZ

According to Boolean algebra's redundancy law: XY + X = X + Y

f = X + Y + XZ

f = XZ + X + Y

According to Boolean algebra's redundancy law: XZ + X = X + Z

f = X+ Y+ Z

349
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.7 - Programmable Logic Devices/Gate Array - Solutions
15.7 a) SOLUTION

Programmable Array Logic (PAL), Programmable Logic Array (PLA) and ROM fall under the category of
programmable logic devices (PLDs). The main difference between these devices lies in programmability
of their AND-plane and OR-plane.

Column A Column B

AND-plane programmable, OR-plane programmable

AND-plane programmable, OR-plane fixed

► AND-plane fixed, OR-plane programmable

AND-plane fixed, OR-plane fixed

15.7 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

It can be observed that given programmable logic device has a programmable AND-plane and a programmable
OR-plane. Therefore, it is an example of a PLA,

n £
c &

000000
- O '-
- O '-
-o *
15.7 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

It can be observed that output x is the sum of the output of 2nd, 4th, 5th and 6th AND gates (starting from left),

x = ABC + ABC + AB + ABC

15.7 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

It can be observed that output y is the sum of the output of 1st, 3rd and 5thAND gates (starting from left),

y = ABC + ABC + AB

15.7 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

It can be observed that output z is the sum of the output of 2nd, 4thand 6thAND gates (starting from left),

z = ABC + ABC + ABC

350
Copyrighted Material © 2020
15.7 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

it can be observed that given programmable logic device has a programmable AND-plane and a fixed OR-plane.
Therefore, it is an example of a PAL.

15.7 g) CORRECT ANSWER - C

It can be observed that x is the sum of the output of 1st and 2ndAND gates (starting from left),

x = ABC + ABC

15.7 h) CORRECT ANSWER - B

It can be observed that y is the sum of the output of 3rdand 4thAND gates (starting from left).

y - ABC + ABC

15.7 i) CORRECT ANSWER - A

It can be observed that z is the sum of the output of 5thand 6thAND gates (starting from left).

z = AB +ABC

351
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.8 State Machine Design - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 34 for reference

15.8 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to the state diagram, if present state is C and w = 0, system will transition to state A and output will
be 1. Similarly, if present state is C and w = 1 system will transition to state B and output will be 1.

Helpful tip - Learn how to navigate from state table to state diagram and vice versa.

15.8 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The table given below summarizes transitions from initial state A if input = 111.

Current State, Input Next State Output

A, 1 B 0
B, 1 B 1
B, 1 B 1

15.8 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The table given below summarizes the transitions from initial state A if inputs = 000.

Current State, Input Next State Output

A, 0 C 0

c , o A 1

A, 0 C 0

15.8 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to the state diagram, if present state is C and ab = 00 system will stay in state C and output will be 0.

Similarly, if present state is C and input ab = 01 system will transition to state D and output will be 0.

15.8 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The output expression for 'z' as a function of y2yi can be found using k-map as shown below,

yi
o 1

z - y2
352
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 15.9 - Timing - Solutions
15.9 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

For a logical circuit with positive edge-triggered clock, propagation delay is equal to the time difference between
50% mark of clock's triggering edge and 50% mark of output's changing state.

It can be observed that 50% mark of clock's triggering edge is at 15ns. 50% mark of output's changing state is at
30ns. Therefore, propagation delay = 30ns — 15ns = 15ns

15.9 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

An input change that causes the output to unintentionally change from 1 to 0 to 1 when the output
was originally expected to stay constant as 1, is called a 'Static-1 hazard'.

Note: Timing hazards are caused by propagation delays.

15.9 C) CORRECT ANSWER - C

An input change that causes the output to unintentionally change from 0 to 1 to 0 when the output
was originally expected to stay constant as 0, is called a 'Static-0 hazard'.

15.9 d) CORRECT ANSWER - A

An input change that causes the output to unintentionally change from 0 to 1 to 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 to 1 to

0 when the output was expected to change just once as 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 is called a 'Dynamic hazard'.

15.9 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Racing condition can be observed in a JK Flip-Flop when clock signal is high and J = K = 1.

15.9 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Racing condition of JK Flip-Flop can be addressed by implementing a Master-Slave JK Flip-Flop.

353
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 16 - Computer Systems
16.1 Microprocessors - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 409 for reference

16.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Program counter register-contains the address of next instruction to be executed.

Stack pointer register - contains the address of last executed instruction.
Instruction pointer register - contains the address of the current instruction being executed.
Accumulator register - contains the results of arithmetic and logic operations.

16.1 b)CORRECT ANSWER - A

Program counter register - contains the address of next instruction to be executed.

Stack pointer register - contains the address of last executed instruction.
Instruction pointer register - contains the address of the current instruction being executed.
Accumulator register - contains the results of arithmetic and logic operations.

16.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Microprocessor - A single integrated circuit (1C) that accepts and executes code instructions for data processing
data and controlling associated computer circuitry. It is basically a CPU on a programmable electronic chip.
Examples include: Intel® 4004, Intel® 8008 and Intel® 8086.

Microcomputer - An interconnected group of integrated circuits (ICs), input/outputs and memory systems used
for data processing and other applications. It is basically an assembly of microprocessors. Examples include
Mark-8, Altair 880 etc.

Microcontroller - An integrated system of a single integrated circuit containing microprocessors, input/output

devices and memory systems. Microcontrollers can be considered miniature computers designed to control
small features of a large system. Examples include building automation, robotics, lighting controls, toys etc.

16.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - B

RISC stands for "Reduced Instruction Set Computer". It uses a set of very simple but highly optimized set of
instructions. This results in a reduction in the number of cycles per instruction and higher power efficiency. RISC
is used in many portable devices such as music players, hand-held game consoles etc.

Helpful tip - Review CISC "Complex Instruction Set Computer” and compare it with RISC.

16.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

ADD R5, #6 is an example of immediate addressing mode because in the case of immediate addressing mode,
the constant (operand) data on which the action is performed is stored as part of the instruction. The range of
constant data that can be used for immediate addressing is restricted by address field instruction size.

Op-Code Operand

354
Copyrighted Material © 2020
16.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

ADD R5, #6 will add the constant 6 to register R5.

16.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

LOAD R4, (R5) is an example of register indirect addressing mode because in the case of register indirect
addressing mode, a register is used to hold effective address of the data (operand) on which an action is to be
performed by the given instruction. This makes it possible to access large address spaces.

16.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - D

LOAD R4, (R5) loads the content stored at memory location pointed by register R5 into register R4.

16.1 i) SOLUTION

Column A Column 8

Indirect addressing Static data

Immediate addressing Loops

Direct addressing Constants

Auto-indexed addressing Pointers

Registers

16.1 ]) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Option A is incorrect because multithreading allows simultaneous execution of multiple threads within a
process. Thread is a subset of a process.

Option B is incorrect because single-core processors use time-division multiplexing to provide multithreading.

Option C is incorrect because multicore processors can provide true multithreading without multiplexing.

355
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 16.2 - Memory Technology & Systems - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 409 for reference

16.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Cassette tapes, CDs, DVDs, and hard disks are examples of sequential access storage devices. Flash memory is
example of a random-access storage device.

16.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 8 X 2 30 bits

Giga in binary = 230and Byte = 8. Therefore, 1 Giga Byte — 8 x 230 bits

Helpful tip - Review binary prefixes and unit conversions.

16.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Cache memory has low capacity and very high speed. It stores frequently used data for ready access.

16.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

DVD is a secondary memory storage device. It is non-volatile and cannot be directly accessed by computer.
Primary memory systems are volatile and can be accessed directly.

Helpful tip - Understand the difference between primary memory storage and secondary memory storage.

16.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

PROM - Programmable Read-Only Memory can be programmed only once. EPROM - Erasable Programmable
Read-Only Memory can be erased using ultra-violet light. EEPROM - Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-
Only Memory can be erased electrically.

Helpful tip - Learn the difference between various types of ROMs.

16.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Bit = 1 digit, Byte = 8 digits, and Nibble = 4 digits.

Word can vary as 16/32/64 bits depending on system architecture.
16.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 18

Total number of address bits required for cache memory is determined by the size of main memory.

256 KB = 218bytes -> log2 218 - 18 bits

16.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 9

Block offset bits are determined by the block size. According to problem statement, block size is 512 bytes.
Therefore, block offset bits can be calculated as follows:
log2 512 = log2 29 — 9 bits

356
Copyrighted Material © 2020
16.2 i) CORRECT ANSWER: 6

Index bits are determined by the number of sets (S) which can be calculated as shown below.
C = S * A * B where C = cache size = 32KB, A = 1 for direct mapped cache, B = block size = 512B, S = ?

C 32K B _ 25 x 210 _ n6
~ A * B ~ 1 *512 B ~ 2^ ” 2
log2S ~ log2 26 = 6 bits
16.2 ]) CORRECT ANSWER: 3

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, total number of tag bits can be calculated as follows:
# tag bits = # address bits -# index bits - # block offset bits = 1 8- 6 - 9 = 3
16.2 k) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Replacement policy is not required for direct mapping because new memory block from main memory simply
overrides the existing cache memory block in the event of a collision. Replacement policy is required for fully
associative and n-way set associative mapping techniques because main memory blocks can be placed in more
than one location of cache memory.
Helpful tip - Review replacement policies LRU, MRU, LIFO, FIFO etc. for n-way set associative and fully
associative mapping.
16.2 I) CORRECT ANSWER: 18

Total number of address bits required for cache memory address are determined by the size of main memory.
256KB = 218bytes -» log2 218 = 18 bits
16.2 m) CORRECT ANSWER: 9

Total number of block offset bits is determined by block size. According to the problem statement, block size is
512 bytes. Therefore, block offset bits can be calculated as follows:
log2 512 = log2 29 = 9 bits
16.2 n) CORRECT ANSWER: 0

Fully-associative mapping does not require index bits because main memory block can go anywhere in the
cache. Therefore, 0 bits are required for index field.
16.2 o) CORRECT ANSWER: 9

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, total number of tag bits can be calculated as follows:
# tag bits = # address bits - # index bits - # block offset bits = 1 8 - 0 - 9 = 9
16.2 p) CORRECT ANSWER: 9

Total number of block offset bits is determined by block size. According to the problem statement, block size is
512 bytes. Therefore, block offset bits can be calculated as follows:

log2 512 = log2 29 — 9 bits

357
Copyrighted Material © 2020
16.2 q) CORRECT ANSWER: 16

Total number of sets (5) can be calculated using following formula.

C = S * A * B where C = cache size = 32KB, A = 4, B = block size = 512B, 5 - ?

C 32KB 25 x 210
~ A* B ~ 4* 512 B “ 22 x 29 "
16.2 r) CORRECT ANSWER: 4

Total number of index bits is determined by number of sets (5) which can be calculated as shown below,
log2 5 = log2 24 = 4 bits
16.2 s) CORRECT ANSWER: 5

According to NCEES® FE Reference Handbook, the total number of tag bits can be calculated as follows:
# tag bits = # address bits - # index bits - # block offset bits = 1 8 - 4 - 9 = 5
16.21) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Average memory access time (AMAT) can be calculated using following formula:
AMAT = hit-time + miss-rate x miss penalty = 5ns + (100%-90%) x 200ns
AMAT = 5ns + 10% x 200ns = 25ns

358
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 16.3 - Architecture & Interfacing - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 409 for reference

16.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - B

RAM - Random Access Memory (RAM) is a type of computer storage memory. Typically, it is volatile, and BIOS is
loaded into RAM only after computer boots. ROM - Read Only Memory (ROM) is a type of computer storage
memory. It is non-volatile and BIOS is generally stored in ROM which is used to boot the computer.
USB - It is typically used as secondary memory storage device for portable data storage options.

16.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Encryption is a data conversion process which prevents unauthorized personnel from accessing. Encoding is a
data transformation process which involves changing data format for another system. Hashing transforms a
string into shorter fixed length value representing original string. Decoding is the opposite of encoding and
converts encoded data to its original format.

16.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Computer architecture describes the logical and functional design of a computer system including its instruction
sets, registers, addressing mode etc. It deals with high level issues. Computer organization describes the
structure and connection of various components within a computer system and deals with low level issues.

16.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Central Processing Unit (CPU) is responsible for decoding and executing instructions. It consists of Arithmetic
Logic Unit (ALU), Control Unit (CU) and Register Array/Set. ALU performs arithmetic and logic operations such as
ADD, subtract, AND, OR etc. Control Unit co-ordinates operations between ALU, memory and I/O devices.
Registers are storage devices that are used for extremely fast (but very small) memory access.

16.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Bus provides communication path between CPU and its peripheral devices. They can be broadly classified as:
1) Address bus - allows CPU to address memory locations. It is unidirectional and only carries address.
2) Data bus - Bidirectional bus that carries data/instructions between CPU and peripheral devices
3) Control bus - Bidirectional bus that carries primary command/control and timing signals.

16.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The width of a data bus determines the amount of data that can be transferred per unit time. A wider data bus
will be able to transfer more data per unit time which results in a higher computer speed. Overall system
performance also depends on several other factors.

16.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Von Neumann/Princeton architecture comprises of a main memory which is used to store both data and
instruction. Control unit communicates with this memory using a single pathway which is known as Von
Neumann bottleneck. In comparison, Harvard architecture consists of dedicated pathways for data and
instruction. Both computer architectures are used in modern computer design.

359
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 Chapter # 17 - Software Engineering
17.1 - Algorithms - Complexity/Big-0 - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 412 for reference

17.1 a) CORRECT ANSWER: 7

Values at the end of loop # 1 are as follows: y = 1, x = 1, z = 7

Values at the end of loop # 2 are as follows: y = 2, x = 3, z = 4

Values at the end of loop ft 3 are as follows: y = 3, x = 5, z = l

Values at the end of loop # 4 are as follows: y = 4, x = 7, z = -2

z < 0 at the end of loop # 4 therefore program will not run loop ft 5 and values at the end of loop # 4 are final.

17.1 b) CORRECT ANSWER: 29

Values at the end of loop # 1 are as follows: N = 21+ 1 = 3, temp = 21

Values at the end of loop # 2 are as follows: N = 23+ 1 = 9, value = 2s

Values at the end of loop # 3 are as follows: N = 29+ 1 > 100, value = 29

N > 100 at the end of loop # 3 therefore program will not run loop # 4 and values at the end of loop # 3 are final.

17.1 c) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The dominant term in 60 + 0.005n3 + O.Oln is O.OOSn3 . This term will grow fastest and determine the overall
processing time of the algorithm as n becomes very large. Therefore, for the given algorithm Big-0 is 0 (n 3).

Note: The constant 0.005 is ignored due to coefficient rule for Big-0 calculation.

17.1 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The dominant term in 0.5n 4- 15n2 + 20n log2 n is 15n2 . This term will grow fastest and determine the overall
processing time of this algorithm as n becomes very large. Therefore, for the given algorithm Big-0 is 0(n2).

Note: The constant 15 is ignored due to coefficient rule for Big-0 calculation.

17.1 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Option A is an incorrect representation of Big-O's rule of sums. The correct representation of Big-O's rule of
sums is provided in Option C. Option B is a correct representation of Big-0;s rule of products. Option D is a
correct representation of Big-O's scaling/coefficient rule.

360
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.1 f) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The dominant (and only) term in algorithm X's processing timeequationis 0.2nz log10 n.

Big-0 expression for algorithm X is 0{n 2 log10 n).

The dominant (and only) term in algorithm Y's processing timeequationis 10n2.

Big-0 expression for algorithm Y is 0(?i2).

Algorithm Y is more efficient for very large values of n because 0(n 2) < 0(n2log10 ?i).

17.1 g) CORRECT ANSWER: 1 0 50

To calculate n0 we need to find n for which: Run-time of algorithm X < Run-time of algorithm Y.

0.2n2 lo g 10 n 0 < 10n 02

logio no ^ 50

n0 < 1050

Therefore, if problem size n0 < 1050, algorithm X will perform better than Y.

17.1 h) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Worst-case time complexity of the nested loops with counters 'i' and 'j' is 0 (n 2).

The worst-case time complexity of loop with counter 'k' is O(n).

Overall time complexity of this code fragment can be calculated by using the rule of sums as shown below:

0(x + y) = 0(m ax(0(x), O (y)))

0{x + y) = 0(m ax(O(n2), 0 (n )))

0(x + y) = 0(n2).

17.1 i) CORRECT ANSWER - B

2n grows faster than n 2 for large values of n.

Therefore, 0(2 n) > 0(n2).

361
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 17.2 - Algorithms - Sorting, Searching - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 410 for reference

17.2 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

1st pass of bubble sort will involve following steps:

4 is compared with 0. Since 4 > 0, swap the items. 4 0 3 1 7

4 is compared with 3. Since 4 > 3, swap the items. 0 4 3 1 7

4 is compared with 1. Since 4 > 1, swap the items. 0 3 4 1 7

4 is compared with 7. Since 4 < 7, swapping not required. 0 3 1 4 7

2nd pass of bubble sort will involve following steps:

0 is compared with 3. Since 0 < 3, swapping not required. 0 3 1 4 7

3 is compared with 1. Since 3 > 1, swap the items. 0 3 1 4 7

3 is compared with 4. Since 3 < 4, swapping not required. 0 1 3 4 7

After two passes of bubble sort, the array will be: 0 1 3 4 7

Notice that in the 1st pass, n - 1 comparisons were made whereas n - 2 comparisons were made in second pass.

17.2 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Total number of passes required to sort an unsorted array of 'n' items using bubble sort = n - 1. Total number of
comparisons required by bubble sort = (n)(n — l)/2 = (7)(6)/2 = 21

17.2 c) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Best case time complexity of bubble sort is 0(n). This is possible when the list is already sorted. Bubble sort will
only run for 1 pass, perform n - 1 comparisons and zero swaps. 0(n ) means that the algorithm will still have to
travel through the entire list of V items.

17.2 d) CORRECT ANSWER: 7

Insertion sort requires n - 1 passes to completely sort a list of 'n' items. Therefore, 8 - 1 = 7 passes will be
required to sort an unsorted array of 8 items using insertion sort.

17.2 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Key = 15 is in its correct location with respect to (w.r.t) 10. 10 15 5 13

Key = 5 needs to be inserted in its correct location w.r.t 10,15. 10 15 5 13

Key = 13 needs to be inserted in its correct location w.r.t 5,10,15. 5 10 15 13

Once 13 is inserted in its correct location, sorting will be complete. 5 10 13 15

362
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.2 f) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The final step of merge sort requires combining two sorted sub-arrays into a single larger array. To achieve this,
we need enough space to hold the merged result. Since the two sub-arrays have a total of 'n' items, we need an
additional 0(n) space.

17.2 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Merge sort requires same number of steps to be executed for each scenario. Therefore, its time complexity is
identical in each case i.e. 0(nlogn).

17.2 h) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Since both sub-arrays a[ ] and b[ ] are already sorted, we will compare first items of each sub-array and place the
smaller of the two items at the front of final merged array c[ ] as shown below.

14 46 60 64 31 33 76 82

14

The next comparison will be made between 46 from 1st sub-array and 31 in the 2nd sub-array. Since 31 < 46, 31
will be inserted next to 14 in the merged array. This process will be repeated until the entire merged list is
complete and all the items from two sub-arrays have been inserted in correct locations.

Helpful tip - Complete necessary comparisons and insert all items from sub-arrays into merged array.

17.2 i) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Selecting the first or last items of a given list/array as a pivot for quick sort is very easy to implement. However,
if the list is sorted or partially sorted, quick sort's performance will reduce to 0(n2) with this pivot selection.
Most items will end up in either left sub-array or right sub-array due to which the true advantage of quick sort
i.e. divide-and-conquer will not be utilized.

Median-of-three is relatively simple to code but slightly slower than just selecting the first or last element. It
offers a greater chance to achieve 0(nlog?i) performance but a list/array can still be constructed to result in
0(n2) performance as a worst-case scenario.

Random selection is more complicated to implement because of the overhead involved in the form of random
number generator. It offers the best chance to achieve O(nlogn) performance because it is very difficult to
come up with a worst-case array arrangement that can result in 0(n 2) performance.

17.2 j) CORRECT ANSWER: 43

Median-of-three is calculated by selecting the median from the first (43), middle (17) and last (73) array
elements.

Median {43,17, 73}. It can be observed that in {43,17, 73}, 17 < 43 < 73. Therefore, median-of-three for given
array is 43. As discussed in previous solution, median-of-three results in a better Big-0 performance than
selecting first or last array element as pivot.

363
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.2 k) CORRECT ANSWER - C

In Option C, all items to the left of 4 are < 4 and all items to the right of 4 are > 4. This means that pivot has
probably been inserted in its correct location using quick sort. In quick sort, two pointers (left and right) are used
as shown below. Both pointers are moved towards the middle of the array in a stepwise manner. Left pointer
searches for items > Pivot and right pointer searches for items < Pivot.
3 9 8 10 2 11 4
L-Pointer R-Pointer Pivot
Initially, left pointer ~ 3 < Pivot. We need to advance the left pointer until we find an item > Pivot.
3 9 8 10 2 11 4
L-Pointer R-Pointer Pivot
Left pointer = 9 > Pivot, This entry needs to be swapped with a right pointer item < Pivot.
Right pointer = 11 > Pivot. We need to advance the right pointer until we find an item < Pivot.
3 9 8 10 2 11 4
L-Pointer R-Pointer Pivot
Right pointer = 2 < Pivot, now we can swap left pointer item with right pointer item as shown 1
3 2 8 10 9 11 4
L-Pointer R-Pointer Pivot
Left pointer = 2 < Pivot. We need to advance the left pointer until we find an item > Pivot.
3 2 8 10 9 11 4
L-Pointer R-Pointer Pivot
Left pointer = 8 > Pivot. This entry needs to be swapped with a right pointer item < Pivot.
Right pointer = 9 > Pivot. We need to advance the right pointer until we find an item < Pivot.
3 2 8 10 9 11 4
L-Pointer R-Pointer Pivot
Right pointer = 10 > Pivot. We need to advance the right point until we find an item < Pivot.

3 2 8 10 9 11 4
L-Pointer
Pivot
R-Pointer

Right pointer = 8 > Pivot. We need to advance the right point until we find an item < Pivot.
3 2 8 10 9 11 4
R-Pointer L-Pointer Pivot
Since right pointer has crossed left pointer, we can be sure that all the items smaller than pivot are correctly
inserted before left pointer. We can simply insert the pivot in its correct location by swapping it with left pointer
item. Now, our pivot 4 has been inserted in its correct location using quick sort.

3 2 4 10 9 11 8

Helpful tip - Continue sorting this array using quick sort until it is completely sorted.

364
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.2 I) CORRECT ANSWER - C

0 1 2 3 4
5 10 15 25 105

We can apply binary search algorithm as shown below:

1st recursion:

Low index (L)= 0, High index = 4, Middle index (M) = L + (H - L)/2 = 0 + (4 - 0)/2 = 2
Index 2 item = 15, 15 < 105. Now L = M + 1 = 2 + 1 = 3

2nd recursion:

L = 3, H = 4, M = L + (H - L)/2 = 3 + (4 - 3)/2 = 3 + 0 = 3 Note: Yi = 0.5 but in the integer form 0.5 = 0

Index 3 item = 25, 25 < 105. Now L = M + 1 = 3 + 1 = 4

3rd recursion:

L = 4, H = 4, M = L + (H - L)/2 = 4 + (4 - 4)/2 = 4 + 0 = 4
Index 4 item = 105 = search key.

Therefore, we require 3 recursions to find 105 using binary search on the given array.

Helpful tip - Understand binary search algorithm's formulas for calculation of low, middle, and high indices.

17.2 m) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Hash table can be constructed using array entries and hash function as shown below.

Array Item Hash Function Index

20 20 % 8 = 4 4
10 10 % 8 = 2 2
16 16 % 8 = 0 0
14 14 % 8 = 6 6
15 15 % 8 = 7 7
17 17 % 8 = 1 1

Note: % represents modulus operator which returns the remainder of division. Therefore, hash table for given
array and hash function can be represented as follows:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16 17 10 20 14 15

Helpful tip - Although in this problem, each array item has been successfully hashed to a unique index, it is
possible that in another scenario two or more items might hash to same index. In such cases, a collision
resolution technique is used to address loss of data. Some of the common resolution techniques include linear
probing, quadrative probing, plus-3 probing and chaining.

365
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 17.3 - Data Structures - Array/Linked List/Stack/Queue - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 411 for reference

17.3 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The array given in problem statement can be represented as follows:

0 1 2 3 4 5
11 9 15 16 21 3

It is important to note that the counter ri' will reach a maximum value of 3 before exiting theloop. Therefore,
only the array items at index 0,1, 2 and 3 will get printed i.e. 11, 9,15 and 16.

17.3 b) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Linked list is a data structure that organizes items sequentially. To count the total number of items in a linked
list, it is necessary to traverse through the entire list until a node is found for which next pointer is null. Key
performance parameters of linked list are summarized in the table given below.

Performance Parameter Worst-case Scenario Performance

Space complexity 0 (n )
Insertion at the beginning 0 (1 )
Insertion at the end 0 (1 )
Insertion within the list 0 (n )
Deletion 0(n)
Search 0 (n )
Traversal/Counting 0 (n )

Linked list's main advantage is its flexibility with respect to its size. Unlike arrays, there is no need to declare
linked list's size in advance because it can dynamically grow and shrink during run-time.

17.3 c) CORRECT ANSWER - D

The function given in problem statement adds a new node at the beginning of the linked list as follows:
// Reference to head of the list is provided along with data of integer type to the function
struct node * function (struct node * head, int data) {
// A new node 'temp' is declared within the function and memory is allocated to it
struct node * temp = (struct node*) malloc (size(struct node));
// Data field of 'temp7will hold input data
temp -> data = data;
// next of "temp' is made to point to head
temp -> next = head;
// 'temp" is returned as the new head pointer
return (temp);}
This function will be called in the main () body as follows:
head = function (head, 10); where 10 is an arbitrary integer data for the new node.
Helpful tip - Understand pseudo code of other linked list functions such as insertion at end/beginning, deletion.
366
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.3 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Linked list node contains data and a link to the next node as shown below.

Head Tail

17.3 e) CORRECT ANSWER - A

The process of adding data to a stack is called 'Push' operation. Stack stores data as last-in, first-out (LIFO) order.
A pile of plates on a table is an example of a stack. The plate that is placed last on this pile is removed first. 'Pop'
function removes the item from top of the stack. 'Top' function views the item on the top of stack without
removing it. Key performance parameters of stack are summarized in the table given below.

Performance Parameter Worst-case Scenario Performance

Space complexity O(n)
Push 0(1)
Pop 0(1)
Peek/Top 0(1)

17.3 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

The function given in problem statement displays the item at the top of stack. It is called 'Top' or 'Peek'. When
this function is called in the main () body of the program it will display the data contained in the data field of top
most node of the stack.
Note: Stacks can be implemented using array as well as linked list. Review and understand implementation of
other important stack operations including Push, Pop, Search, Traversal, Min, Max etc.

17.3 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Sequence of popped values is 8,10 as explained below.

4 - Push (6)
2 - Push (8) 8 2- Push (8) 3 - Pop () removes 8 2 - Push (8) 6 3 - Pop () removes 8
1 - Push (4) 4 1-Push (4) 4 1 - Push (4) 4

5 - Push (10) 5 - Push (10)

4 - Push (6) 10 4 - Push(6) 6 - Pop () removes 10
2 - Push (8) 6 3 - Pop () removes 8 2 - Push (8) 6 3 - Pop () removes 8
1 - Push (4) 4 1 - Push (4) 4

367
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.3 h) CORRECT ANSWER - D

As explained in the previous solution, after performing Push (4), Push (8), Pop (), Push (6), Push (10) and Pop ( )
operations, the stack will look as follows:

5 - Push (10)
4 - Push (6) 6 - Pop( removes 10
2 - Push (8) 6 3 - Pop( removes 8
1 - Push (4) 4
17.3 i) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Dequeue () operation (deletion) is being performed by given function. It is printing the data value of item at the
front of the queue and discarding reference to this item by making the front pointer to point to the item after
the printed item.

Note: Also review and understand pseudo code of Enqueue (), Peek {) and Display () functions.

17.3 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Enqueue () operation on this queue will be performed as follows:

5 will be inserted at the front of queue followed by 6, 3, 1 and 9.

Dequeue () operation on this queue will be performed as follows:

5 will be dequeued followed by 6, 3,1, and 9.

It can be observed that a queue follows first-in, first-out (FIFO) order of operation.

368
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 17.4 - Data Structures - Tree/Graph - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Page 411 for reference

17.4 a) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Tree is a non-linear data structure that organizes data hierarchically. Information is stored in nodes. First node of
a tree is called the root. Every node links to zero or more child nodes. For all nodes other than root node, there
is one parent node. Degree of a node is defined as the number of its children. Depth of a node is defined as the
length of path from roots to the node (each node has a unique path to root). Height of a tree is defined as the
maximum depth of any node within the tree.

17.4 b) CORRECT ANSWER - D

12,11 and 10 are the deepest nodes in given tree with a depth of 3. Therefore, height of this tree is 3.

17.4 c) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Depth of root node is always equal to 0.

17.4 d) CORRECT ANSWER - C

According to in-order tree traversal algorithm, we are required to traverse left sub-tree, then visit the current
(root) node and finally traverse the right sub-tree at the end. Therefore, in-order tree traversal of given binary
tree will be as follows: 6, 3, 2,1, 5,4 and 9.

17.4 e) CORRECT ANSWER - B

According to pre-order tree traversal algorithm, we are required to visit the current (root) node, then traverse
left sub-tree and finally traverse the right sub-tree at the end. Therefore, pre-order tree traversal of given binary
tree will be as follows: 1, 3, 6, 2, 4, 5 and 9.

17.4 f) CORRECT ANSWER - A

According to post-order tree traversal algorithm, we are required to traverse left sub tree, then right sub-tree
and finally visit the current (root) node. Therefore, post-order tree traversal of given binary tree will be as
follows: 6, 2, 3, 5, 9, 4 and 1.

369
Copyrighted Material © 2020
17.4 g) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Graphs allow arbitrary relationships between any two vertices (nodes). Tree is a special (structured) type of
graph. A graph 'G' is defined as G = (V, E) where V is the set of all vertices and E is the set of all edges.

A graph can be represented as adjacency matrix, adjacency list or an incidence matrix.

Adjacency matrix - Represents graph in the form of a n x n matrix where n is the number of vertices.
Adjacency list - Represents graph in the form of a n x 1 array of pointers where each element points to a linked
list of edges that are found on vertices,
Incidence matrix - Represents n x m matrix where n is the number of vertices and m is the number of edges.

17.4 h) CORRECT ANSWER: 4 x 4

Since there are 4 vertices, we require a 4 x 4 adjacency matrix as shown below. Matrix entries for adjacent
vertices are set to 1. For example, A - C = l, C - A = 1 but A - B = 0.

A B C D
A 0 0 1 0
B 0 0 0 1
C 1 0 0 1
D 0 1 1 0

17.4 i) CORRECT ANSWER: 6

As explained in previous solution, there are 6 non-zero entries in the adjacency matrix of given graph.

17.4 j) CORRECT ANSWER - B

Breadth first search (BFS) algorithm is used for traversing a graph

(and sometimes trees). It requires visiting all the unvisited nodes
adjacent to starting node. This process is repeated for each
visited node as shown in the figure on right.

17.4 k) CORRECT ANSWER - D

Depth first search (DFS) algorithm is used for traversing a graph

(and sometimes trees). It requires visiting one unvisited adjacent
node and traversing down one path as deep as possible before
backtracking to the last visited node and repeating the process
until all nodes have been visited.

370
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 17.5 - Software design methods/implementation/testing - Solutions
Consult NCEES® FE Reference Handbook - Pages 412 - 413 for reference

17.5 a) CORRECT ANSWER - Fragile

Rigid - A software design that is difficult to change.

Fragile - A software design that is prone to breaking in multiple places whenever a change is made.
Portable - A software design that ca n be used in different environments.
Immobile - A software design that is difficult to reuse for different projects.

17.5 b) CORRECT ANSWER - A

Static software testing involves verification using program code reviews, walk-throughs and inspections.

17.5 c) CORRECT ANSWER - White box

Glass box/White box testing involves detailed investigation of code's internal logic and structure. Internal details
of the code are made available to the tester so that tester can investigate if any section of the code is non-
compliant with performance requirements. White-box testing is in-depth detailed. But it can be time consuming
and costly.

17.5 d) CORRECT ANSWER - Black box

Black-box testing does not require tester to have any knowledge of code's internal structure. Tester does not
have access to source code. Tester simply provides a set of inputs and compares the outputs with a pre-
established set of expected results to determine whether the software is meeting performance requirements or
not. Black-box testing does not require highly skilled testers and it can be completed quickly. However, it
provides limited coverage and requires good test cases to be effective.

17.5 e) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Unit-testing involves dynamically executing units of codes to verify their individual performance. It helps in
isolating code sections and demonstrating their functionality. However, unit testing cannot catch the problems
that may result from interaction of different code sections i.e. problems residing at the boundaries.
Helpful tip - Also review the procedure involved in system-testing, integration testing and user acceptance
testing. Understand the difference between dynamic and static testing.

17.5 f) CORRECT ANSWER - C

Waterfall model is a linear/sequential process of software development which consists of predetermined phases
and milestones. It is managed by means of milestone reviews, baselines, and version controls. Some of the key
steps involved in waterfall model include specification development, software design, implementation, and
testing. Being a one-pass software development model, it has the advantage of being simple, easy to implement
and manage. However, its rigidity does not allow major scope changes during execution and it is not suitable for
complex projects.
Helpful tip - Also review iterative model, V-model, and code-and-fix model.

17.5 g) CORRECT ANSWER - B

The algorithm represented by flow chart in this problem calculates and prints average of 'n' inputs.
371
Copyrighted Material © 2020
 A lso b y W asim A s g h a r p .e ., p .eng , m .eng

FE Electrical and Computer Exam Preparation

Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Electrical and Computer - Practice Exam # 1

Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Electrical and Computer - Practice Exam # 2

Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Electrical and Computer - Practice Exam # 3

On-demand FE Electrical and Computer Exam Preparation Course

PE Electrical and Computer - Power Exam Preparation

Study Guide for PE Electrical and Computer - Power Exam

On-demand PE Power Exam Preparation Course

Visit www.studyforfe.com for more details.

372
Copyrighted Material © 2020
‘Practice makes perfect’ is as applicable to passing the FE exam as it is to anything else.
‘Third Edition’ of this Study Guide is also centered on the idea of ‘problem-based learnin<
It contains over 700 problems with detailed solutions based on N C EES® FE Reference
Handbook Version 10.0.1.

Key updates in this latest edition include the following:

• 200+ brand new practice problems

• Addition of new topics as per N CEES® FE Reference Handbook Version 10.0.1
• Solutions with step-by-step procedures and detailed explanations.

This study guide is specially designed to assist the students in developing familiarity with
N C EES® FE Reference Handbook which is the only reference material allowed during the
FE exam. Students will find relevant reference details, section-specific tips, and
recommendations at the start of each chapter.

The target audience of this book includes final year college/university students, new
graduates, and seasoned professionals that have been out of school for some time.

WWW.STUDYFORFE.COM
Wasim Asghar is a licensed Professional Engineer in T e x a s (P-E.), Flori
(P.E.), and Ontario (P.Eng) with consulting experience in pow er syste
design, commissioning and plant engineering for leading clients in
Energy, Mining, Metals, and Manufacturing. He holds a B a c h e lo r of
Engineering - Electrical with distinction from McMaster U n iv e rsity (20
and a Master of Engineering Engineering - Power System s from the
University of Toronto (2013) which was completed with work
In 2014, he undertook a two-year international work a s s ig n m e n t for a
major project in Florida and also decided to pursue P.E. lic e n s u re in th
United States. The road to license was challenging p rim a rily because
a lack of useful study material for the FE and PE exams.
Wasim passed both exams in the first attempts (FE exam in October
2014 and the PE exam in April 2015). The lessons learned during the
exam preparation process inspired him to develop FE E l e c t r i c a l and
Computer exam preparation resources such as this S tu d y Guide,
Practice Exams, and an online FE Electrical and C om pu ter exam
preparation course to help aspiring professional e n g in e e r s better
prepare for the latest format of the FE Electrical and C o m p u t e r exam.

ISBN 979867 0 8 8 0909

90000

ii i i i i i i u n i

798670 880909